Opmanager Userguide

OpManager Help Index 1
Hardware and Software requirements 2

Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition 5
MSSQL server configuration for OpManager 20
Scalability Recommendations 24
Migration and Backup Guide 25
Starting OpManager 33
Register OpManager 37
Changing Ports in OpManager 38
Configuring System Settings 39
What you should monitor 41
Monitoring Interval 42
Add Credentials 43
Discovering Networks 48
Discovery Filter 52
Add Device Failure Messages 53
Device Discovery - \General Failure\ 55
Adding devices using SSH 57
Configuring Discovery Rule Engine 60
Layer 2 Discovery 62
Managing and Unmanaging a Device 64
Configuring Custom Device or Interface Properties 67
Configuring Device Dependencies 68
Using Device Templates 70
Using Interface Templates 75
Categorizing into Default Maps 77
Add New Infrastructure Views 78
Different Types of Views 79
Grouping 81
Adding Domain 85
Creating Users 91
Changing Password 94
Remove Users 96
Pass-through Authentication 97
Monitoring CPU 102
IP/DNS Polling 103
Adding More Monitors 105
Adding Custom Monitors 106
Adding SNMP Monitors 107
Deleting performance monitors 116
List of Performance Monitors 120
Adding WMI-based Custom Monitors 161
Device-specific Monitoring Configuration 162
Configuring Thresholds for monitors 163
Monitoring TCP Services 165
Monitoring TCP Services on a Device 166
Adding New TCP Service Monitors 167
Monitoring Windows Services 168
Adding New Windows Service Monitors 169
Monitoring Processes 170
Viewing Active Processes 171
Adding New Process Template 172
Associating Process Template 173
Associating Script Templates 174
Monitoring Log Files using Agents 175
Adding File Monitoring Template 177
Adding Folder Monitoring Template 180
Monitoring Active Directory 182
Monitoring MS Exchange 184
Monitoring MSSQL Parameters 185
Monitoring Windows Event Logs 186
URL Monitors for Devices 188
Adding Syslog Rules 189
Configuring Syslog Ports 191
Monitoring Syslog Packets 192
Viewing Syslog Flow Rate 193
Hardware Health Monitoring 194
Prerequisites for Hardware Monitoring 195
VoIP Monitoring 201
VMware Monitoring 202
HyperV Monitoring 203
WAN Monitoring 204
Monitoring CIS-hardened devices 205
About VMware Monitor 209
Discovering VMware Server 210
VMware Performance Monitoring 214
Configuring Thresholds for VMware Host and VMs 217
Managing VMware Alerts 219
Notifying VMware Alerts 221
About Hyper-V Monitor 222
Discovering Hyper-V Server 223
Configuring Thresholds for Hyper-V Host and VMs 224
Managing Hyper-V Alerts 225
Notifying Hyper-V Alerts 226
Nutanix discovery 227
About Storage Monitoring 229
Supported device models 230
Prerequisites to add storage devices 231
Discovering Storage Devices 266
Managing alerts and notifications 268
Storage reports 272
Custom Dashboard 273
Widgets 276
CCTV 280
Menu Tab Customization 283
Client Settings 286
Viewing Workflow Logs 288
Workflow Checks and Action 289
Adding Workflows 310
Executing Workflows 314
Workflow Triggers 315
Configuring Actions on Alerts 317
Configuring Notification Profiles 319
Escalating on Alerts 321
Managing Network Faults 322
Processing the Traps into Alerts 323
Receiving SNMP Traps in OpManager 327
Suppressing Alarms 328
Viewing Alerts 330
Mail Server Settings 331
Proxy Server Settings 332
SMS Server Settings 333
Test SMS Server Settings via API Tool 334
Forwarding Syslogs 336
Forwarding Traps 337
Email Alerting 338
SMS Alerting 339
Sound Alerting 340
Running a Program 342
Run a System Command 343
Trap Profile 344
SysLog Profile 345
Scheduling Downtime 346
Modifying 348
Adding a new VoIP Monitor 349
Configuring VoIP Monitor Template 351
Viewing Top 10 Call Paths 352
Adding a new WAN Monitor 353
Configuring WAN Monitor Template 355
Viewing WAN Monitor Alerts 356
Viewing OpManager Reports 357
Viewing Interface Reports 358
Business View Reports 359
Creating New Reports 360
Editing Reports 362
Copying Reports 363
Scheduling Reports 365
Configuring Favorite Reports 370
Report Settings 371
Business Views 372
Google Maps 375
Zoho Maps 377
Datacenter Visualization 378
Layer 2 Maps 380
Page 1
OpManager - Network Monitoring Software
ManageEngine OpManager is a comprehensive network monitoring software that provides network administrators with an
integrated console for managing routers, firewalls, servers, switches, and printers. OpManager offers extensive fault management
and performance management functionalities. It provides handy but powerful Customizable Dashboards and CCTV views that
display the immediate status of your devices, at-a-glance reports, business views etc. OpManager also provides a lot of out-of-the-
box graphs and reports, which give a wealth of information to network administrators about the health of their networks, servers and
applications.
Quick Links:
OpManager v12 - Read-Me
Service Pack Download
Steps to apply Service Pack
OpManager v11 - Help
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Page 2
OpManager - System Requirements
The system requirements mentioned below are minimum requirements for the specified number of devices. The sizing
requirements may vary based on the load.
Hardware requirements
OpManager Standard/ Professional Edition
No. of Devices Processor Memory Hard Disk
1 to 250 Intel Xeon 2.0 Ghz 4 cores/ 4 threads 4 GB 20 GB minimum
251 to 500 Intel Xeon 2.5 Ghz 4 cores/ 8 threads 8 GB 20 GB minimum
501 to 1000 Intel Xeon 2.5 Ghz 4 cores/ 8 threads or higher 16 GB 40 GB minimum
OpManager Plus (or) OpManager Standard/ Professional Edition with Add-ons
OpManager Enterprise Edition
OpManager Enterprise Edition with add-ons
Note:
CPU recommendation for deployments use the �PassMark score. To learn more, click here.
We strongly recommend assigning a dedicated machine for OpManager.
For 1000 devices, 5000 monitors and 5000 interfaces with default monitoring interval and default database retention,
OpManager utilizes about 1 GB/day of disk space. The number may vary based on the entities monitored in your
environment & other factors like events generated, Syslogs, Traps etc.
Software Requirements
The following table lists the recommended software requirements for an OpManager installation.
Software Evaluation Production
Windows 10/8/7 (or) Windows Server 2019/ 2016/ 2012

Windows OS Windows Server 2019/ 2016/ 2012 R2/ 2012/ 2008
R2/ 2012/ 2008
Ubuntu / Suse / Red Hat Enterprise Linux (upto version 8)

Linux OS Red Hat/ 64 bit Linux flavors
/ Fedora / CentOS / Mandriva (Mandrake Linux)
Chrome/ Firefox/ Edge/ IE11
Browsers Do not use OpManager Enterprise Edition in Chrome (preferred)/ Firefox/ Edge/ IE11
Internet Explorer. This will cause IE11 to work
as IE7 which is not supported.
User Privilege: Local administrator privileges required for OpManager installation.

Port Requirements
Page 3
The following table summarizes the ports and protocols that OpManager uses for communication.
Ports used by the application
Ports used for monitoring
Ports used by add-ons
Database Requirements
The following table lists the basic requirements for your OpManager database server.
PostgreSQL
Comes bundled with the product.

In case of failover, please use MS SQL.
Microsoft SQL
1. Supported versions:
SQL 2017 | SQL 2016 | SQL 2014 | SQL 2012 | SQL 2008
2. Important Notices:
1. For production use 64 bit versions of SQL

2. Recovery mode should be set to SIMPLE.
3. SQL and OpManager should be in the same LAN. Currently WAN based SQL installations are not supported.
3. Collation:
English with collation setting (SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS)

Norwegian with collation setting (Danish_Norwegian_CI_AS)
Simplified Chinese with collation setting (Chinese_PRC_CI_AS)
Japanese with collation setting (Japanese_CI_AS)

German with collation setting (German_PhoneBook_CI_AS)
4. Authentication:
Mixed mode (MSSQL and Windows Authentication).
5. BCP:
The "bcp.exe" and "bcp.rll" must be available in the OpManager bin directory.
The BCP utility provided with Microsoft SQL Server is a command line utility that allows you to import and export large amounts
of data in and out of SQL server databases quickly. The bcp.exe and bcp.rll will be available in the MSSQL installation
directory. If MSSQL is in a remote machine, copy bcp.exe and bcp.rll files and paste them in the <\OpManager\bin> directory.
The SQL server version compliant with the SQL Native Client must be installed in the same Server.
Page 4
List of Ports to be opened in Firewall
For device discovery
If your device only supports WMI, you will need to keep the ports 135 and 445 open.
If TCP is supported by your device, open the ports 5000 - 6000.
For data collection and monitoring of devices
Open the below ports in the firewall to ensure uninterrupted monitoring of your devices.
SNMP-161(UDP) - Bidirectional
SNMP Traps- 162(UDP)- Unidirectional (From monitored device to OpManager server)
Telnet- 23(TCP)- Bidirectional
SSH- 22(TCP)- Bidirectional
ICMP- Used to check the availability status and to add a device. - Bidirectional
Default syslog port 514(UDP)- Unidirectional (From monitored device to OpManager server)
Note: OpManager uses ICMP for its initial discovery of devices. If your device does not support ICMP, discovering it via 'Discovery
Profile' is not possible. You will only be able to discover the device through 'Add Device' or 'CSV file' options.
Ports used by Applications Manager plugin

The following are the ports used by Applications Manager plugin:
HTTP - 9090
HTTPS - 8443
General Information
The ManageEngine directory (By default: C:\Program Files\ManageEngine\OpManager) and the database directory should
be excluded from the antivirus program.
Page 5
OpManager Enterprise Installation
OpManager Enterprise Edition can be deployed in the following cases:
Case 1: When geographically distributed networks need to be monitored from one location.
Case 2: When the number of devices that need to be monitored is more than 1K devices.
ManageEngine recommends the installation of a Central server and a Probe to effectively achieve a distributed network monitoring
environment.
Central Server: Central periodically collects health, performance and fault data across all Probes and consolidates the information in
one location.
Probe Server: The Probe periodically polls the devices in the local network and updates data to the central server. It has to be
installed at the Remote Location.
Note: If OpManager is run with MSSQL as the backend database, then the MSSQL database must be configured before proceeding
with the following installation. Page 6
Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Windows

Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Linux
Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Linux using Console Mode/Silent Mode
Starting OpManager Enterprise Edition
Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Windows
OpManager Central Server

Step 1: Download the OpManager Central.exe from this link: Download Central Server | ManageEngine OpManager
Run the exe as 'administrator'
Step 2: Click 'Next' to proceed with installation.
Step 3: Click 'Yes' to the OpManager License agreement
Step 4: Choose the destination folder for OpManager installation and click 'Next' to proceed
Step 5: If you want to change the default web server port for OpManager installation enter the new port number (OpManager
Central uses 80 as the default web server port) and click 'Next' to proceed.
Step 6: Register your OpManager license with required details to get technical support and click 'Next' to proceed.
Step 7: Select 'Standalone' or 'Primary' server . If you are installing failover, select standby server. First configure standalone or
primary for failover installation. Click 'Next' to proceed.
Step 8: If you select PGSQL, please proceed with Step 12. (or) If you select 'MSSQL' database (recommended for production). Click
'Next' to proceed
Step 9: If you select SQL Authentication, provide MSSQL details like Host Name, Port, Database Name. Use the SQL Server
Authentication credentials (Username and Password) created earlier. Click 'Next' to proceed
Page 7
(or)
If you select WINDOWS Authentication, provide MSSQL details like Host Name, Port, Domain Name, Database Name, Username and
Password. Click 'Next' to proceed.
Page 8
Step 10: Search for 'bcp.exe' and 'bcp.rll' in the MSSQL installation directory and copy these files under \OpManagerCentral\bin
directory. Click 'Next' to proceed.
Page 9
Note: The SQL server version compliant with the SQL Native Client must be installed in the same Server.
Step 11: Click on browse and select \OpManager\bin\bcp.exe. Click 'Next' to proceed
Page 10
Step 12: Click 'Finish' to complete OpManager Central Server installation.
OpManager Probe Server

Step 1: Download the OpManager Probe.exe from the below link: Download Probe Server | ManageEngine OpManager
Run the exe as 'administrator'
Step 2: Click 'Next' to proceed with installation
Step 3: Click 'Yes' to the OpManager License agreement
Step 4: Choose the destination folder for OpManager Probe installation and click 'Next' to proceed
Step 5: If you want to change the default web server, netflow ports for OpManager probe installation enter the new port numbers
(OpManager uses 80 as the default web server port and 9996 as the default Netflow port) and click 'Next' to proceed.
Step 6: Enter the details of the proxy server (if the probe is installed behind a proxy server) and click 'Next' to proceed
Step 7: Register your OpManager license with required details to get technical support and click 'Next' to proceed.
Step 8: Select 'Standalone' or 'Primary' server. If you are installing Failover, select standby server. First configure standalone or
primary for Failover installation. Click 'Next' to proceed.
Step 9: If you select PGSQL, please proceed with Step 14. (or) If you select 'MSSQL' database (recommended for production). Click
'Next' to proceed
Page 11
Step 10: Provide MSSQL details like host name, port, database name. Use the credentials (username and password) that was created
earlier while configuring SQL. Click 'Next' to proceed
Step 11: Search for bcp.exe and bcp.rll in the MSSQL installation directory. Copy these files under \OpManagerCentral\bin directory.
Click 'Next' to proceed
Page 12
Step 12: Click on browse and select \OpManager\bin\bcp.exe. Click 'Next' to proceed
Step 13: Provide OpManager Central server details like central server URL, Probe Name, Contact Name and Contact Mail ID.
Enter the Probe installation key. You can find the Probe Installation key in the Central Server page under Settings->Configuration-
>Probe Details.
Click 'Register' to proceed.

Page 13
Step 14: Click 'Finish' to complete OpManager Probe installation.
Page 14
Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Linux
Prerequisites
1. Sometimes, you might encounter errors such as database connection not getting established or the server not starting up. To
workaround these issues, comment the IPv6 related entries in the /etc/hosts file.
2. Check if the DNS resolves properly to the IP Address on the system in which OpManager is installed. Add an entry to /etc/host file
with ipaddress and host name if there is trouble starting OpManager.
Central Server
Step 1: Download ManageEngine_OpManager_Central_64bit.bin for Linux.
Step 2: Login as root user.
Step 3: Assign the executable permission to the downloaded file using the following command: chmod a+x
ManageEngine_OpManager_Central_64bit.bin
Step 4: Execute ./ManageEngine_OpManager_Central_64bit.bin with administator privileges (sudo). This will display the installation
wizard.
Step 5: Click 'Next' to begin the installation process. Go through the license agreement and proceed to the next step.
Step 6: In the subsequent steps of the wizard, select the OpManagerCentral language, the directory to install OpManagerCentral,
and the port number to run OpManagerCentral Web Server. Proceed to the next step.
Step 7: Verify the installation details and click 'Next'.
Step 8: Click 'Finish' to complete the installation process.
Note: It is recommended to install OpManagerCentral in the opt folder. By default, OpManagerCentral is installed in the
/opt/ManageEngine/OpManagerCentral directory.
Probe Server
Step 1: Download ManageEngine_OpManager_Probe_64bit.bin for Linux.
Step 2: Login as root user.
Step 3: Assign the executable permission to the downloaded file using the following command: chmod a+x
ManageEngine_OpManager_Probe_64bit.bin
Step 4; Execute ./ManageEngine_OpManager_Probe_64bit.bin with administator privileges (sudo). This will display the installation
wizard.
Step 5: Click 'Next' to begin the installation process. Go through the license agreement and proceed to the next step.
Step 6: In the subsequent steps of the wizard, select the OpManagerProbe language, the directory to install OpManagerProbe, and
the port number to run the OpManagerProbe Web Server. Proceed to the next step.
Step 7: Please enter the Central URL, Probe Name, Probe Installation Key, Username, Email ID and proceed to register the Probe.
Step 8: Verify the installation details and click 'Next'.

Step 9: Click 'Finish' to complete the installation process.
Page 15
Note: It is recommended to install OpManagerProbe in the opt folder. By default, OpManagerProbe is installed in the
/opt/ManageEngine/OpManagerProbe directory.
Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Linux using Console mode/ Silent mode
Prerequisites
To begin with, make sure you have downloaded the binary for Central and Probe for Linux OS.
Click here to download the binary files for OpManager Central and Probe (Linux OS).
Central Server
Step 1: Execute ManageEngine_OpManager_Central_64bit.bin with administrator privileges (sudo) and -i console option.
Step 2: Go through the license agreement and enter 'Y' to proceed. You can register for technical support by providing the required
details. (Name, E-mail ID, Phone, Company Name)
Step 3: Select the location.
Step 4: Choose the installation directory
Step 5: Configure the Webserver Port

Page 16
Step 6: Verify the installation details and press 'Enter' to complete the installation
Probe Server
Step 1: Execute ManageEngine_OpManager_Probe_64bit.bin with security privileges (sudo) and -i console option.
Page 17
Step 2: Go through the license agreement and enter 'Y' to proceed. You can register for technical support by providing the required
details. (Name, E-mail ID, Phone, Company Name)
Step 3: Select the location.
Step 4: Choose the installation directory and configure the Webserver Port.
Page 18
Step 5: Verify the installation details and the installation status.
Step 6: Configure the Probe details and press 'Enter' to complete the installation.
Page 19
Starting OpManager Enterprise Edition on Linux

Go to /OpManager/bin folder
Execute: sh run.sh
To run OpManager server in the background, execute: nohup sh run.sh&
Page 20
MSSQL Server Configuration for OpManager
If you choose to use MSSQL as the backend database for OpManager, we recommend that you create a seperate account for
OpManager in your MSSQL database server. This ensures proper functionality. However, if you wish to proceed with your existing
server account credentials, you may skip this configuration procedure and proceed directly with the installation.
Supported Versions: SQL 2017 | SQL 2016 | SQL 2014 | SQL 2012 | SQL 2008
Note: It is highly recommended that you use MSSQL database for production. This also provides failover/high availability.
Steps to configure MSSQL
Step 1: To ensure proper communication between the MSSQL database server and OpManager, a new account has to be created
with the below mentioned steps.
Open SQL Management Studio and login using your Server Account (sa)/ Windows credentials.
Right click on Logins
Select New Login
Step 2: Select Authentication type. For Windows authentication, select and login using your Windows login credentials. For SQL
Server Authentication, enter the password. Then proceed with Step 3. Page 21
Page 22
Step 3: Click on Server Role. Select Server Roles "dbcreator", "public" and "sysadmin"
Step 4: Click on User Mapping. Map this login to "master" with database role ownership as "db_owner" and "public". ClickPage
OK. 23
Page 24
Scalability recommendations
Interface count
We recommend monitoring up to 10000 interfaces in a single installation. If the count exceeds 10000, it will be efficient to increase
the monitoring interval of those interfaces. Adding more interfaces will directly impact the overall performance of the product.
Note:
1. Interfaces that have no data collection for the last 30 days will be automatically unmanaged and marked as 'Idle Interfaces'
under the interfaces Inventory page.
2. You can avoid the addition of unnecessary interfaces by choosing appropriate criteria and conditions in the interface
Discovery page.
VLAN count
To avoid any hindrance in the performance of the product, OpManager limits the count of VLANs discovered to a maximum of 3000.
New VLANs will not be allowed to be discovered in OpManager post the specified limit.
Trap processing limit

To avoid any performance degradation in OpManager, the number of traps to be processed per hour is limited to a maximum of
50,000. If this threshold is breached, OpManager stops processing traps for a temporary period.
Recommendations for Availability and Performance monitors

Based on the monitor type/protocol being used with the performance monitor, these are the maximum advisable number of
monitors for a single installation:
Protocol/Monitor type Max Number of Monitors Per Installation

Device Availability Monitoring 1000
SNMP 5000
WMI (including Application Monitors) 4000
CLI 2500
VMware 10000
HyperV 5000
Xen 5000
Overall, the maximum number of monitors per installation is 20000.
Note: Adding more monitors than the numbers suggested above will directly impact the performance of OpManager. If it is required
to add more monitor than this, then the polling interval of that monitor must be increased accordingly in order to balance the load
on the OpManager server.
For more information on the same, please feel free to contact our support team at [email protected].
Page 25
OpManager Enterprise Edition - A guide to migration and backup
Learn how to migrate your database, about backup & restore, and the steps to enable HTTPS in OpManager version 12300 and above.
Migrating Central and Probe
PostgreSQL
MSSQL
To move only the installation without moving the database.

To move both the database and the installed machine.
Data Backup and Restoration

Migrating Standard/ Professional To Enterprise Edition
Migrating LEE to Enterprise Edition
Enabling HTTPS
Changing Ports in Central & Probe
When should you migrate?
When hardware, server OS, or SQL requirements have been changed.

When you need new servers for space and better performance.
If you need to migrate products to a dedicated server.
When adding a new database or new server type.
Migrating Central and Probe from one server to another server
For PostgreSQL
Steps to migrate Central from one server to another:
1. Stop OpManagerCentral service. Execute 'OpManagerService.bat -r' under the OpManagerCentral/bin directory to remove the
OpManagerCentral service in the existing machine.
2. Take a compressed backup of the entire OpManagerCentral folder.
3. Extract the folder to the new system where Central is about to be installed.
4. Open command prompt with administrator privileges in the machine where the Central needs to be installed.
5. Go to the OpManagerCentral/bin directory in the new machine and execute 'initPgsql.bat' to give access permission for the
database from the new server.
6. In the same command prompt, execute ‘OpManagerService.bat -i’ to add OpManagerCentral as a service.
7. Start OpManagerCentral from Windows services in the new machine.
8. To update Central details for the new machine:
a. If the new system's IP address or host name differs from that of the existing machine, go to "OpManagerProbe/conf/OpManager"
directory, locate “NOCServerDetail.xml��? file and update the "NOCServerName" attribute value with the new server name.
2. If the IP address and host name of the new machine is the same as that of the existing machine, the 'NOCServerName' need not
be updated.
9. From version 12.4.042, update the Central Details in the Central Details page under Settings-->Configuration.
10. Restart all the probes.
11. To clean up the existing machine, uninstall OpManagerCentral.
Steps to migrate Probe from one server to another: Page 26
1. Stop OpManagerProbe service. Execute 'OpManagerService.bat -r' under the OpManagerProbe/bin directory to remove the
OpManagerProbe service in the existing machine.
2. Take a compressed backup of the entire OpManagerProbe folder.
3. Extract the folder to the new system where the probe is about to be installed.
4. Open command prompt with administrator privileges in the machine where Probe needs to be installed.
5. Go to the OpManagerProbe/bin directory in the new machine and execute 'initPgsql.bat' to give access permission for the
database from the new server.
6. In the same command prompt, execute 'OpManagerService.bat -i' to add OpManagerProbe as a service.
7. Start OpManagerProbe from Windows services in the new machine
8. To update probe details for the new machine:
1. If the new system's IP address or host name differs from that of the existing machine, go to Settings --> Configuration --> Probe
Details. Click on the probe name to modify the probe and update NAT Name detail for the probe which has been moved.
2. If the IP address and host name of the new machine is the same as that of the existing machine, the NAT name need not be
updated.
9. To clean up the existing machine, uninstall OpManagerProbe.
For MSSQL:
Case 1: To move only the installation without moving the database.
Case 2: To move both the database and the installed machine.
Case 1: To move only the installation without moving the database

In Central:
1. Stop OpManagerCentral Service. Execute 'OpManagerService.bat -r' under the OpManagerCentral/bin directory to remove the
OpManagerCentral service in the existing machine.
2. Take a compressed backup of the entire OpManagerCentral folder.
3. Extract the folder to the new system where the Central is about to be installed.
4. If you want to use the same database, continue without any changes. Please ensure that the database server is reachable in the
new machine.
1. If the new system's IP address or host name differs from that of the existing machine, go to "OpManagerProbe/conf/OpManager"
directory, locate "NOCServerDetail.xml" file and update the "NOCServerName" attribute value with the new server name.
2. If the IP address and host name of the new machine is the same as that of the existing machine, the 'NOCServerName' need not
be updated.
In Probe:
1. Stop OpManagerProbe Service. Execute 'OpManagerService.bat -r' under the OpManagerProbe/bin directory to remove the
OpManagerProbe service in the existing machine.
2. Take a compressed backup of the entire OpManagerProbe folder.
3. Extract the folder to the new system where the Probe is about to be installed.
4. If you want to use the same database, continue without any changes. Please ensure that the database server is reachable in the
new machine.
1. If the new system's IP address or host name differs from that of the existing machine, go to Settings --> Configuration --> Probe
Page 27
Details. Click on the probe name to modify the probe and update NAT Name detail for the probe which has been moved.
updated.
6. Start OpManagerProbe from Windows services in the new machine.
Case 2: To move both the database and the installed machine

It is not recommended to move the database from one Server Studio to another. Contact [email protected]
for further assistance.
Data Backup and Restoration
Moving installation from one server to another using backup and restore
Steps to migrate Central : (from version 124042 and above)
1. Stop the OpManagerCentral service and take a backup using the steps given in this� page.
2. Stop all the probes to avoid loss of data.
3. Do a new, clean installation of Central in the required server.
4. Follow the steps given in this� page� to restore the data.
5. Start OpManagerCentral.
7. If the new system's IP address or host name differs from that of the existing machine, go to� Settings--> Configuration -->
Central� in each probe and update the new Central system's IP address or host name.
8. If the IP address and host name of the new machine is the same as that of the existing machine, the host name of the Central
server need not be updated in the Probes.
Steps to migrate Central : (till� version 124041)
1. Stop the OpManagerCentral service and take a backup using the steps given in this� page.
2. Stop all the probes to avoid loss of data.
3. Do a new, clean installation of Central in the required server.
5. Start OpManagerCentral.
7. If the new system's IP address or host name differs from that of the existing machine, go to OpManagerProbe/conf/OpManager
directory and locate "NOCServerDetail.xml" file and update NOCServerName� attribute value with new server name. in each
probe and update the new Central system's IP address or host name.
8. If the IP address and host name of the new machine is the same as that of the existing machine, the "NOCServerName"� need
not be updated.
Steps to migrate Probe:
1. Stop the OpManagerProbe service and take a backup using the steps given in this� page.
2. Do a new, clean installation of the probe in the required server.
3. After the probe is installed successfully, start the service and check if the probe is communicating properly with the central.
4. Stop the newly installed probe.
6. Start the OpManagerProbe.
7. In Central, go to 'Probe Details' page and verify that the status of the old probe is displayed as "Running" and the status of new
probe is displayed as "Server Down". Page 28
8. Delete the new probe (*Do not delete the old probe*).
1. If the new system's IP address or host name differs from that of the existing machine, go to� Settings� -->� Configuration� -
->� Probe Details. Click on the probe name to modify the probe and update NAT Name detail for the probe which has been
moved.
updated.
Migrating from OpManager Standard/Professional to OpManager Enterprise Edition
If you are upgrading to OpManager Enterprise Edition for reasons concerning scalability or remote network monitoring or both, you
can migrate from OpManager Standard/Professional without having to start afresh. This means all the configuration and historical
data in the existing OpManager installation can be safely ported to the enterprise edition during the migration.
Upon migration, the existing OpManager installation (Standard/Professional Edition) will function as a Probe server. The Central
server has to be installed in a new machine.
To migrate to OpManager Enterprise Edition, follow the steps given below:(For OpManager version 124181 and above)
Step 1: Installing OpManager Central

Install the version of OpManagerCentral corresponding to the version of OpManager Standard/Professional Edition in a new
machine. Page 29
1. OpManagerCentral can be downloaded from this link.

2. In the List of Products field, select OpManager.
3. In the Product Version field, enter the version corresponding to the existing OpManager Standard/Professional Edition and click on
Submit.
4. In the new page, click on the required version (124181 and above) from the list.
5. Click on the required OpManager_Central_64bit file to download.
Step 2: Database Backup

Backup the existing OpManager Standard/Professional Edition database. To backup the database, follow the steps in this page.
Step 3: Migration
Migrating to OpManager Enterprise Edition can be done in two ways:
1. User Interface - Migrating with a step by step wizard

2. Console Mode - Migrating with Command Prompt. Console mode is chosen as default migration method if the UI is not supported.
1. Migration using User Interface:
Go to the bin folder under OpManager installation directory.
Windows OS: Run the MigrateToEnterprise.bat file as administrator.

Linux OS: Run the MigrateToEnterprise.sh file as root user.
The Migration Tool wizard appears.

In the wizard, enter the corresponding < Central Server Name >, < Protocol >, < Port > and the < Probe Installation Key >.
Enter the required < Probe Name >, < Contact Name > and < Contact E-mail id >.
Click on MIGRATE.
2. Migration using Console mode:
Go to the bin folder under OpManager installation directory.
Windows OS: Run the MigrateToEnterprise.bat file using -c as parameter.

Linux OS:� Run the MigrateToEnterprise.ssh file using -c as parameter.
Enter the details in the below order.

< Central Protocol >
< Central Name >
< Central Port >
< Probe Name >
< Contact Name >
< Email >
< Probe Installation Key >.
Historical data from probe servers can be sent to the Central server based on user preferences. However, the historical data will still
be available in probe server.
The migration process is complete. Now the OpManager installation functions as a probe server and synchronizes data with the
Central server. Page 30
* Points to note:
The OpManager Central version (to be downloaded) has to match with the existing OpManager version
(Standard/Professional Edition) for successful migration.
The OpManager version can be found by clicking on the User icon on the top right hand side of the existing OpManager
installation.
The Probe Installation Key can be found under OpManagerCentral > Settings > Configuration > Probe Details.
Historical data - The past performance data collected by OpManager. Historical data is used for populating graphs, charts
and generating reports.
Steps to Migrate OpManager Version 11600 LEE edition to Enterprise Edition

Contact [email protected] to migrate OpManager version 11600 LEE to OpManager Enterprise.
Enabling HTTPS in Central and Probe
Steps to enable HTTPS in OpManager : (for versions from 123181 till 124041)
1. In both, probe and Central, navigate to Settings --> General� Settings --> Security Settings --> SSL Configuration --> Enable
Secure Mode.
2. For more details on configuring HTTPS, refer this page.
3. Restart Central service.
4. For all Probes edit InitImpl� attribute in� OpManagerProbe/conf/CommunicationInfo.xml� from
com.me.opmanager.extranet.remote.communication.http.probe.HTTPProbeCommInit to
com.me.opmanager.extranet.remote.communication.http.probe.HTTPProbeCommInit
5. Restart all the Probes.
6. In Central, go to Settings --> COnfiguration --> Probe Details --> Edit Each Probe --> set NAT Protocol as HTTPS.
Page 31
Steps to enable HTTPS in OpManager : (for version 124042 and above)
1. In both, probe and Central, navigate to� Settings� --> General� Settings� -->� Security Settings� -->� SSL Configuration� --
>� Enable Secure Mode.
2. For more details on configuring HTTPS, refer this� page.
3. Restart Central service.
4. Then for each of the Probe, navigate to� Settings --> Configuration --> Central Details --> Protocol --> HTTPS.
Changing Ports in Central & Probe
Prev Next
In Central : (till version 124041)
Open Command prompt with administrator privileges and go to the� OpManagerCentral/bin� directory and
execute� ChangeWebServerPort.bat� (eg : ChangeWebServerPort.bat 443).
Restart OpManagerCental.
For all probes go to "OpManagerProbe/conf/OpManager"� directory and locate "NOCServerDetail.xml"� file and update the
"NOCServerPort" attribute value.
Restart OpManagerCentral and then all Probes.�
�
In Probe : (till version 124041)
Open Command prompt with administrator privileges and go to the� OpManagerProbe/bin� directory and
execute� ChangeWebServerPort.bat� (eg :� ChangeWebServerPort.bat 443).
Restart the Probe
In Central, go to� Settings� -->� Configuration� -->� Probe Details� --> Edit each Probe� -->Update new port� in� NAT
Port.
Page 32
In Central : (from version 124042 and above)
Open Command prompt with administrator privileges and go to the OpManagerCentral/bin directory and execute
ChangeWebServerPort.bat (eg : ChangeWebServerPort.bat 443).
Restart OpManagerCental.
Then open each Probe and navigate to� Settings --> Configuration --> Central Details� and specify the updated port number
of the Central system.
�
In Probe : (from version 124042 and above)
Open Command prompt with administrator privileges and go to the OpManagerProbe/bin directory and execute
ChangeWebServerPort.bat (eg : ChangeWebServerPort.bat 443).
Restart the Probe
In Central, go to Settings --> Configuration --> Probe Details and edit each Probe for which the port is changed.�
Update it in NAT Port.
�
Page 33
Starting OpManager
After installation, all the OpManager-related files will be available under the directory that you choose to install OpManager. This is
referred to as OpManager Home directory.
Starting OpManager on Windows

Starting OpManager on Linux
Connecting the Web Client
On Windows Machines
If you have chosen to install OpManager as Windows service, you will be prompted to start the service after successful installation.
The Web Client is invoked automatically on installing as a Service. Enter the log-on details. The default user name and password is
'admin' and 'admin' respectively.
To later start OpManager as a Windows Service, follow the steps below:
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.

2. Under Administrative Tools, select Services.
3. In the details pane, right-click ManageEngine OpManager and click Start.
To stop the ManageEngine OpManager service, right-click the ManageEngine OpManager service in the Services window and click
Stop.
Alternatively, you can choose to start OpManager as a Windows Service using Command Prompt:
1. Type "cmd" in the search bar and run Command Prompt. (Ensure that you are logged in as administrator)
2. Enter the path where OpManager is installed in your hard drive and access the bin directory.
3. Execute StartOpManagerServer.bat or run.bat files to start OpManager.
4. To stop OpManager, execute StopOpManagerServer.bat.
On Windows machines, an icon is displayed on the system tray to manage the application. You can start the client, start the server,
and shut down the server using this icon.
Page 34
On Linux Machines
1. Log in as 'root' user.

2. Execute the StartOpManagerServer.sh file present in the <OpManager Home>/bin directory.
To stop OpManager running on a linux machine, execute the ShutDownOpManager.sh file present in the <OpManager Home>/bin
directory.
Alternatively, you can choose to start OpManager as a service:
1. Open Terminal and log in as 'root' user.

2. Access the path where OpManager is installed.
3. Execute the linkAsService.sh file present in the <OpManager Home>/bin directory by using the sh linkAsService.sh command.
4. Start OpManager by executing systemctl start OpManager.service or /etc/init.d/OpManager.service start files, depending on
your OS version.
Page 35
5. Check the status of OpManager by executing the systemctl status OpManager.service or /etc/init.d/OpManager.service status
files.
6. Stop OpManager by executing the systemctl stop OpManager.service or the /etc/init.d/OpManager.service stop commands.
Connecting the Web Client

1. Open a JavaScript-enabled Web browser such as Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. Page 36
2. Type http://<host_name>:<port_number> in the address bar and press Enter. Here, <host_name> is the name of the machine in
which OpManager is running and <port_number> is the port that you have chosen to run OpManager Web Server during
installation.
[Note: If you have enabled SSL, connect as https://<host_name>:<port_number> in the address bar and press Enter.]
3. Type the User Name and Password and click Login. The default user name and password are 'admin' and 'admin' respectively.
Alternatively, if the OpManager server is running on Windows machines, you can start the Web client using
Start > Programs > ManageEngine OpManager > OpManager Web Client.
[OR]
Right-click the tray icon and select Start Client option.
From OpManager build 7010 onwards we provide SSL support for the webclient. Click here to enable SSL.
Page 37
Registering OpManager
You can register OpManager by applying the license file that you receive from ManageEngine. To apply the license, follow the steps
given below:
1. Click on the profile icon (Next to the Settings icon on the top bar).
2. Click on the Register tab.
3. Click Browse and choose the license file from the location it is saved.
4. Click the Register button to apply the license file and close.
Should you encounter any errors when applying the license, contact Support with the license error code.
Page 38
Changing Web Server port in OpManager
You will be prompted to change Web Server port during installation. You can also change it after installation.
The script for changing the Web Server port number, ChangeWebServerPort (in Windows this will be a .bat file and in Linux, .sh file)
is available under the <OpManager Home>/bin directory.
The steps to change the port number are as follows:
1. Stop the OpManager server. If you are running OpManager as Windows service, stop the service.
2. Open Command Prompt as Administrator, and navigate to <OpManager Home>/bin directory. Then, execute the following
command:
In Windows,
ChangeWebServerPort <new_port_number>
In Linux,
sh ChangeWebServerPort.sh <new_port_number>
Here, new_port_number is the one where you want to run the Web server now.
3. Start the OpManager server.

Page 39
Configuring System Settings
Date and Time Format Settings:
Select the required format for the date and time to be displayed in the OpManager web client. Report generated time will be based
on the selection of date and time format for exported reports.
Default Authentication:
Authentication mechanism to authorize access to OpManager. It can either be local or domain specific authentication.
Authentication type chosen here will be displayed in the login page and will set as the default authentication mode for OpManager.
Send Benchmark Statistics:
Data collected from the OpManager community is presented to the user for bench marking their performance.
Send Usage Statistics:
We collect benchmark and statistical data about quality, stability, and usability of the product from every installation with an intent
to enhance the product quality. The collected data will be used as a whole during the analysis and we will not share this data with
others. This feature is enabled by default. If you do not want your data to be collected, you can disable it any time.
Alert Notification:
When an alarm/alert is triggered, a notification pops up at the bottom right corner of the client. This option can be used to
show/hide the notification from popping up on your screen.
Printer Alarm:
This option allows you to view/hide the alarm notifications generated by printers.
Rack & 3D Floor View: Modification required
Enable or disable viewing the Rack & 3D Floor View in Maps.
Alert when interface bandwidth exceeds its speed:
To keep your interface bandwidth in check, enable this option. When the bandwidth of an interface exceeds its configured speed, an
alert will be raised.
Add/Remove Disclaimer Text in exported PDF/XLSX:
Enable this option to add a disclaimer in all your exported reports.
Add/Remove widgets in default dashboard:
To add/remove widgets on your default dashboard, enable this option.
Help Card details:
You can view the in-product How-to and FAQs present by enabling this option.
DB Query:
Enabling the DB Query option allows you to execute all read-only queries in the Submit Query window (Eg: select * from ). To get to
Page
the Submit query window, 'Enable' the DB Query option, click on the support icon and select DB query in the support window, or 40
alternatively press Alt+Q.
Product promotions:
Enable this option to receive in-product promotions and training announcements that includes helpful webinars and product
training sessions.
Product Assistance Notification:
Click here to enable/disable the helpful information that appears in the product to guide you to operate the product better.
Allow dashboard creation for operator:
If Enabled, operator user will get access to create their own custom dashboard.
Displayed Modules:
You can choose to view modules forStorage Monitoring, Flow Analysis, Log Analysis, Config Management, IP Management by selecting
their respective checkboxes. This adds a more complete IT Operations Management experience.
Displayed Add-on Modules:
Add-on Module for Applications Monitoring can be viewed by enabling this option.
Real Time Chart Rendering Mode:
Toggle between SVG and Image option to view the real-time charts.
Send Device and Monitor statistics:
Enable this option to allow OpManager to send anonymous data from the devices and the monitors associated with it. This
information will help in enhancing the Device Templates module.
Auto Sync Device Templates:
Enable this option to sync new Device Templates automatically and update existing Device Templates by verifying with the
OpManager Shared Device Template repository. A device template is a set of predefined properties such as device type, vendor,
monitors and the monitoring interval for a device. It lets you automatically classify and associate monitors across multiple devices.
Remote Desktop/Terminal:
Enabling this option will allow users to connect to the device's terminal from the device snapshot page. Additionally, it will also
provide access to Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) port from OpManager.
Page 41
What should be monitored?
Active network monitoring is a must to gain accurate and real-time visibility of the health of your network. However frequent
monitoring can become a huge strain on your network resources as it generates a lot of traffic on the network, especially in large
networks.
We recommend monitoring only the critical devices on the network. This is a best practice adopted by the network administrators
worldwide.
Following are the components of networks that are considered critical:
WAN Infrastructure: Routers, WAN Switches, Firewall, etc.

LAN Infrastructure: Switches, Hubs, and Printers.
Servers, Services, and Applications: Application Servers, Database servers, Active Directory, Exchange Servers, Web servers, Mail
servers, CRM Applications, etc.
Host Resources: CPU, Memory, and Disk Utilization of critical devices.
Critical Desktops and Workstations.
Virtual machines:� VMware, ESX/ESXi servers, HyperV, Xen servers and related guest virtual machines.
�
Page 42
Monitoring Interval for a Device Category
OpManager allows you to set common monitoring settings for all the devices under a specific category.
To do so, follow the steps given below:
1. Under Settings > Configuration > Quick Configuration Wizard > click Monitoring Intervals.
2. To enable monitoring for a category, select the check box under Enable column for the infrastructure you want to monitor and
enter the monitoring interval in minutes. To disable monitoring a specific category, uncheck the respective check box.
3. Click Save to save the settings.
For instance, if you want to monitor servers every minute, ensure that the check box corresponding to Servers is selected and then
enter '1' in the adjacent box.
Page 43
Types of Credentials supported by OpManager
Monitoring Credentials (SNMPv1/v2,SNMPv3,Telnet,SSH, WMI, VMWare, Citrix, UCS, Nutanix)
OpManager accesses the remote devices using the protocols SNMP, CLI, or WMI. The credentials like the password/snmp
community, port etc., may differ for different device types. Pre-configuring a set of credentials in OpManager helps applying
them to multiple devices at a time, saving a lot of manual effort.
SNMP v1/SNMPv2: SNMPv1 /v2 are community based security models. They use access mechanisms known as 'Read community' (for
Read access) and 'Write community' ( for Write access ). The following are the parameters that are essential for a SNMP v1/v2
credential:
Provide a name for the Credential name and description. Configure the correct Read and Write community, SNMP Port, SNMP
Timeout (in seconds) and SNMP Retries.
Note: SNMP Write Community is optional and is used if you don't have read access. But it is mandatory for the OpManager
plugins.
SNMP v3: SNMPv3 is a user based security model. It provides secure access to the devices by a combination authenticating and
encrypting packets over the network. The security features provided in SNMPv3 are Message integrity, Authentication and
Encryption. If you select SNMPv3 as the credential type, then configure the following parameters.
1. Name: Credential name

2. Description: A brief description about the credential.
3. User Name: The user (principal) on behalf of whom the message is being exchanged.
4. Context Name: An SNMP context name or "context" in short, is a collection of management information accessible by an SNMP
entity. An item of management information may exist in more than one context. An SNMP entity potentially has access to many
contexts. In other words, if a management information has been defined under certain context by an SNMPv3 entity, then any
management application can access that information by giving that context name. The "context name" is an octet string, which
has at least one management information.
5. Authentication: Select any of the authentication protocols either MD5 or SHA and enter the password. MD5 and SHA are
processes which are used for generating authentication/privacy keys in SNMPv3 applications.
6. Encryption: Select any of the encryption protocols between DES, AES-128, AES-192 or AES-256 and enter the password. Note: Only
after configuring Authentication it is possible to configure Encryption.
7. SNMP Port: SNMP port number.
8. SNMP Timeout:SNMP timeout in seconds.
9. SNMP Retries: SNMP retries.
Note:
Ensure that the snmpEngineBoots and snmpEngineTime parameters specified in the device are in-sync with those specified in
the SNMP agent. If not, the device discovery in OpManager will fail.
Make sure that the context name given in OpManager is mapped properly to the agent credential
How to check if the snmpEngineBoots and snmpEngineTime values specified in the device are in-sync with those in the SNMP
Agent ?
You can use the Wireshark tool to check if the snmpEngineBoots and snmpEngineTime parameters specified in the device and the
SNMP Agent are in-sync with one another.
Download wireshark from here and query for the SNMP OID from the MIB browser. If the SNMP response message is a report with
OID 1.3.6.1.6.3.15.1.1.2, then it means that the boot time and boot count are not synchronized. Page 44
WMI: WMI is a windows based credential used for authentication of devices that run on Windows operating system. If you select
WMI as the protocol, configure the Domain Name, the User Name, and the Password. Example:- TestDomain\TestUser. Also enter the
credential name and description.
Note:
The amount of information that can be monitored using the WMI credential depends on the whether the credential supplied to
OpManager has full admin privilige or not.
If the credential does not have full admin privilige, certain operations like Folder monitoring ( for restricted folders ) cannot be
done. Hence it is recommended ( though not mandatory ) to use WMI credentials that has full admin priviliges for monitoring
using OpManager.
If your network has a threshold limit on the number of incorrect login attempts, supplying an incorrect WMI credential might
lock out the device in the Active Directory if the number of incorrect attempts cross the threshold limit.
Incorrect credentials will also affect the OpManager performance. Hence it is always advisable to schedule Test Credentials to
ensure that the credentials supplied are correct and up-to-date.
Telnet/SSH:
These are authentication credentials for CLI based server monitoring.
Telnet: Ensure you configure the correct login prompt, command prompt, and password prompt besides user name, password,
port number, timeout (in seconds) and click Save to access the device.
SSH: Configuring the SSH protocol is similar to Telnet. Follow the steps mentioned in Telnet to add a SSH credential.
SSH Key Authentication: This is a feature available for the SSH protocol. Choose SSH and select the SSH Key Authentication
option. Ensure you configure the user name and choose the SSH Key using the Browse button. Enter the correct command
prompt besides the port number and timeout (in seconds) to access the device. To know more, click here.
A Password prompt / Login prompt is the symbol in the CLI response which is used to decide the end of the response. The most
commonly used password / login prompts are #, $.
Ensure that the correct password prompt and Login prompt is provided while defining the Telnet / SSH credential in OpManager
since an incorrect Login / Password prompt will lead to failure of device discovery
VMware:Provide the VSphere client username and password. Enter the VMware web service port number and timeout interval for
the connection between the Host and OpManager server.
Also, ensure that the credentials provided are those of the VCenter under which the required hosts / VM's are present
Citrix: Provide the Username and Password of the Host. Enter the web service port number and timeout interval for the connection
between the Host and OpManager server.
UCS: Provide the UCS Manager Username and Password. Enter the Port, Protocol and Timeout interval for the connection between
the UCS and OpManager Server.
Nutanix: Provide the username and password of the Prism API element, the protocol being used (HTTP/HTTPS), the timeout value for
the connection and the port in which the Prism element is running.
Backup Credentials (Telnet, SSH, SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3)
Page 45
These credentials are used for discovering devices into OpManager plugins like the Network Configuration Manager module.
The Network Configuration module uses these credentials for taking Router/Switch config backup, and to perform complaince
check and config change management periodically.
Storage Credentials (SNMPv1/v2, v3, CLI, SMI, NetAppAPI) :
These credentials are used for discovering devices into the OpStore module.
This module enables storage monitoring of Disk, LUN, RAID etc. The Storage credentials helps you to monitor the storage devices
like Storage Arrays, Fabric Switches, Tape Libraries, Tape Drives, Host servers and Host Bus Adapters cards from all leading
vendors in the industry.
To learn how to add storage credentials in OpManager, click here.
SNMPv1 / v2:
Credential Pre-requisites:
The following are the pre-requisites for the various types of credentials supported in OpManager
SNMPv1 / v2:
SNMP read credential is mandatory

Ports: The default port used for SNMP is 161. Make sure that this port is not blocked by your firewall
SNMP v3:
Make sure the SNMP v3 authentication details received from your vendor has been implemented properly in the device
Make sure the context name given in OpManager is mapped properly to the credential
EngineID should be unique for all the SNMP v3 devices in an environment
Ports: The default port used for SNMP v3 is 161. Make sure that this port is not blocked by your firewall
Make sure the engine boot time and engine boot count is updated properly in the SNMP agent
Page 46
WMI:
Required credentials: Domain/User name, password

Make sure the Windows Management Instrumentation service & RPC service is running in the remote device for WMI monitoring
Telnet/SSH:
For Telnet/SSH, ensure you configure the correct login prompt, command prompt, and password prompt besides the user name,
password, port number and timeout (in seconds) to access the device.
The default port used for Telnet is 23 and SSH is 22. Ensure that the port is not blocked by your firewall.
For SSH Key Authentication, ensure you configure the user name and choose the SSH Key using the Browse button, and correct
command prompt besides the port number and timeout (in seconds) to access the device.
The default port used for SSH Key Authentication is 22. Ensure that the port is not blocked by your firewall.
UCS:
Make sure the UCS Manager Username and Password having remote authentication is configured.
Enter the Port, Protocol and Timeout interval for the connection between the UCS and OpManager Server
VMWare:
The default HTTPS port used for VMWare is 443. Ensure that this port is not blocked by your firewall
Provide the VSphere Username and Password of the VCenter under which the hosts and VMs which need to be discovered are
present.
Auto VM discovery feature is used to automatically update any changes in the vCenter environment ( such as addition of new
VMs to a vCenter ) to OpManager.
For monitoring VMware related devices, it is enough if a credential has 'Read only' privilege.
Certain functions like VM On & VM Off require admin privilege. Hence ensure that the credentials supplied has admin
privileges.
Nutanix:
The default HTTPS port used for Nutanix is 9440, and the default timeout is 20 seconds. If necessary, please change these values
according to your requirement.
Provide the username and password of the Prism element of the cluster under which the hosts and VMs to be discovered are
present.
Add Credentials
OpManager accesses the remote devices using the protocols SNMP, CLI, WMI or VMWare API. The credentials like the password/snmp
community, port etc., may differ for different device types. Pre-configuring a set of credentials in OpManager helps applying them to
multiple devices at a time, saving a lot of manual effort.
1. Go to Settings > Discovery > Credentials
Page 47
2. Click Add Credential
3. Select the required credential category & credential type.
4. Click here to know the prerequisites of each credential
5. Configure the following parameters and click Save to add the credentials:
Page 48
Discovering Networks Using OpManager
OpManager uses ICMP/Nmap to discover the devices in a network. You can either discover a specific range of devices or the entire
network.
1. Discovering devices from an IP Range

2. Discovering individual devices
3. Discovering a complete network
4. Discovering devices by CSV import
5. Import devices from Active Directory
6. Rediscover the existing devices
7. Discovering Interfaces
8. Scheduled discovery
Discover devices in an IP range

To discover a selected range of devices,
For OpManager versions 125174 and above:
1. Go to Settings -> Network Discovery -> New Discovery.

2. Select the IP Range option.
3. Enter the start and end IP of the required range.
Start IP: Specify the IP address of the device in the range from where OpManager should start the discovery process. End IP:
Specify the IP address till which the devices are to be discovered.
4. Select the required Credentials
5. Click on Discover and OpManager will direct you to the 'Discovered Devices' page.
6. Approve or Ignore the discovered devices by clicking on the respective options. The approved devices will be added to the
OpManager inventory and moniotored. The ignored devices will be removed from the queue of discovered devices and restricted
from future addition.
For OpManager versions below 125174
Import devices from Active Directory

Discover devices in your domain by importing them from the Active Directory.
Page 49
1. Go to Settings -> Network Discovery -> New Discovery.
2. Select the Import from AD option.
3. Enter domain controller name, domain name, user name and password.
4. Click on Verify to initiate the discovery process and OpManager will direct you to the 'Discovered Devices' page.
5. Approve or Ignore the discovered devices by clicking on the respective options. The approved devices will be added to the
OpManager inventory and moniotored. The ignored devices will be removed from the queue of discovered devices and restricted
from future addition.
Discover interfaces
Interface discovery can be performed in different ways.
During the initial discovery of devices
By default, automatic discovery of devices will be disabled in OpManager. To enable it, go to Settings -> Discovery -> Discovery
Settings and enable the Interface Discovery option. OpManager will now automatically discover the interfaces associated with the
discovered devices (when discovery is performed from 'Add Device' page). During bulk device discovery, the required interfaces can
be selected and discovered from the Discovery-Interface page.
From the Device Snapshot page
1. Go to the device snapshot page of the discovered device.

2. In the Interface tab, click on the Discover Interfaces option.
3. The interfaces associated with your device will be discovered and added in OpManager.
From the Interface Discovery page (only for OpManager versions 125174 and above):
1. Go to Settings -> Discovery -> Interface Discovery

2. Define a condition and criteria for interfaces to be discovered.
3. Click on the Discover option to start discovering interfaces that matches the specified criteria.
Page 50
Schedule Discovery
You can schedule device discovery in OpManager at specific intervals by specifying the IP range. The created schedule can be saved
as a profile and reports can be generated. To schedule a profile,
1. Click on the 'clock' icon displayed under Actions column of the respective Discovery Profile.
2. In the Discovery Schedule page, define the frequency at which you would like to re-run the discovery schedule and save the
profile.
Page 51
Page 52
Discovery Filter in OpManager
You can choose to add or ignore any single device or a set of devices before configuring device discovery schedule in OpManager.
Open OpManager and click on Settings -> Discovery -> Discovery Profile.
Click on the Add Discovery Filter at the top right corner.
Choose either Ignore/Add Device(s).
Specify the criteria - IP Range/ IP Address/ Category/ Device Type/Device Name.
Enter the Value or IP address as per the 'Type' you selected.
Finally click on Add and proceed with scheduling discovery.
OpManager will add/ignore the devices as per the filter specifications.
Page 53
Add Device Failure Message
Is an error stopping you from adding new devices to OpManager? Here is a list of error messages and the corresponding reasons on
why a particular error is triggered and solutions on how to resolve them.
Device not reachable

Cause
When the device you are trying to add is not pingable, this error is displayed. It is triggered when you are attempting to add a device
using its device name.
Solution
OpManager searches for the device using its device name and pings the device. If the device name is not found, this error is
displayed. This can be fixed by avoiding typos in the device name.
Note: When adding the device using its IP address, the device gets added even though it is not pingable. But its status is
classified as "Device not monitored". OpManager periodically pings this device and when it is available, it is added and
classified accordingly
Device already exists in OpManager

Cause
This error is caused by one of the following reasons
Same display name is used for devices with different IP addresses.

The IP address and display name of the new device is same as an existing device.
Solution
When using the same display name for multiple devices with different IP address, make sure to disable Unique System Display Name
(Discovery > Discovery Settings > Unique System Display Name)
Make sure devices with the same IP does not exist in OpManager.
Network IP not allowed

Cause
This error is displayed when the network IP and device IP are the same.
Solution
Network IP turns out invalid when the IP that is standard to a network (.0) is configured for a device. Check for typos and make sure
the correct value is entered.
Ensure the Device IP doesn't match the Network IP when it is fetched automatically.
Cannot add device. This edition of OpManager does not support adding more than {n} devices
Cause
Your device has run out of licenced devices that can be monitored. Here, {n} indicates the number of device that has exceeded the
licencing limit.
Solution
Page 54
Delete/Unmanage unwanted devices to make room for the new ones or purchase a licence that can accommodate a larger number of
devices.
Add Device Failed - Device Name : Problem in adding the device, please contact support with support
information file
Cause
This error is exclusive to SNMP devices. This error is triggered even though the device you are attempting to add is pingable. The
reason this is happening is because the Sysname turns up empty when trying to fetch the device details.
Solution
Sysname is a mandatory field, make sure this field is populated before attempting to add the device. To verify the status of the
Sysname, query the SNMP device to check if the SysName (.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5) returns a value.
Page 55
Device Discovery Error: 'Unable to contact IP driver. General failure'
This alert message is generated when OpManager server fails to contact the monitored device during its periodic availability status
poll. This error generally appears in a VM environment where the Virtual devices are running any Windows OS and when they are
unable to reach outside the network due to any of the following causes.
Hyper V � WinSock issue

VM duplicate Security Identifier issue
TCP/IP issues
Hyper V � WinSock issue
Cause:
This error occurs in your VM when there is a possibility of WinSock and WinSock2 setting being corrupted.
Solution:
You could try to point to the following registry paths:
HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\WinSock
HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\WinSock2
i. Backup the above registry.
ii. Go to another server (running the same OS configuration), go to the above registry paths, export the registry and copy them to
your current server.
iii. Double click on the reg files to register, reboot the system to see how it works.
Source
VM duplicate Security Identifier issue
Cause:
This issue is caused by a duplicate Security Identifier (SID) in a Windows 2008 or Windows 2012 virtual machine, when the either of
them are deployed from a template or a cloned virtual machine. And the guest customization option is not selected while deploying
the virtual machine.
Solution:
To resolve the issue, you need to run the sysprep tool to generate a new security identifier for the virtual machine. To do this,
i. Open a console to the affected Windows virtual machine.

ii. Open a command prompt in elevated mode. Right-click a shortcut to the Windows Command Processor and select the Run as
administrator option.
iii. Change the path to C:\Windows\System32\sysprep.
iv. Run the sysprep command.
v. When the sysprep wizard appears, check the generalize check box, leave all other setting at the default values.
vi. Reboot the virtual machine to apply the changes.
Source
Page 56
TCP/IP issues
Cause:
When you are unable to ping the loopback address/local setup, there are chances of your TCP/IP stack being corrupted.
Solution:
Turn off User Account Control (UAC) and login with the domain admin account. Follow the below steps to reset TCP/IP to its original
state:
i. On the Start screen, type CMD. In the search results, right-click Command Prompt, and then select Run as administrator.
ii. At the command prompt, enter the command given below and then press Enter.
netsh int ip reset resetlog.txt
iii. Restart the computer.
When you run the reset command, it overwrites the following registry keys, both of which are used by TCP/IP:
SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Tcpip\Parameters
SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\DHCP\Parameters
Source
Page 57
Adding devices using SSH Key based authentication in OpManager
A SSH key is an access credential used in SSH protocol. It provides the same functionality as the user name & password except that it
is much more reliable and cant be easily cracked.
OpManager supports SSH key based authentication. To use a SSH key, you must first generate it. Use the following steps to generate
a SSH key credential and discover devices using OpManager:
Generating SSH Key(Windows)
Generating SSH Key(Linux)�
Generating SSH key (Windows)

Generating the keys
Install putty� on your windows machine

Once the installation is done, go to the directory in which putty was installed and open the puttygen.bat file
Click Generate. (It will generate public & Private key.
Create a folder under windows user directory named SSH Key. Save the Public key and private key under that folder. (Do not
close the puttygen window). Copy the public key displayed in PuttyGen� window
Open the private key file and save it as key.txt.This will be used by OpManager to access the Linux system (Note: do not modify
anything in it).
Adding the public key in the Linux Machine
Find the authorized_keys file in the file /etc/ssh/sshd_config
�
Paste the public key copied previously in the authorized_keys file.
Key Verification:
You can check if the SSH key has been generated and assigned correctly by opening the putty.exe, entering the machine name and
then� from the left side panel selecting SSH -> Auth -> Load the Private key and opening the connection. � This should log in with
the key file. A successful login is an indication that the device has been added correctly using the SSH key.
Generating SSH Key(Linux)

Generating the keys
Generate key using the command� ssh-keygen
�
Page 58
This step will generate two keys - a public key and a private key.
The public key can be shared with other devices while the private key must be kept confidential as it will be used for authorization
purpose.
Adding the Public Key in the Linux

Find the authorized_keys file in the file /etc/ssh/sshd_config
Paste the public key copied previously in the authorized_keys file.
Key Verification
Now login with the private key.

If the key used is right, you should be able to� login successfully without the system prompting you for a password.
Page 59
Adding devices into OpManager using SSH credentials:
In the OpManager server, go to Settings -> Discovery -> Device Credentials.

Click on Add Credentials and select Telnet/SSH.
Name the credential and check the SSH Key Authentication check box.
Provide the user name and upload the private_key.txt saved in the previous step and save the credential.
You can now add/discover Linux devices using this credential.

Page 60
Discovery Rule Engine
Discovery Rule Engine helps you automate the activities such as adding monitors to a device or adding a device to a business view
that you carryout after adding the devices to OpManager. This helps you start monitoring the devices straightaway as soon as you
add them and avoid repetitive manual effort.
How does Discovery Rule Engine Work?
The Discovery Rule Engine is condition/criteria based. During discovery, devices that satisfy the condition/criteria are associated with
the actions specified in the Discovery Rule Engine.
Steps to add a Discovery Rule Engine
1. Go to Settings -> Discovery -> Discovery Rule Engine and click on Add rule on the top right.
2. Enter a Name and Description for the Discovery Rule Engine.
3. Criteria refers to the parameter of the device which must be checked for applying the rule (Such as DNS Name / Category /
Type...). Define the Criteria and select the Condition.
Eg. Select Service Name as the Criteria and equals as the Condition, and enter the POP3Svc (POP3Svc is a MSExchange service.
This is to verify whether the discovered device is an exchange server or not.)
4. If required you can define multiple criteria, but have to select either AND or OR option.
AND: Executes the action when all the defined criteria are satisfied.
OR: Executes the actions when any one of the defined criteria is satisfied.
5. Define the Actions. An Action refers to the process to be performed on a device if it satisfies the specified criteria.
The following are the list of possible actions that can be performed by a Discovery rule Engine:
Associate a Process Monitor with the device

Associate a Service Monitor with the device
Associate a Windows NT Service Monitor with the device
Associate a File / Folder / Script Monitor with the device
Add the device to a Business View
Associate a URL Monitor with the device
Associate an Event Log Rule to the device
Associate MSSQL Monitors with the device
Associate Notification Profiles with the device
6. Select the required action. You can add additional actions by clicking on the Add (+).
Following are the list of actions that be performed on the created Discovery Rule.
Edit
Copy As
Enable/Disable
Delete
7. Click on Save.
Page 61
Re-running a Discovery Rule Engine

To re-run a rule on demand,
1. Select the rule that you want to re-run.
2. Click on the Re-run button.
3. Select the devices on which you want to execute the rule.
4. Click Run.
How to draw Layer 2 maps? Page 62
Discovering devices using Layer2 maps

How to draw Layer 2 maps?
OpManager allows you to discover Layer2 devices that are connected to your network and draws a visual representation of the
same. This includes a detailed map of all the nodes, interconnected layers and port-to-port connectivity in addition to the
interfaces.
To start discovering your layer2 devices, go to Settings > Discovery > Layer2 Discovery. This process can also be initiated from
Maps > Layer 2 Maps > Create New.
Enter a name in the Layer2 Map Name section and proceed to type the IPv4 of your seed device in the Router IPv4 Address
section.
Configure a seed device : A seed device is the core router or L3 switch in your network. The device must have SNMP-
enabled so that OpManager is able to query the device and draw the links automatically. The seed device should
have "ipForwarding" set to 1 for the OID - .1.3.6.1.2.1.4.1.0 and must have two or more interfaces. (identified by querying
the OID - 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1)
The seed router will be connected to a vast number of devices. If you wish to restrict your Layer2 Map to a certain IP range,
enter their Start IP and End IP and press the �+� icon. You can specify multiple such entries.
Discovery Mechanism:
OpManager supports multiple discovery protocols. Choose one (or more) that is implemented in your seed router/L3 switch.
This will drastically reduce the time taken to discover the devices.
Schedule interval:
As changes happen to the networks frequently, OpManager allows you to configure an interval (in days) to re-draw the map. For
instance, if a change happens once in a week, you can configure OpManager to re-draw the map every seven days.
Set Uplink Dependency:

This option helps in avoiding multiple device-down alerts when the parent device is down. Besides the layer2 discovery window,
Uplink Dependency can also be set from the Quick Configuration Wizard.
Note: Uplink Dependency happens only during Device Import and not during Layer2 Map discovery.
Credentials:
Choose the SNMP credentials required for the seed router to identify the devices. You can add new credentials from the Add
Credentials button.
Page 63
To learn how to customize your layer 2 Map, click here.

Page 64
Managing and Unmanaging a Device
By default, OpManager manages all the discovered devices. However, there might be some known devices that are under
maintenance and hence cannot respond to status polls sent by OpManager. These devices can be set to unmanaged status to avoid
unnecessary polling. Once maintenance gets over, they can be set to managed status.
To unmanage a managed device:
Go to Inventory > Devices > Device snapshot page

Click the Menu icon and select Unmanage.
This stops the status polling and data collection for the device and changes the device status icon to grey.
To start managing an unmanaged device:
Go to Inventory > Devices > Device snapshot page

Click the Menu icon and select Manage.
This resumes the status polling and data collection for the device. The status icon shows the current status of the device.
Page 65
To Manage or Unmanage devices in bulk:
Go to Inventory.
Select the devices you wish to manage/unmanage.
Click on the menu at the top right and select manage/unmanage devices.
You can also use the Quick Configuration Wizard (Settings ? Configuration ? Quick Configuration Wizard ? Manage/Unmanage
devices) to manage or unmanage devices in bulk.
Page 66
Page 67
Configuring Custom Fields for Devices or Interfaces
Configure additional properties of a device/interface by adding Custom Fields. This makes device management easy.
1. Go to Settings ? Configuration ? Custom Fields. A list of pre-populated fields are shown.

2. Choose between Device Fields or Interface Fields, click Add Field button on the top right corner and configure the following values.
1. Field Name: Configure the name of the additional
2. Field Type: Select the property type (text, numeric and date)
3. Field Length: Set the length of the field.
4. Description : Add a meaningful description for the field.
5. Click Save
You can also import custom field properties from a CSV file. To do this, go to Settings ? Configuration ? Custom Fields ? Import
Values button. Click Browse button and choose the CSV file containing the Custom Field properties for device or interface.
The properties added is applied to all the devices or interfaces. To view the Custom Fields, go to the respective Device or Interface
snapshot page and check the Custom Field section.
In Enterprise edition, the 'Add Field' action can only be performed from the Central server. You cannot add new custom
fields from the Probe servers.
Page 68
Configuring Device Dependencies
The status polling for a device can be controlled based on its dependency on some other device. This prevents the unnecessary
status checks made to the dependent nodes.
For instance, many devices will be connected to a switch. If the switch goes down, all the devices connected to it will not be
reachable. In this case, it is unnecessary to check the status of the dependent devices.
To configure the dependency for devices, follow the steps given below:
Select Settings ? Configuration ? Quick Configuration Wizard.
Select Configure Device Dependencies and click Next.
Select a category from Filter by category to list the devices managed under a specified category. Select a device from Select
parent device and click Next.
Select Device Dependencies in individual devices

You can also configure dependencies for a single device from the device snapshot page. Here are the steps:
1. Go to the device snapshot page.

2. From the device details, click the link against the property Dependency.
3. Select the device on which it is dependent.
OpManager stops monitoring the devices if the dependent device is down. Configuring dependencies prevents false alarms.
Page 69
Page 70
Configuring Device Templates
During initial discovery, OpManager categorizes the network devices into servers, printers, switches, routers and firewalls. For proper
classification, install and start the SNMP agent on all the managed devices.
OpManager comes with over 9000 device templates which carry the initial configurations to classify the devices into the pre-defined
categories, and to associate monitors to them. The device templates enables you to effect a configuration once and is applied to
several devices at a time whenever there is a change.
The templates carry the information required to classify the devices and to associate relevant monitors. You can define your own
templates and modify the existing ones.
Creating/Modifying Device Templates
1. Go to Settings ? Configuration ? Device Templates.

2. Device Templates can also be Imported from ManageEngine Support / Community Forums / from a different instance of
OpManager. Click here to learn how.
3. To define a template for a new device type, click Add Template and proceed with the steps given below.
4. To modify an existing template, click any existing Template nameand configure/modify the following properties:
Device Template: Specify the device type.

Vendor Name: Select the vendor. Click New to add a new vendor, and Save.
Category: Select the category for the device type. On discovery, the devices are automatically placed in the select Category
map.
Monitoring Interval: Configure the interval at which the device needs monitoring.
Device Image: Select the image for this device type.
Device Identifier : Type the sysOID and click Add (or) Click Query Device for OpManager to query the device for the OID.
Associated Monitors: Click on Add to add monitors. You can choose to add an existing monitor or create a new SNMP
monitor.
Edit Thresholds: Click this option to edit thresholds of the Associated Monitors.
Click the Save button to save all the changes.
5. Device Templates are automatically associated to devices upon Discovery, however, it can also be done manually. To learn how to
manually associate a Device Template to a new device, click here.
Page 71
Device Identifier:
Device identifier is used to pin point an SNMP device by observing its sysOID. OpManager uses this feature to map the device to its
respective device template. If you do not have the sysOID, you can also obtain it by querying an SNMP device of your network using
Query Device. To further assist you with in \-depth device template classification, Additional SysOIDs can be employed. This is done
by editing the existing sysOID and adding special criteria. Click here to learn more.
Associating Monitors:
Choose and add Monitors to the Device Template. These Monitors will automatically be associated to the devices upon discovery. You
can choose from existing Monitors or create new ones.
Monitors: Choose a monitor from an existing list.

SNMP: Add SNMP monitors by selecting the Device name, SNMP OID and Functional Expression.
Bulk SNMP: Choose to add SNMP monitors in bulk.
Page 72
WMI: Add WMI monitors by choosing Device Name, Credentials and specifying Monitoring Interval.
Device Classification:
The classified devices are placed under different categories for easy management. For proper device classification, make sure you
have installed and started SNMP in all the network devices before starting OpManager service.
The default category includes:
Servers
Routers
Desktops
Switches
Firewalls
DomainControllers
Load Balancer
WAN Accelerator
Wireless
UPS
PDU
Printers
Unknown
Storage
URLs
WAN RTT Monitors
VoIP Monitors
You can also add your own infrastructure views. For example, if you want to group a set of sensors, it will be absurd to classify them
under servers or desktops. In such cases, the custom infrastructure allows you to create more defined groups by adding additional
custom views.
This initial classification may not be accurate if -
The network devices do not support SNMP.

Some devices have their SNMP settings different from those specified in the Credential Settings.
Sync new device templates

You can access the sync option by visiting Settings -> Configuration -> Device Templates -> Sync Templates.
Page 73
This will fetch and sync all new device templates from the shared repository of OpManager. You can also enable auto sync option.
This enables you to discover new deivce templates at constant intervals.
You can enable auto sync by visiting Settings -> System Settings. But if the auto sync fails to for about three consecutive times due to
connection issues, it will get disabled internally. However, on the product UI it would still appear as 'enabled'. To actually re-enable it
you have to restart the service once again.
Page 74
Auto sync will also be available in the inventory page. And when you drill down to the device snapshot page, you can see the 'sync
and rediscover' option which allows you to rediscover the device which was perviously unavailable without the device template.
Page 75
Configuring Interface Templates
During initial discovery, OpManager categorizes the device interfaces into corresponding interface types with the help of predefined
templates that are bundled with the product. OpManager comes with 292 interface templates which carry the initial
configurations to classify these interfaces and associate monitors to them. Any changes made in the interface template will directly
reflect on all the corresponding interfaces of the same type across all the devices in one go.
OpManager also allows the users to define multiple severity thresholds for interface templates, thereby generating alerts when the
threshold values are violated.
Modifying Interface Templates
1. Go to Settings > Configuration > Interface Templates

2. Under Interface Types, search for the template you wish to edit and click on it. Don't forget to use the All/Common toggle at the
top right to list all type of interfaces.
3. Configure/Modify the following properties:
Manage/UnManage: Specify whether the interfaces belonging to the template must be managed or unmanaged.
Monitoring interval: Select the interval at which this interface type must be polled to fetch monitoring data & availablity
status.
Configure Thresholds: The threshold values for Utilization, Error Rate and Discard Rate can be specified under the
corresponding tabs. OpManager also allows you to configure multiple severity thresholds for the same. Enter the threshold
values for Attention, trouble, discard and rearm. If the threshold values are violated, corresponding alarms will be raised. You
can also configure thresholds for Interface groups.
Note: To stop monitoring the Utilization / Error Rate / Discard Rate, uncheck the checkbox in the corresponding tabs.
Status poll : Poll the interface for its availability using SNMP (ifAdminStatus & ifOperStatus).
Page 76
NOTE: Selecting Apply template to all interfaces, Select interfaces to apply template or Select Groups to apply template option will
completely override the existing interface configurations.
Page 77
Categorization into Default Maps
Devices are categorized into the following default maps in OpManager: The classification is done using SNMP and NMAP.
Servers
Routers
Desktops
Switches
Firewalls
DomainControllers
Load Balancer
WAN Accelerator
Wireless
UPS
Printers
PDU
Virtual Device
UCS
Unknown
Storage
URLs
WAN RTT Monitors
VoIP Monitors
The discovered devices are classified into the above categories based on response to SNMP requests sent by OpManager to the
devices. The devices that are not SNMP enabled, and the device types which are not included in the template are incorrectly
classified under desktops. You can also add your own infrastructure maps to group your devices according to categories, or create
business views to logically group devices, for instance, based on geography.
Page 78
Adding new Infrastructure Views
You can create more defined groups by adding more custom views. For instance, you might want to group all your Environment
Sensors or IP Phones into separate infrastructure views.
Steps to add a new Infrastructure View:
Go to Inventory ? Sort By Category ? Add Category.

Specify the category Name.
Select the category whose properties needs to be inherited for this category.
Click Add.
After you create new infrastructure views, you can create device templates for devices of this category. This allows you to define
monitors specific to the category and automatically applies the configurations defined in the template to the devices as soon as they
are discovered.
Page 79
Different Types of Views
Heat Map View
It helps you to visualize your entire network health in real-time from a single page. It uses color codes to communicate the severity of
the monitored devices. HeatMap view can be accessed from the Inventory > All Devices, Server, Router, Server, Desktop� etc.
�
Icon View
�
List View
Page 80
�
What is a group? Page 81
The Group feature in OpManager helps the admin group devices or interfaces together for organized network management and to
push bulk configurations easily throughout the product. Groups and subgroups can be used as a filter in Reports, Widget,
Notification Profile, URL Templates, Downtime schedule, Alarm suppression, Device template, Interface template, Test credentials and
Workflow. Groups are useful to view the average availability distribution of all the members in a group, automatically add members
to a group on discovery and to configure threshold for a group of interfaces irrespective of the interface type. Admin users will have
complete access to groups whereas, operator users will have only Read-Only access to groups.
What is Grouping?
What is a subgroup?
OpManager allows you to create subgroups within a group. Subgroups make bulk configuration and filtering of devices much more
easier. You can create multiple subgroups and associate it with a parent group.
For eg:
Consider two device groups - "Routers of model A" and "Routers of model B" in an organization. They can be collectively grouped
under a parent group called "Routers".
Similarly two device groups - "Central Servers" and "Production servers" can be created and placed under a parent group called
"Servers".
The two parent groups - "Routers" and "Servers" can be placed under a group "Network devices in India", which now becomes the
parent group.
In Reports/Widgets, when "Network devices in India" group is selected, OpManager provides a detailed report of all the devices
under the subgroups present under the parent group -� "Network devices in India".
Similarly the subgroup feature can be used in any module where grouping is supported.
How to create a group?

Steps to create a group
Click on Settings → Configuration → Groups and click on the "Add" button or go to Inventory → Groups → Add Group.
Provide a suitable group name and description and click on Next.
Select the type of elements you want to add to this group.
Select the method to group the elements. You can group elements either 'Manually' or by 'Criteria'.
If you selected the 'Manually' option - Select the group members from the available list and click on 'Next'.
If you selected the 'By criteria' option - Select any one of the property available from the dropdown box, select a condition and
provide a suitable value resolving the property and condition and click on� '+' icon.
Add multiple criteria if needed, along with the logical operation� you need to perform based on the criteria. Click on Next.
From the available members listed, select the members you want the group's health to depend on. If no members are chosen,
then the health status of the group will depend on� all the available members by default.
Page 82
How to edit a group?

Click on Settings → Configuration → Groups� and click on the 'Edit' icon under 'Actions'. You can also edit Groups from
Inventory → Groups → and click on the 'Edit' icon under 'Actions'
Edit the description if needed and click on 'Next'.
The group type and method of creation of the group cannot be edited.
If the 'Manually' option was selected� - Edit� the group members from the available list and click on 'Next'.
If the 'By criteria' option� was selected - The existing criteria can be deleted and new criteria can be added if required. Click on
'Next'.
From the available members listed, edit the members you want the group's health to depend on.
How to create a group based on custom fields?

Groups can be created based on custom fields. Create a group with 'By Criteria' method and select the 'custom fields' properties
from the drop down box. Select the suitable condition required and provide a custom field value associated to devices/interfaces.
How to associate threshold settings to an interface group?

Interface Groups :
Click on Settings → Configuration → Interface Templates. Under the Interface groups tab, click on a group name and configure
the threshold settings.� Click on 'Save and Apply'.
The configured threshold values will be applied to all interfaces in a group irrespective of type.
Interface Types :
Click on Settings → Configuration → Interface Templates. Under interface types, click on a interface type name and configure
the threshold values. Click on 'Save and Apply'.
In the new tab displayed, click on "Select groups to apply" option and click on 'Save'.
The threshold will be applied only to interfaces of the selected type.
How to configure status of a group?

While creating a group, you can configure the health status of the group. The health status of the group will depend on the members
selected. If no member is selected, by default the health status will depend on all available group members.
Page 83
How to use groups as filters for dashboard widgets?
Groups can also be used as a filter in the dashboard. You can customize the widgets to display only specific data or devices based on
your requirement using Groups.
Steps to use Groups in dashboard:
In the Dashboard, click on the 'Edit' icon in any widget.

In the 'Edit' widget menu, select groups under the 'filter by' drop menu and click on 'Save'.
You can also view the availability data in the 'all groups' widget in the dashboard of OpManager.
How to create device downtime schedules for groups?

IT admins can now configure device downtime schedule for 'Groups' to prevent OpManager from polling those devices during
maintenance for availability.
Visit Settings -> Configuration -> Device Downtime Schedules.

Click on 'Add Schedule'.
Choose filter by 'Groups' after filling the relevant fields.
Page 84
�
Page 85
AD Authentication
Identity and Access Management is an important part of network and data security for any organization. It helps you ensure
compliance with policies, password management and acts as a means to administer access control to users.
The AD Authentication feature in OpManager helps you with just this. It allows you to authenticate users from within OpManager
without using an external third party identity management tool. It allows you to grant / revoke access & security restrictions to users
and also allows you to provide role based access control for accessing OpManager within your organization.
You can make Active Directory's password policy work for you if you have a Windows domain. Users login to OpManager using their
domain login name and password. This will greatly minimize the risk of making others using your password to access the OpManager
Web interface, thereby not just improving the security but also making it easier for users to login/create accounts. You can define a
scope for users (AD groups, remote offices or all users), thereby restricting their access based on their roles.
With the increase in software applications, each with their own authentication and password complexity levels, this feature also
saves you the trouble of having to remember way too many passwords.
Add an AD Domain
You can create Domains in OpManager and users manually in OpManager with the AD Authentication and User Management
features.
To add a domain:
1. Go to Settings ? General Settings ? User Management ? AD Authentication ? Add Domain.
2. Enter the Domain Name and the Domain Controller name in the respective fields.
Page 86
3. If you are on builds 125111 and above, you can see that LDAPS authentication is mandatory when you add a new domain, to
ensure secure communication with the domain controllers. Simply click on the 'Import Certificate' button and select your domain
controller's certificate to add it to OpManager.
To know more on how to export a certificate from your domain controller, check out these articles:
1. Exporting the LDAPS Certificate and Importing for use with AD DS

2. LDAP over SSL (LDAPS) Certificate
Note: When you upgrade from a lower version of OpManager to 125111 or above, LDAPS is mandatory only for the domains that
you will be adding after the upgrade. For domains that are already present in OpManager, it is optional. You can just click on the
'Edit' button to import certificates for your existing domains.
4. Auto Login* is disabled by default.
5. Save the Settings.
6. Once the domain is added, you can manually add users in the Users tab.
Configure Auto-login
Page 87
The auto-login feature allows you to add all/individual users or selected AD groups to any domain, and assign user permissions to
them.
1. Select Add/Edit under Actions for the domain you want to configure.
2. Select the Enable Auto Login check box.

By enabling auto-login, the scope defined for the selected domain will be auto-assigned to users logging-in for the first time. If Auto-
login is not enabled, then the users must be added manually.
3. Configuring Auto-login for
All users
To enable Auto-login for all users, select All Users under Users. The auto login will be enabled to all the users logging into
that domain.
Selected AD groups
To enable Auto-login for selected AD groups, select Selected groups under Users and type the names of the AD groups. The
auto login will be enabled to the AD groups you specify.
4. Once you enable Auto-login, select the Users and User Permissions for the domain, edit the Time zone if required, and click Next.
5. To configure Scope,
Monitor - You can provide this user access to either All Devices, or only Selected Business Views. If All Devices is selected, the user
will have access to all the devices in OpManager module. If Selected Business Views is selected, you can give the access to all
business views with "Select All" option and business views without title with Untitled option.
Page 88
6. Save the settings.
Edit Domain Settings

Once you create a domain and assign users, you can edit the configurations as required any time. You can add or delete AD
users/groups, edit the user permissions, and also edit the scope settings.
To add AD groups:
Click on the 'Plus' icon next to the domain of your choice to add new AD groups to it.
To edit timezone:
Select Edit under Actions for the domain you want to edit, change the timezone as per your requirement, and click 'Save'.
Page 89
To Edit/Delete AD groups:
1. Click on the arrow mark next to the name of your domain to display all AD groups under it.
2. Click on the 'Edit' icon next to the group you wish to edit, select the Users and User Permissions for the domain, and click Next.
3. To edit a particular user/group in a domain, select Edit under Actions for the domain you want to edit.
4. User Permissions for the AD groups can be edited by selecting either Read Only (Operator User) or Full Control (Administrator
User).
Page 90
5. To configure Scope,
Monitor - You can provide this user access to either All Devices, or only Selected Business Views. If All Devices is selected, the user
will have access to all the devices of NetFlow, NCM, and Firewall. If Selected Business Views is selected, you can give the access to all
business views with Select All option and business views without title with Untitled option.
6. Save the settings.
7. To delete a group, just click on the 'Delete' icon next to it.
For AD Authentication, we support on-premise AD with LDAP query access to the domain controller in the network.
Page 91
Create New Users
You can create users in OpManager and provide required privileges to them. The option to create users is available only for
the� admin� login account or those accounts which have 'Full Control' privilege.
Administrator User: Administrator Users have unrestricted access to perform read/ write operations in OpManager. They
add/remove devices, troubleshoot issues, change configurations and more without any limitations i.e they have complete access.
Operator User: Operator Users have read-only/ restricted access in OpManager. They can be granted further access by the
Administrator User.� �
Steps to add a user:

1. Go to Settings → General Settings → User Management → Users → Add.
2. Select user role in Role as Administrator or Operator from the drop down list
3. Select� User Type� from the drop down list
Local Authentication
Radius Authentication
AD Authentication
Add a local user

1. User Details:
Email ID - � Email ID� for the user

Phone Number: Enter the user's phone number
Mobile Number: Enter the user's mobile number
Password: Create a password for the above user
Re-type Password: Retype the password for confirmation
Time Zone: Enter the Time zone of the user's location�
Note: This Email ID will be used in password recovery when the user clicks the Forgot Password option in the login page.
2. Scope:
Monitor� - You can provide this user an access to either� All Devices,� or only Selected� Business Views. If All Devices is
selected, the user will have access to all the devices of NetFlow, NCM, and Firewall. If Selected Business Views is selected, you can
give the access to all business views with Select All option and business views without title with Untitled option
3. Click� Add User� to add the user according to the scope specified here
Logout and try logging in as the new user and check the privileges.
Page 92
Add a Radius user

1. User Details:
User Name - Name of the Radius user to be added

Email ID - � Email ID� for the Radius user
Time Zone: Enter the Time zone of the user's location
2. Scope:
Monitor� - You can provide this user an access to either� All Devices,� or only� Selected� Business Views. If� All Devices� is
selected, the user will have access to all the devices of NetFlow, NCM, and Firewall. If� Selected Business Views� is selected, you
can give the access to all business views with Select All option and business views without title with Untitled option
3. Click� Add User� to add the user according to the scope specified here
Add an� AD user
1. User Details:
User Name - Name of the AD user to be added

Email ID - � Email ID� for the AD user
Domain Name -� Select the desired AD domain from the list of available domains or Click Add Domain to add a new
domain
Time Zone: Enter the Time zone of the user's location
2. Scope:
Monitor� - You can provide this user an access to either� All Devices,� or only� Selected� Business Views. If All Devices is
selected, the user will have access to all the devices of NetFlow, NCM, and Firewall. If Selected Business Views is selected, you can
give the access to all business views with Select All option and business views without title with Untitled� option
3. Click� Add User� to add the user according to the scope specified here Page 93
Page 94
Changing User Passwords
You can change the password for the users. Either the admin user or an user with full control privilege only can change the
passwords.
1. Go to Settings ? Basic Settings ? User Management.
2. Click on the name of the user whose password you want changed. The Configure User Details tab will pop-up, where you can
change the following.
1. Password Details:
Password- A new password for the above user
Re-type Password- Retype the password for confirmation
2. Contact Details:
Phone number: The user's phone number
Mobile number: The user's mobile number
3. Access Details:
For users with only partial permission, the business views assigned to that user is displayed. Remove selection for the view
if you want to remove the views from the user's purview. For users with full control, this option is not displayed.
(or)
Click on the 'Settings' icon in the top band and go to the 'Change Password' tab.
(or)
Page 95
In User Management, the administrator user can also assign new passwords by clicking "Assign New" under Change Password in
the Users section.
(or)
You can change the password on the login page itself by clicking 'forgot password' option.
Page 96
Remove Users
In OpManager, it is possible to add and remove users using an admin account or with an account having permission to do so. Follow
the steps given below to remove users from OpManager.
1. Go to Settings > User Management

2. Click the Delete icon against the user name whose account you want to delete.
3. A confirmation dialog pops up. Click� OK. The user account is deleted.
Page 97
Pass-through Authentication
Pass-through authentication (Single Sign-on) provides the ability to authenticate yourself automatically in OpManager using your
currently logged in windows system username and password. You would not need to manually enter your windows credential to log-
in to OpManager webclient.
Prerequisites:
Configuring Active Directory authentication

Active directory authentication must have been configured in OpManager for the domain you want enable Pass-through
Authentication. Click here to know how to add a domain under Active Directory authentication in OpManager.
Creating necessary user accounts in OpManager

User accounts to whom you want to enable pass-through must have been already available in OpManager. Click here to know
how you can add new users.
Note: Pass-through authentication will work only for the active directory users already been added to OpManager. If you do not
want to manually create user account for all the users in your domain, enable auto-login for the domain (Admin ? User Manager
? Windows Domains). Once auto-login is enabled, you have to manually enter username and password of your account only
during the first login and an user account in OpManager will be created automatically. From there on, you can simply work
without manually entering.
Creating Computer Account:

A computer account must be created in the Domain Controller for accessing the NETLOGON service in a domain by OpManager.
Click here to know how you can create a new computer account.
Note: After version 124085, new computer accounts can be created from the Passthrough configuration window itself, if the
OpManager service is running under a user who has administrative privileges. Also, if the OpManager server has been started
from Command Prompt, make sure it is being run as a administrator.
Configuring OpManager as a trusted site in your browser(s):

OpManager webserver must be added as a trusted site in all browsers you are going to use to access the OpManager webclient,
to prevent the browsers from opening unnecessary popups for providing your credentials.
To configure trusted sites, follow these steps:
For Internet Explorer (applicable to Chrome as well):
Open Control Panel ? Network and Internet ? Internet Options ? Security ? Local Intranet ? Sites ? Advanced. Enter
OpManager server URL, click Add.
For Firefox:
In URL box enter about:config. Click the button "I'll be careful. I promise", if warning page is displayed. In the resulting
page, search for ntlm. Double click the option network.automatic-ntlm-auth.trusted-uris. Enter OpManager server URL in
the text box and click OK. (Multiple site entries can be entered separated by comma.)
Configuring Passthrough Authentication in OpManager:

After all the prerequisites have been ensured, follow the steps below to auto-configure Passthrough Authentication in OpManager:
Go to Settings > User management > 'Pass-through' tab.
Page 98
Click on the 'Enable' button, and select the required domain from the dropdown list.
Click on 'Fetch' to get all the necessary credentials from the domain controller such as Bind string, DNS server IPs and DNS site.
Note: If there are any issues in fetching the necessary details, or if you're in a version of OpManager earlier than 124085, you
will have to configure these settings manually.
Also, enter the Computer account and password of the Domain Controller (computer account name must be less than or equal
to 15 characters). If you provide the wrong credentials, an error message will be displayed which indicates whether the account
name or the password is wrong, or if the account doesn't exist.
After version 124085, if the OpManager service runs under a user who has administrator privileges, an account will be created
with the provided account name even if it doesn't exist already.
Also, if you want to update your password, just select the 'Override existing computer account password' checkbox, and the
existing password for the computer account will be overridden with the value that you have provided in the 'Password' field.
To verify if the provided details are right, click on 'Save & Test'. If all the details are provided correctly, a success message will be
displayed on your screen. If not, a message displaying the possible errors in the parameters passed will be displayed. Rectify
those errors and then click 'Save'.
Else if you are confident with the credentials that you provided, you can directly click 'Save'.
Configuring Passthrough Authentication manually

To manually configure Passthrough authentication, you'll need the following details:
1. Domain Name: NETBIOS name of your domain. Example: OPMANHV (How can I find it?)
2. Bind String: DNS Name of your domain. Example: opmanhv.com (How can I find it?)
3. DNS Server IP: Primary IP Address of the DNS Server. (Separated by commas if there are multiple DNS server IPs) (How can I find
it?) Page 99
4. DNS Site: Site under which the Domain Controller is listed. (How can I find it?)
5. Computer Account: Account name of the computer account created.
Example: [email protected]
(For versions of OpManager before 124085, it is mandatory to append $@domain_dns_name with the account name.)
Note that the computer account name must be less than or equal to 15 characters.
6. Password: Password of the computer account
1 & 2 - Getting Domain DNS Name and NETBIOS Name:

In the Domain Controller device, open Start ? Administrative Tools ? Active Directory Users and Computers.
3 - Getting DNS Server IP:

Open Command Prompt in OpManager server. Run the command "ipconfig /all". The first IP Address mentioned in the DNS Servers
field is the primary DNS Server IP Address.
Page 100
4 - Getting DNS Site:

In Domain Controller device, open Start ? Administrative Tools ? Active Directory Sites and Services. The Site under which your
Domain Controller device name listed is your site name. You can leave the DNS Site field empty in Pass-through configuration form
in OpManager, if there is only one site present in your Domain Controller.
Creating a new computer account:

To create a new computer account, follow the steps below:
Page 101
Run the script NewComputerAccount.vbs present under OpManager_Home\conf\OpManager\application\scripts to create a new
computer account.
cscript NewComputerAccount.vbs account_name /p password /d domain_name
To reset the password for an existing computer account, run the script SetComputerPass.vbs present under
OpManager_Home\conf\OpManager\application\scripts to create a new computer account.
cscript SetComputerPass.vbs account_name /p password /d domain_name
Ensure that the password you give is compliant to the password policy for that domain. Do not use the New Computer Account
option present in AD native client which will not allow you to choose password. If you face problem running this script from
OpManager server, copy the script to the domain controller machine itself and try running it.
Note: The length of the computer account name must be less than or equal to 15 characters.
Design Limitation:
Pass-through authentication can be enabled for only one domain, preferably the domain in which OpManager server resides. If
pass-through has been configured for a domain other than the one in which OpManager server resides, ensure the other
domain will provide logged in user information to a website from different domain.
Disable Pass-through Authentication:

In OpManager webclient, click on Settings ? Basic Settings ? User Management ? Pass-through. Use the radio buttons to Enable/
Disable Passthrough Authentication.
Log File:
If you face any issue with Pass-through Authentication, contact support with a ZIP file of the logs present under
OpManager_Home\logs folder.
Page 102
Monitoring Resources Using CLI
OpManager monitors the system resources using SNMP by default. But if needed, you can also add monitors based on CLI, and both
these types of monitors will work in tandem. All the Unix Servers templates have the resource monitors preconfigured. All you need
to do is to select the CLI monitors and associate them to the required devices.
Prerequisites
For monitoring the Unix servers, make sure either Telnet or SSH is enabled on them.
Steps to configure Telnet/SSH Monitoring:
1. Go to the snapshot page of any device you wish to monitor.

2. Click the Actions button.
3. Now, from the list of resource monitors, select the CPU, Memory, and Disk Utilization monitors which has the protocol name as CLI
against the monitor name.
4. Once done, click Add. The monitors are added to the device under the Monitors column.
Page 103
IP/DNS polling
Most network monitoring solutions use IP addresses to poll the devices and fetch performance data, but some network admins might
want to poll their devices using DNS names of the devices. OpManager allows you to select whether you want to poll your devices
using the IP address of the device or the DNS name. This setting can be controlled throughout OpManager or can also be configured
for individual devices.
1. Global setting for polling mode

Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Monitor settings, and select which mode you want to use to poll the devices in your network. Once
you're done, click 'Save'.
Note: Changes in the global setting apply only for devices that will be discovered in the future. The polling method of devices
already discovered will not be affected in any way.
2. Device-specific configuration
You can also configure this setting individually for any device. To configure it:
Go to Inventory and click on the device you want to change this setting for.
Click on the three-line menu and click 'Edit device details'. You can also click on the Edit button in the device summary.
Under 'Poll using', select the mode that you wish to use to poll that device and click 'Save'.
Page 104
Note: The device-specific value always overrides the global value provided in Settings ? Monitoring ? Monitor settings.
Example: Consider you have 50 devices added into OpManager. If you have selected IP address as the global setting, but
you've chosen DNS name for only 5 devices by changing it from the respective device snapshot pages, only these 5 devices will
be polled using DNS and the rest of the devices will be polled using IP address.
Page 105
Adding More Monitors
Following are the monitors associated by default for the different device categories:
Servers: CPU, Memory, Disk Utilization

Routers: CPU, Memory, Buffer Hits/Misses, Temperature
Switches: CPU, Memory, BackPlane Utilization
Firewalls: CPU, Memory, and Connection Count.
Similarly, other categories also have few resources monitoring triggered by default. Besides the ones automatically associated, you
can monitor more parameters. Here are the steps to configure more monitors:
1. Go to Settings > Configuration > Device Templates

2. From the list of templates, select the template for the device type to which you want to associate more monitors. Use the search
bar to locate your device template quickly.
3. In the device template, from the Monitors column, click the Add button.
4. All the predefined monitors are listed. Select the required monitors from here and click OK
5. To save this setup, press Save or press Save and Associate to directly associate the selected monitor to the devices mapped to the
Device Template. Press Copy to copy the Device Template.
Page 106
Adding Custom Monitors
In addition to OpManager's default monitors, you can also create your own monitors for the SNMP-enabled devices in your network.
The SNMP variable for which you intend configuring a monitor can return either a numeric or a string output when queried.
To add a custom monitor for a resource of a particular device type, the device template must be modified. The new monitor should
be defined in the device template so that the monitor is associated for all devices of that type. Here are the steps.
1. Go to Settings > Configuration > Device Templates.

2. Click on the template in which you want to add a new monitor.
3. Example > Linux. Scroll down the template and click Add under Monitors column.
4. Click on the SNMP at the top of this page.
5. Configure the SNMP OID, Monitor Name, Display Name etc and click OK
6. Click Save to save the changes to the Device Template or press Save and Associate to directly associate them to the devices or
press Copy to copy the Device Template.
Page 107
Add SNMP Monitor
OpManager allows you to create custom SNMP monitors to get performance metrics based on vendor specific OIDs provided in the
MIB.
Step 1: SNMP OID details
i. OID Browser
ii. Upload MIB
iii. Performing operations on OIDs using expressions
iv. Functional Expression
Step 2: Graph Details
i. Instances
ii. Creating instances as individual monitors
iii. Series Index and Series Display Name
Step 3: Monitor Details
i. Monitor Thresholds
ii. Counter Type OIDs
Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Performance Monitors ? Add (or) Inventory ? Device Snapshot Page ? Monitors ? Performance
Monitors ? Actions ? Add monitor.
Step 1: SNMP OID Details

To add an SNMP monitor, you need to first provide the OID based on which OpManager will fetch data related to the required metric
from a device.
1. Choose SNMP OID:
You can either enter the OID for which you want to add a monitor/ select an OID from the OID browser.
OID Browser
To access the OID browser, click Choose OID.

Page 108
Step 1: Select MIB
In the drop-down menu provided on the top-left corner of the OID browser, you can select the MIB file from which you want to select
the SNMP OID. You can find a list of default/ supported MIBs included in this drop-down.
If you do not find a suitable MIB, you can also upload a MIB provided by your vendor using the UploadMIB option.
I) Click Upload MIB.
ii) Browse and Upload a vendor provided MIB file.
Note: Please upload MIBs with RFC2578 MIB Standard to avoid parsing errors.
Step 2: Select OID
Search OID/Name: The OID browser in OpManager allows you to search the MIB for OIDs using the object identifier/name
(.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3/ sysUpTime). You can also browse and select the required OID directly from the MIB tree.
Step 3: Test OID
Once you have selected an OID from the MIB tree, you will be able to view the OID, its Syntax and its Description. You can now test
the OID to check if the output is desirable by clicking TestOID. This option allows you to review an OID's output, even before adding it
to the expression. Page 109
Step 4: Now, click Choose OID. This will insert the selected OID into the Choose SNMP OID field.
2. Performing operations on OIDs using expressions:
The Choose SNMP OID field is not limited to just containing the OID. It also provides options for the user to construct OID
expressions that perform simple mathematical operations on the output values of the OID. You can also construct expressions by
combining OIDs.
Example: (.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0)/8640000
Restrictions on OID expressions:
1. If more than one Multiple Instance OID is present in the expression, then it should be of the same parent node.
2. Monitor involving both Scalar and Multiple OIDs are not supported.
3. Monitor involving both String and Numeric OIDs are not supported.
4. You cannot use string monitors to create expressions.
5. You cannot add Table OIDs as a Monitor.
3. Functional Expression
Functional Expressions allow you to set a predefined format on the display parameters of an output value.
E.g. In the case of adding an SNMP monitor to fetch the CPU temperature value, you can use a functional expression to
convert Celsius to Fahrenheit.
It also supports aggregate methods that allow you to perform operations which combine multiple values to give a single output. E.g.
AverageOfColumnValues, SumOfColumnValues, etc.
Page 110
4. Device Name
This option helps you test the OID against a device. The template will not get associated to the selected device.
5. Vendor Name
Use the drop-down menu to select a vendor to which you want to associate the template (or) Enter a new vendor name (Click New ->
Enter a new Vendor Name -> Click Add).
Now, click Query Device.
Step 2: Graph Details

Object identifiers (OIDs) have both a type and a value. It is on this basis that they are classified into Scalar Objects and Tabular
Objects. A scalar object is a managed object that always has a single instance, whereas, tabular objects have multiple instances. In
both these cases, the output can either be a string or a numerical value.
Graph Details
i) Scalar Objects:
1. Scalar objects with a numerical output will display a table containing the instance and the value along with a graph.
2. Scalar objects with a string output will only display the instance and the value.
Page 111
ii) Tabular Objects:
1. Tabular objects with a numerical output will display a table containing the instance and the value along with a graph.
2. Tabular objects with a string output will only display the instance and the value.
Page 112
Monitor Instances
OpManager provides the option of selecting specific instances that you want to monitor from a tabular object.
All Instances: A single SNMP monitor that monitors multiple instances will be created.
Selected Instances: You can select desired instances from the available list and add it as separate templates/ monitors. The Series
Index and Series Display OID columns are mandatory.
Do you wish to create each instance as an individual monitor?
This checkbox creates a separate SNMP monitor for each instance.
If you choose to select this option, it is mandatory that you provide inputs to the Series Index and the Series Display Name fields.
Page 113
Series Index & Series Display Name
Series Index: An index is used to refer to a particular instance of a tabular object. A tabular object can have one or more instances
and is identified by its index value. To identify a specific columnar variable, the index of the row has to be appended to its OID.
Series Display Name: This corresponds to the description/ name/ label that should be associated to an instance.
Page 114
Note: The Series Index and the Series Display Name drop-down menu will automatically list all the OIDs under the same parent. If
the index or description OIDs are not listed, you can type in the required OID.
Click Next.
Step 3: Monitor Details

1. Monitor Name: Enter your preferred monitor name. The default name will be the OID name.
2. Interval (Mins): This value specifies the time interval in which you want to re-run the monitor to fetch the corresponding values.
3. Units: Specify the unit for the monitored resource.
4. Data Type: Select between 'Integer' and 'Decimal' depending on the data type required.
5. Do you want to enable Threshold for this monitor?
You can check this option to set thresholds on the alerts that will be generated based on this monitor.
Select the condition [>,=, <, or !=] for attention, trouble & critical alert thresholds, and enter the value. An alert is raised if the
monitored value is greater than, equal to, not equal to, or lesser than (which ever is selected) the specified threshold value.Page 115
Rearm Value
Enter the Rearm Value. A rearm value helps determine if the condition of a monitor has returned to normal after a threshold
violation alert.
Example: Let us assume that the attention alert threshold for a memory monitor is configured as, "Raise Attention alert when the
monitored data is > 75" and the monitored memory value of that device exceeds this value, say 80. An alert will be raised.
In the next poll, if the monitored memory value is 72. Another alert will be generated, stating that the device is in a normal
condition.
Now, if in the next poll, the monitored value climbs to 80. A threshold violation alert will again be generated which becomes
troublesome to manage.
A rearm value helps avoid this hassle by confirming that a device has returned to normal, only if the monitored value matches the
rearm value.
Note: The rearm value must be lesser/ greater than the threshold value, based on monitor requirements and the configured
threshold condition.
In the Consecutive Times field, enter the value of how many consecutive times the thresholds (Attention, Trouble and Critical) can be
violated for an alert to be generated.
5. Click Add Monitor.
Note: If the custom SNMP monitor is created from the Settings page, it will be created as a template. Whereas, if the monitor is
created from the Device Snapshot page, it will automatically be associated to that device.
Counter Type OIDs
If you select Counter type OIDs, you can store data based on the delta value or the absolute value. By default, OpManager stores
data using the delta value. However, you can use the Store Data drop-down to select your preference.
Page 116
Deleting performance monitors
1. Deleting a monitor from Device Template page:
Go to Settings ? Configuration ? Device template.

Navigate to the template of your choice, and click to edit it. You can find the list of monitors associated under 'Monitors' tab.
Click on the bin icon next to the monitor you wish to delete and click 'Save'.
Deleting a monitor from this page is reflected instantly and the devices that will be associated with that template in the future, but it
still remains in all the devices that have been already associated with that template. To apply the changes to all these devices, click
on 'Save and Associate' button in the Edit device template page.
2. Deleting a monitor from Performance monitors page:
Page 117
Only custom monitors created by the users can be deleted from this page.
Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Performance monitors and switch to 'Custom monitors' section from the dropdown menu.
Scroll to the custom monitor you wish to delete, & click on the bin icon next to it.
Deleting a custom monitor from here removes it permanently from OpManager, and from any device/device template that has this
monitor configured already.
3. Deleting a monitor from the device snapshot page:

Page 118
Navigate to the device you want to delete the monitor for in the Inventory page, and click on it to view the snapshot page.
Click on the 'Monitors' tab.
Click the bin icon next to any monitor to delete it.
Removing it from the device snapshot page will only de-associate that monitor from the particular device and will not affect other
devices or the device template in any way. You can also bulk delete multiple monitors by selecting them and clicking the bin icon
(Delete selected row) below the monitors list.
Page 119
Page 120
OpManager Performance Monitors
A list of all the performance monitors used in OpManager along with the vendor details, description, protocol and category can be
found in this list:
Vendor Monitors Description Protocol Category

3Com CPU Temperature Monitors the CPU temperature SNMP Switch /
Wireless
3Com CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU utilization SNMP Switch /
Wireless
A10 Active Connections Monitors the count of current SNMP Load
Networks connections. Balancer/WAN
Accelerator
A10 CPU Utilization Monitors the average CPU usage in last SNMP Load
Networks 5 seconds. Balancer/WAN
Accelerator
A10 Disk Utilization Monitors the usage of the disk in MB. SNMP Load
Networks Balancer/WAN
Accelerator
A10 Fan Status Monitors the fan status: 0: Failed, 4: OK- SNMP Load
Networks fixed/high, 5: OK-low/med, 6: OK- Balancer/WAN
med/med, 7: OK-med/high, -2: not Accelerator
ready, 1: unknown.
A10 Free disk Space Monitors the Free space of the disk in SNMP Load
Networks MB. Balancer/WAN
Accelerator
A10 Lower Power Supply Status Monitors the lower power supply SNMP Load
Networks status. Power supply status : Balancer/WAN
off(0),on(1),unknown(-1). Accelerator
A10 Memory Utilization Monitors the memory utilization(%). SNMP Load
Networks Balancer/WAN
Accelerator
A10 Server Count The total count of axServer entries in SNMP Load
Networks the table. Balancer/WAN
Accelerator
A10 System Temperature Monitors the physical system SNMP Load
Networks temperature in Celsius. Balancer/WAN
Accelerator
A10 Upper Power Supply Status Monitors the Upper power supply SNMP Load
Networks status. Power Supply status: Balancer/WAN
off(0),on(1),unknown(-1). Accelerator
Alcatel Chassis Temperature Maximum one-minute chassis SNMP Switch /
temperature over the last hour Router
(percent)
Alcatel CMM CPU Temperature Maximum one-minute CMM CPU SNMP Switch /
temperature over the last hour Page 121
Router
(percent)
Alcatel Device CPU Utilization Maximum one-minute device-level CPU SNMP Switch /
utilization over the last hour (percent) Router
Alcatel Device Memory Utilization Maximum one-minute device-level SNMP Switch /
memory utilization over the last hour Router
(percent)
Alcatel Module CPU Utilization Maximum one-minute module-level SNMP Switch /
CPU utilization over the last hour Router
(percent)
Alcatel Moduler Memory Utilization Maximum one-minute module-level SNMP Switch /
memory utilization over the last hour Router
(percent)
Amaranten Amaranten-Connections Monitors the Connections of Amaranten SNMP Firewall
Firewall
Amaranten CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Amaranten Firewall SNMP Firewall
Amaranten Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Amaranten SNMP Firewall
Firewall
American Number of PDU Outlets Monitors the OID will return the SNMP UPS / PDU
Power number of outlets contained in the
Conversion device.
Corp.
American PDU Bank Load Monitors the OID will return the SNMP UPS / PDU
Power phase/bank load measured in tenths of
Conversion Amps.
Corp.
American PDU Phase Load Monitors the current draw, in tenths of SNMP UPS / PDU
Power Amps, of the load on the Rack PDU
Conversion phase being queried
Corp.
American PDU Phase Load status Monitors the present load status of the SNMP UPS / PDU
Power Rack PDU phase being queried {
Conversion lowLoad ( 1 ) , normal ( 2 ) ,
Corp. nearOverload ( 3 ) , overload ( 4 ) }
American PDU Phases Monitors the OID will return the SNMP UPS / PDU
Power number of phases supported by the
Conversion device.
Corp.
American PDU Power Load Monitors the load power, in hundredths SNMP UPS / PDU
Power of kiloWatts, consumed on the Rack PDU
Conversion phase being queried
Corp.
American PDU Voltage Monitors the Voltage, in Volts, of the SNMP UPS / PDU
Power Rack PDU phase being queried
Conversion
Corp.
American UPS Charge Monitors UPS Charge SNMP UPS
Power Page 122
Conversion
Corp.
American UPS Input Line Voltage The current utility line voltage in VAC SNMP UPS
Power
Conversion
Corp.
American UPS Load Monitors UPS Load SNMP UPS
Power
Conversion
Corp.
American UPS Output Current The current in ampres drawn by the SNMP UPS
Power load on the UPS
Conversion
Corp.
American UPS Output Voltage The output voltage of the UPS system in SNMP UPS
Power VAC
Conversion
Corp.
APC CPU Utilization CPU Utilization SNMP UPS
APC Total Active Sessions Total Active Sessions SNMP UPS
Array Connection Monitors the Connections of Array-APV SNMP Load Balancer
LoadBalancer
Array CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Array-APV SNMP Load Balancer
LoadBalancer
Array Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Array-APV SNMP Load Balancer
LoadBalancer
Autelan CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Autelan-AS3200 SNMP Switch
Switch
Autelan Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Autelan- SNMP Switch
AS3200 Switch
Barracuda Bounced Mail Queues Monitors the Bounced mail queues SNMP Networking
Device
Barracuda Buffer Memory Monitors the system Buffer Momory SNMP Networking
Utilization Device
Barracuda CPU Utilization Monitors the system 15 minutes cpu SNMP Networking
Load Device
Barracuda CPU Utilization (Last 1 min) Monitors the system last 1 minute cpu SNMP Networking
load Device
Barracuda CPU Utilization (Last 5 min) Monitors the system last 5 minutes cpu SNMP Networking
Load Device
Barracuda InBound Mail Queues Monitors the InBound mail queues SNMP Networking
Device
Barracuda Mail Input Monitors the system Mail Input counts SNMP Networking
Page 123
Device
Barracuda Mail Output Monitors the systems Mail output SNMP Networking
counts Device
Barracuda Memory Utilization Monitors the system MemoryUtilization SNMP Networking
Device
Barracuda OutBound Mail Queues Monitors the OutBound Mail queues SNMP Networking
Device
Barracuda Used Disk Space Monitors the systems used disk space SNMP Networking
Device
Blue Coat Client HTTP Errors Monitors the number of HTTP errors SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. caused by client connections. Accelerator
Blue Coat Client HTTP Hit(s) Monitors the number of HTTP hits that SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. the proxy clients have produced. Accelerator
Blue Coat Client HTTP In Traffic Monitors the number of kilobits SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. recieved from the clients by the proxy. Accelerator
Blue Coat Client HTTP Out Traffic Monitors the number of kilobits SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. delivered to clients from the proxy. Accelerator
Blue Coat Client HTTP Request(s) Monitors the number of HTTP requests SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. recieved from clients. Accelerator
Blue Coat CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Bluecoat Switches SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. Accelerator
Blue Coat CPU Utilization Monitors the Percent of resource in SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. use. Accelerator
Blue Coat Disk Utilization Monitors the Percent of resource in SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. use. When the resource is disk, it is the Accelerator
amount of disk used by the cache
subsytem.
Blue Coat Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Bluecoat SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. Switches Accelerator
Blue Coat Memory Utilization Monitors the MemoryUtilization. SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. Accelerator
Blue Coat Objects In Cache Monitors the number of objects SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. currently held by the proxy. Accelerator
Blue Coat Server HTTP Errors Monitors the number of HTTP errors SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. while fetching objects. Accelerator
Blue Coat Server HTTP In Traffic Monitors the number of Kbs recieved SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. by the proxy from remote servers. Accelerator
Blue Coat Server HTTP Out Traffic Monitors the number of kbs SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. transmitted by the proxy to remote Accelerator
servers.
Blue Coat Server HTTP Requests Monitors the number of Http requests SNMP WAN
Systems, Inc. that the proxy has issued. Accelerator
Check Point FW Dropped Packets Monitors the number of dropped SNMP Firewall
Software packets Page 124
Technologies
Ltd
Check Point FW Logged Packets Monitors the number of logged packets SNMP Firewall
Software
Technologies
Ltd
Check Point FW Rejected Packets Monitors the number of rejected SNMP Firewall
Software packets
Technologies
Ltd
Cisco Aborted Interface In Packets Monitors the aborted interfaces in SNMP Networking
packets Device
Cisco Active Session Count Active Session Count SNMP Firewall
Cisco Associated Mobile Stations Monitors the number of Mobile Stations SNMP Wireless
currently associated with the WLAN.
Cisco Associated Mobile User(s) Monitors associated Mobile User(s) for SNMP Wireless
Cisco devices
Cisco Backplane Utilization Monitors the Backplane Utilization SNMP Switch
Cisco BGP PEER STATE idle2, connect3, active4, opensent5, SNMP Router
openconfirm6, established
Cisco Big Buffer Hits Monitors the Total big buffer hits SNMP Router
Cisco Big Buffer Misses Monitors the Total big buffer misses SNMP Router
Cisco Buffer Create Failures Monitors the buffer create failures SNMP Router
Cisco Buffer Failures Monitors the Buffer Failures SNMP Router
Cisco CardOperstatus 1 : not-specified2 : up3 : down4 : SNMP Switch
standby
Cisco Chassis Input Power Monitors the Chassis Input Power UCS UCS
Cisco Chassis Output Power Monitors the Chassis Output Power UCS UCS
Cisco Cisco Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory Utilization SNMP Networking
Device
Cisco Cisco Temperature Monitors temperature at the testpoint SNMP Networking
maintained by the environmental Device
monitor
Cisco CPU Usage (1 min avg) Monitors the one-minute moving SNMP Networking
average of the CPU busy percentage Device
Cisco CPU Usage (5 mins avg) Monitors the five-minute moving SNMP Networking
average of the CPU busy percentage Device
Cisco CPU Usage (5 secs avg) Monitors the CPU busy percentage in SNMP Networking
the last 5 seconds Device
Cisco CPU Utilization Monitors the average utilization of CPU SNMP Switch
on the active supervisor.
Cisco CPU Utilization Monitors the device CPU Utilization. SNMP Networking
Page 125
Device
Cisco CPU Utilization(WLC) Monitors the Current CPU Load of the SNMP Wireless
switch (Cisco WLC device) in
percentage.
Cisco devCellularstatus Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devClientCount Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devContactedat Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devLanIP Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devMac Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devMeshstatus Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devName Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devNetworkname Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devProductcode Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devProductdescription Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devpublicIP Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devSerial Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devStatu Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco devSubnet Custom Monitor SNMP Wireless
Cisco Disk Utilization Monitors the disk I/O utilization. SNMP Firewall
Cisco Fabric Interconnect CPU Utilization Monitors the Fabric Interconnect CPU UCS UCS
Utilization
Cisco Fabric Interconnect FanCtrlrInlet1 Monitors the Fabric Interconnect UCS UCS
FanCtrlrInlet1
FanCtrlrInlet2
FanCtrlrInlet3
FanCtrlrInlet4
Cisco Fabric Interconnect MainBoardOutlet1 Monitors the Fabric Interconnect UCS UCS
MainBoardOutlet1
Cisco Fabric Interconnect MainBoardOutlet2 Monitors the Fabric Interconnect UCS UCS
MainBoardOutlet2
Cisco Fabric Interconnect MemAvailable Monitors the Fabric Interconnect UCS UCS
Memory Available
Cisco Fabric Interconnect MemCached Monitors the Fabric Interconnect UCS UCS
MemCached
Cisco Fabric Interconnect PsuCtrlrInlet1 Monitors the Fabric Interconnect UCS UCS
PsuCtrlrInlet1
Cisco Fabric Interconnect PsuCtrlrInlet2 Monitors the Fabric Interconnect UCS UCS
PsuCtrlrInlet2 Page 126
Cisco Fan Speed Monitors the Fan Speed UCS UCS

Cisco FanModule Exhaust Temperature Monitors the FanModule Exhaust UCS UCS
Temperature
Cisco Firewall CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU utilization of the SNMP Firewall
Firewall
Cisco Free 1550K Buffers Monitors the number of free 1550K SNMP Networking
blocks Device
Cisco Free 256K Buffers Monitors the number of free 256K SNMP Networking
blocks Device
Cisco Free 4K Buffers Monitors the number of free 4K blocks SNMP Networking
Device
Cisco Free 80K Buffers Monitors the number of free 80K blocks SNMP Networking
Device
Cisco Free Memory Monitors the number of bytes from the SNMP Networking
memory pool that are currently unused Device
Cisco Ignored Interface In Packets Monitors the ignored interfaces in SNMP Networking
packets Device
Cisco Input Packet Drops Monitors the input packets drops after SNMP Networking
the input queue was full Device
Cisco Interface Collisions Monitors the interface collisions SNMP Networking
Device
Cisco Interface In CRC Errors Monitors the number of input packets SNMP Networking
which had cyclic redundancy checksum Device
errors
Cisco Interface In Giants Monitors the number of input packets SNMP Networking
larger than the physical media Device
permitted
Cisco Interface In Runts Monitors the interface in runts SNMP Networking
Device
Cisco Interface Input Bits Monitors the five-minute exponentially SNMP Networking
decayed moving average of input bits Device
per second
Cisco Interface Output Bits Monitors the five-minute exponentially SNMP Networking
decayed moving average of output bits Device
per second
Cisco Interface Reset Count Monitors the number of times the SNMP Networking
interface has internally reset Device
Cisco Interface Restart Count Monitors the number of times the SNMP Networking
interface needed to be completely Device
restarted
Cisco Ironport Temperature Monitors the Temperature in degrees SNMP Firewall
Celsius.
Cisco Largest Free Memory Monitors the largest number of SNMP Networking
contiguous bytes from the memory pool Page 127
Device
that are currently unused
Cisco MailTransfer Threads Monitors the number of threads that SNMP Firewall
perform some task related to
transferring mail.
Cisco Medium Buffer Hits Monitors the Total medium buffer hits SNMP Router
Cisco Medium Buffer Misses Monitors the Total medium buffer SNMP Router
misses
Cisco Memory Utilization Monitors the average utilization of SNMP Switch
memory on the active supervisor.
Cisco Memory Utilization Monitors the device memory utilization. SNMP Firewall
Cisco Memory Utilization Monitors the device Memory Utilization SNMP Switch
Cisco Memory Utilization(WLC) Monitors the current Memory SNMP Wireless
Utilization of the Cisco WLC device.
Cisco Modems in Use Custom Monitor SNMP Router
Cisco Motherboard Consumed Power Monitors the Monitors the Motherboard UCS UCS
Consumed Power
Cisco Motherboard Input Current Monitors the Motherboard Input UCS UCS
Current
Cisco Motherboard Input Voltage Monitors the Motherboard Input UCS UCS
Voltage
Cisco OpenFilesOrSockets Monitors the number of open files or SNMP Firewall
sockets.
Cisco OSPF IF State down2, loopback3, waiting4, SNMP Router
pointToPoint5, designatedRouter6,
backupDesignatedRouter7,
otherDesignatedRouter
Cisco Output Packet Drops Monitors the output packets drop SNMP Router
Cisco Outstanding DNS Requests Monitors the number of DNS requests SNMP Firewall
that have been sent but for which no
reply has been received.
Cisco Pending DNS Requests Monitors the number of DNS requests SNMP Firewall
waiting to be sent.
Cisco PSUs Input Voltage Monitors the PSUs Input Voltage UCS UCS
Cisco PSUs Internal Temperature Monitors the PSUs Internal UCS UCS
Temperature
Cisco PSUs Output Current Monitors the PSUs Output Current UCS UCS
Cisco PSUs Output Power Monitors the PSUs Output Power UCS UCS
Cisco PSUs Output12v Monitors the PSUs Output12v UCS UCS
Cisco PSUs Output3v3 Monitors the PSUs Output3v3 UCS UCS
Cisco Router Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory utilization of the SNMP Router
router
Cisco Small Buffer Hits Monitors the Total small buffer hits SNMP Networking
Page 128
Device
Cisco Small Buffer Misses Monitors the Total small buffer misses SNMP Router
Cisco Switch CPU Utilization(5 mins avg) Monitors the five-minute moving SNMP Switch
average of the CPU busy percentage
Cisco Switch Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory utilization of the SNMP Networking
switch Device
Cisco sysUpTimeAtLastChassisChange "Time in seconds/100 from the last SNMP Switch
coldstart to the last change in the
chassis configuration. This value will be
updatedwhenever the chassis
experiences a changein the count, type,
or slot position ofa card in cardTable."
Cisco Temperature(WLC) Monitors the current Internal SNMP Wireless
Temperature of the unit in
Centigrade(Cisco WLC).
Cisco Total Huge Buffer Hits Monitors the huge buffer hits SNMP Router
Cisco Total Huge Buffer Misses Monitors the total huge buffer misses SNMP Router
Cisco Total Large Buffer Hits Monitors the Total large buffer hits SNMP Router
Cisco Total Large Buffer Misses Monitors the total large buffer misses SNMP Router
Cisco Tunnel In-Drop Packets VPN Tunnel In-Drop Packets SNMP Firewall
Cisco Tunnel In-Octet VPN Tunnel In-Octet SNMP Firewall
Cisco Tunnel In-Packets VPN Tunnel In-Packets SNMP Firewall
Cisco Tunnel Out-Drop Packets VPN Tunnel Out-Drop Packets SNMP Firewall
Cisco Tunnel Out-Octet VPN Tunnel Out-Octet SNMP Firewall
Cisco Tunnel Out-Packets VPN Tunnel Out-Packets SNMP Firewall
Cisco Used Memory Monitors the number of bytes from the SNMP Networking
memory pool that are currently in use Device
Citrix Active Server Connection(s) Monitors the number of connections SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. currently serving requests.
Citrix Client Connection(s) in ClosingState Monitors the number of client SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. connections in NetScaler in closing
states.
Citrix Client Connection(s) in OpeningState Monitors the number of client SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. connections in NetScaler in opening
states.
Citrix CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU utilization SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. percentage.
Citrix CPU Utilization Average physical cpu usage XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Citrix CPU Utilization Average of VM VCPUs Utilization XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Citrix Current Client Connection(s) Monitors the number of client SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. connections in NetScaler. Page 129
Citrix Current Server Connection(s) Monitors the number of server SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. connections in NetScaler.
Citrix Disk I/O Usage Virtual Disk I/O Usage of VM XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Citrix Disk Utilization Monitors the Percentage of the disk SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. space used.
Citrix Domain0 Average Load Load for Domain0 in XenServer XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Citrix Established Client Connection(s) Monitors the number of client SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. connections in NetScaler in established
state.
Citrix Established Server Connection(s) Monitors the number of server SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. connections in NetScaler in established
state.
Citrix Http Total Gets Monitors the number of HTTP GET SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. requests received.
Citrix Http Total Others(non-GET/POST) Monitors the number of non-GET/POST SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. HTTP methods received.
Citrix Http Total Posts Monitors the number of HTTP POST SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. requests received.
Citrix Memory Allocation By XAPI Memory allocation done by the xapi XenService Server
Systems, Inc. daemon
Citrix Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory utilization SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. percentage.
Citrix Memory Utilization Memory Utilization of host XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Citrix Memory Utilization Memory Utilization of VM XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Citrix Network Received Rate Bytes per second received on all XenService Server
Systems, Inc. physical interfaces
Citrix Network Transmitted Rate Bytes per second sent on all physical XenService Server
Systems, Inc. interfaces
Citrix Network Usage Network Usage of host XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Citrix Network Usage Network I/O Usage by XenServer VM XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Citrix scPolicy Url Hits This counter gives the number of times SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. netscaler matched an incoming request
with a Configured sureconnect policy.
Citrix scSession Requests This counter gives the number of SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. requests which came in a SureConnect
session.
Citrix SSL CardsUP Monitors the number of ssl cards UP. If SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. number of cards UP is lower than a Page 130
threshold, a failover will be initiated.
Citrix SSL session(s) Monitors the number of SSL sessions. SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc.
Citrix TCP Total ClientConnection Opened Monitors the total number of opened SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. client connections.
Citrix TCP TotalSyn Monitors the number of SYN packets SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. received.
Citrix TCPSurgeQueueLength Monitors the number of connections in SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. surge queue.
Citrix Total Hit(s) Monitors the total hits for the policy. SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc.
Citrix Total Policy Hits Monitors the Total policy hits count. SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc.
Citrix TTFB between Netscaler to server Monitors the average TTFB between the SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. netscaler and the server.
Citrix VCPUs Concurrency Hazard Fraction of time that some VCPUs are XenService Server
Systems, Inc. running and some are runnable
Citrix VCPUs Full Contention Fraction of time that all VCPUs are XenService Server
Systems, Inc. runnable (i.e., waiting for CPU)
Citrix VCPUs Full Run Fraction of time that all VCPUs are XenService Server
Systems, Inc. running
Citrix VCPUs Idle Fraction of time that all VCPUs are XenService Server
Systems, Inc. blocked or offline
Citrix VCPUs Partial Contention Fraction of time that some VCPUs are XenService Server
Systems, Inc. runnable and some are blocked
Citrix VCPUs Partial Run Fraction of time that some VCPUs are XenService Server
Systems, Inc. running, and some are blocked
Citrix VServer Current ClientConnections Monitors the number of current client SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. connections.
Citrix VServer Current OutOfService(s) Monitors the current number of SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. services which are bound to this
vserver and are in the state
'outOfService'.
Citrix VServer Current ServerConnections Monitors the number of current SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. connections to the real servers behind
the vserver.
Citrix VServer Current ServicesDown Monitors the current number of SNMP Load Balancer
vserver and are in the state 'down'.
Citrix VServer Current ServicesUp Monitors the current number of SNMP Load Balancer
vserver and are in the state 'up'.
Citrix VServer Total Hits Monitors the Total vserver hits. SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. Page 131
Citrix VServer Total RequestBytes Monitors the total number of request SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. bytes received on this service/vserver.
Citrix VServer Total Requests Monitors the total number of requests SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. received on this service/vserver(This is
applicable for HTTP/SSL servicetype).
Citrix VServer Total ResponseBytes Monitors the number of response bytes SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. received on this service/vserver.
MGE UPS Charge Monitors UPS Charge SNMP UPS
Citrix VServer TotalResponses Monitors the number of responses SNMP Load Balancer
Systems, Inc. received on this service/vserver(This is
applicable for HTTP/SSL servicetype).
Citrix XAPI Memory Usage XenAPI Memory Utilization XenService Server
Systems, Inc.
Compaq CpqHe Server Temperature Monitors the server temprature SNMP Server
Compaq CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU Utilization SNMP Server
Compaq CPU Utilization (30 Min Avg) Monitors the CPU Utilization SNMP Server
Compaq CPU Utilization (5 Min Avg) Monitors the CPU Utilization SNMP Server
Compaq CPU Utilization (Hr. Avg) Monitors the CPU Utilization SNMP Server
Compaq Deferred Transmission Monitors the interfaces deffered SNMP Server
transmission
Compaq Excessive Collisions Monitors the interface excessive SNMP Server
collisions
Compaq File System Usage Percentage Monitors the percetage space used in SNMP Server
File System
Compaq File System Usage Size Monitors the space used by file system SNMP Server
Compaq Free Physical Memory Monitors the free physical memory SNMP Server
Compaq Free Virtual Memory Monitors the free virtual memory SNMP Server
Compaq Input Voltage Monitors the input voltage of power SNMP Server
supply
Compaq Interface Rx Errors Monitors the interface receive errors SNMP Server
Compaq Interface Rx Traffic Monitors the interface received traffic SNMP Server
Compaq Interface Tx Errors Monitors the interface transmit error SNMP Server
Compaq Interface Tx Traffic Interface Transmit Traffic SNMP Server
Compaq Internal MAC Transmit Errors Monitors the internal MAC transmit SNMP Server
errors
Compaq Late Collisions Monitors the interface Late Collisions SNMP Server
Compaq Multiple Collision Packets Multiple Collision Frames SNMP Server
Compaq Power Capacity Monitors the utilized power in Watts SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Corrected Read Errors Monitors the SCSI corrected read errors SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Drive Spin Up Time Monitors the SCSI drive spin up time SNMP Server
Page 132
Compaq SCSI Hard Read Errors Monitors the SCSI hard read errors SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Hard Write Errors Monitors the hard write errors SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI High Read Sectors Monitors the SCSI high speed sector SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI High Write Sectors Monitors the SCSI high write sectors SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Low Read Sectors Monitors the SCSI low read sector SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Low Write Sectors Monitors the SCSI low write sectors SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Recovered Read Errors Monitors the SCSI recovered read SNMP Server
errors
Compaq SCSI Recovered Write Errors Monitors the SCSI recovered write SNMP Server
errors
Compaq SCSI Seek Errors Monitors the SCSI seek errors SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Service Time Monitors the SCSI service time SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Timeout Errors Monitors the SCSI timeout errors SNMP Server
Compaq SCSI Trap Packets Monitors the number of SCSI trap SNMP Server
packets
Compaq SCSI Used Reallocation Sectors Monitors the SCSI used reallocation SNMP Server
sectors
Compaq Single Collision Packets Single Collision packets SNMP Server
Compaq SNMP Trap Log Size Monitors the SNMP trap log size SNMP Server
Compaq Traffic Trap Count Monitors the number of trap count in SNMP Server
traffic
Cyberoam CPU Utilization Monitors the cpu usage. SNMP Firewall
Cyberoam Disk Utilization Monitors the used disk percentage. SNMP Firewall
Cyberoam FTP Hits Monitors the count of Ftp Hits. SNMP Firewall
Cyberoam HTTP Hits Monitors the count of Http Hits. SNMP Firewall
Cyberoam IMAP Hits Monitors the count of imapHits. SNMP Firewall
Cyberoam Live Users Monitors the count of Live Users. SNMP Firewall
Cyberoam Memory Utilization Monitors the Momory utilization. SNMP Firewall
Cyberoam POP3 Hits Monitors the count of pop3Hits. SNMP Firewall
Cyberoam SMTP Hits Monitors the count of Smtp Hit. SNMP Firewall
DCN CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for DCN SNMP Switch
DCN Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for DCN SNMP Switch
Dell Inc. Alert Custom Monitor SNMP Networking
Device
Dell Inc. CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for DELL Inc SNMP Switch
Dell Inc. CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of DELL_Force10_S25N SNMP Switch
switch
Dell Inc. Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of SNMP Switch
DELL_Force10_S25N switch Page 133
Dell Inc. Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for Dell Inc SNMP Switch
DPtech Connections Monitors the Connections of DPtech SNMP Firewall
Firewall
DPtech CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for DPtech SNMP Firewall
DPtech CPU Utilization Monitor the CPU Utilization for DPtech SNMP Firewall /
devices Router
DPtech Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for DPtech SNMP Firewall
DPtech Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of DPTECH SNMP Firewall
Switches
DPtech Memory Utilization Monitor the Memory Utilization for SNMP Firewall /
DPtech devices Router
Eaton Online Custom Monitor SNMP UPS
Eaton UPS Battery Current Battery Current as reported by the UPS SNMP UPS
metering. Current is positive when
discharging, negative when recharging
the battery.
Eaton UPS Charge Battery percent charge. SNMP UPS
Eaton UPS Input Line Voltage The measured input voltage from the SNMP UPS
UPS meters in volts.
Eaton UPS Input Source The present external source of input SNMP UPS
power.
Eaton UPS Load Powerware UPS Load SNMP UPS
Eaton UPS Output Current The measured UPS output current in SNMP UPS
amps.
Eaton UPS Output Voltage The measured output voltage from the SNMP UPS
UPS metering in volts.
Eaton UPS Time Remaining Battery run time in seconds before UPS SNMP UPS
turns off due to low battery.
Emerson LiebertUPS Charge Monitors UPS Charge SNMP UPS
Emerson LiebertUPS Load Monitors UPS Load SNMP UPS
Extreme Extreme CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU Utilization for SNMP Switch
Extreme Devices
Extreme Extreme Temperature Monitors the Temperature for Extreme SNMP Switch
Devices
Extreme XOS CPU Utilization Monitors the XOS CPU Utilization for SNMP Switch
Extreme Devices
Extreme XOS Memory Utilization Monitors the XOS Memory Utilization SNMP Switch
for Extreme Devices
F5 Networks, Active Client Connection(s) Monitors F5 LoadBalancer Client Active SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. Connections.
F5 Networks, Active connections(server-PoolMember) Monitors the current connections from SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. server-side to the pool member. Page 134
F5 Networks, Active connections(ServerToSystem) Monitors the current connections from SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. server-side to the system.
F5 Networks, ActiveClientConnections Monitors the ActiveClientConnections of SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. F5-BIG-IP-1600 LoadBalancer
F5 Networks, ClusterMember State Monitors the state indicating whether SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. the specified member is enabled or not
{false(0), true(1)}.
F5 Networks, CPU FanSpeed Monitors the fan speed (in RPM) of the SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. indexed CPU on the system., This is only
supported for the platform where the
sensor data is available.
F5 Networks, CPU Temperature Monitors the temperature of the SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. indexed CPU on the system. This is only
supported for the platform where the
sensor data is available.
F5 Networks, CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of F5-BIG-IP-1600 SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. LoadBalancer
F5 Networks, CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of F5 LoadBalancer SNMP Load Balancer
Inc.
F5 Networks, CPU Utilization Monitors F5 LoadBalancer SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. CPUUtilization.
F5 Networks, Dropped Packet(s) Monitors the total dropped packets. SNMP Load Balancer
Inc.
F5 Networks, Global TM PoolMember State Monitors the state indicating whether SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. the specified pool member is enabled
or not {disable(0), enable(1)}.
F5 Networks, Global TM VirtualServer Status Monitors the activity status of the SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. specified virtual server, as specified by
the user {none(0), enabled(1),
disabled(2), disabledbyparent(3)}.
F5 Networks, HTTP Request(s) Monitors the total number of HTTP SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. requests to the LoadBalancer system.
F5 Networks, Incoming Packet Error(s) Monitors the total incoming packet SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. errors for the system.
F5 Networks, Local TM PoolMember state Monitors the activity status of the SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. specified pool, as specified by the
user{none(0), enabled(1), disabled(2),
disabledbyparent(3)}.
F5 Networks, Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of F5-BIG-IP-1600 SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. LoadBalancer
F5 Networks, Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of F5 SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. LoadBalancer
F5 Networks, Memory Utilization Monitors F5 LoadBalancer SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. MemoryUtilization.
F5 Networks, Outgoing Packet Error(s) Monitors the total outgoing packet SNMP Load Balancer
Inc. errors for the system. Page 135
FiberHome CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of FiberHome-EPON- SNMP Switch

5516 Switch
FiberHome CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of FiberHome- SNMP Switch
S2200ME-PAF Switch
FiberHome Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of FiberHome- SNMP Switch
EPON-5516 Switch
FiberHome Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of FiberHome- SNMP Switch
S2200ME-PAF Switch
Fortigate Connections Monitors the Connections of Fortigate SNMP Firewall
Firewall 200B
Fortigate Connections Monitors the Connections of Fortigate SNMP Router
devices
Fortigate CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Fortigate Firewall SNMP Firewall
200B
Fortigate CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Fortigate devices SNMP Router
Fortigate Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Fortigate SNMP Firewall
Firewall 200B
Fortigate Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Fortigate SNMP Router
devices
Fortinet, Inc. Active Session Count Active Session Count SNMP Router
Fortinet, Inc. CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU utilization SNMP Firewall
Fortinet, Inc. Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory Utilization SNMP Firewall
Foundry CPU Utilization The statistics collection of utilization of SNMP Switch
Networks, the CPU in the device
Inc.
Foundry Foundry Temperature Temperature of the chassis. Each unit SNMP Switch
Networks, is 0.5 degrees Celcius. Only
Inc. management module built with
temperature sensor hardware is
applicable. For those non-applicable
management module, it returns no-
such-name
Foundry PowerSupply The power supply operation status SNMP Switch

Networks,
Inc.
Foundry QosProfileCalculatedBandwidth Qos Profile Calculated Bandwidth SNMP Switch
Networks,
Inc.
Foundry QosProfileRequestedBandwidth Qos Profile Requested Bandwidth SNMP Switch
Networks,
Inc.
Foundry ViolatorPortNumber The port number of the switch or router SNMP Switch
Networks, that received a violator packet. It is Page 136
Inc. included in the locked address violation
trap
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C-S10508 Switch SNMP Switch
H3C CPU Utilization Monitor the CPU Utilization for H3C SNMP Switch
devices
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C-S2108-E0004 SNMP Switch
switch
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C-S3610-PWR-EI SNMP Switch
Switch
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C-S5120-52SC-HI SNMP Switch
Switch
H3C CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for H3C SNMP Switch
H3C CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for H3C SNMP Switch
devices
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C-S5800-32C SNMP Switch
Switch
devices
devices
devices
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C-S7506E-S SNMP Switch
Switches
devices
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C-S9505E Switch SNMP Switch
devices
devices
H3C CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for H3C SNMP Firewall
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C-WX3008 SNMP Switch
Switches
H3C CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of H3C Devices SNMP Networking
Device
devices
devices
H3C CPU Utilization Monitor the CPU Utilization for H3C SNMP Router
devices Page 137
H3C CPU Utilization Monitor the CPU Utilization for H3C SNMP Networking
devices Device
devices
devices
devices
devices
devices
devices
H3C CPU Utilization Monitor the CPU Utilization for H3C SNMP Router /
devices Firewall
H3C Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of H3C-S10508 SNMP Switch
Switch
H3C Memory Utilization Monitor the Memory Utilization for H3C SNMP Switch
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of H3C-S3610- SNMP Switch
PWR-EI Switch
H3C Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of H3C-S5120- SNMP Switch
52SC-HI Switch
H3C Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for H3C SNMP Switch
H3C Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for H3C SNMP Switch
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of H3C-S5800-32C SNMP Switch
Switch
devices
devices
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of H3C-S7506E-S SNMP Switch
Switches
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of H3C-S9505E SNMP Switch
Switch Page 138
devices
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for H3C SNMP Firewall
H3C Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of H3C-WX3008 SNMP Switch
Switches
H3C Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of H3C Devices SNMP Networking
Device
devices
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Monitor the Memory Utilization for H3C SNMP Router
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Monitor the Memory Utilization for H3C SNMP Networking
devices Device
devices
devices
devices
devices
devices
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Monitor the Memory Utilization of H3C SNMP Switch
devices
H3C Memory Utilization Monitor the Memory Utilization for H3C SNMP Router /
devices Firewall
Hewlett- Associated Mobile User(s) Monitors associated Mobile User(s) for SNMP Wireless
Packard HP devices
Hewlett- CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU Utilization for HP SNMP Switch
Packard ProCurve Devices
Hewlett- Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory Utilization for HP SNMP Switch
Packard ProCurve Devices
Hillstone ActiveClientConnections Monitors the ActiveClientConnections of SNMP Firewall
Hillstone-SG-6000-G5150 Firewall
Hillstone CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Hillstone-SG-6000- SNMP Firewall
G5150 Firewall Page 139
Hillstone Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Hillstone-SG- SNMP Firewall

6000-G5150 Firewall
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Eudemon1000E SNMP Firewall
Firewall
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei-Symantec- SNMP Router
USG9310 Router
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei-AR1220 SNMP Router
Routers
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei-AR2240 SNMP Router
Routers
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei Devices SNMP Switch
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei-epon- SNMP Switch
MA5600T Switch
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei-epon-olt SNMP Switch
Switch
Huawei CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for Huawei SNMP Firewall
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei NE20E SNMP Router
Router
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei-NE40-4 SNMP Router
Router
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei-Quidway- SNMP Router
Router-R2621 Router
Huawei CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for Huawei SNMP Switch
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei devices SNMP Switch
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitor the CPU Utilization for Huawei SNMP Switch
devices
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei S3352 SNMP Switch
Switches
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei-S7703 SNMP Switch
switch
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitor the CPU Utilization for Huawei SNMP Switch /
devices Router
Switches
Switches Page 140
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei USG9520 SNMP Switch
Switches
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei_AR3260 SNMP Router
Switch
Huawei CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Huawei devices SNMP Router
devices Router
devices Router
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of SNMP Firewall
Eudemon1000E Firewall
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei- SNMP Router
Symantec-USG9310 Router
AR1220 Routers
AR2240 Routers
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei-epon- SNMP Switch
MA5600T Switch
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei-epon- SNMP Switch
olt Switch
Huawei Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for Huawei SNMP Firewall

Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei SNMP Switch
devices
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei NE20E SNMP Router
Router
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei-NE40-4 SNMP Router
Router
Huawei Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for Huawei SNMP Router
Quidway-Router-R2621 Router
Huawei Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for Huawei SNMP Switch
devices
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitor the Memory Utilization for SNMP Switch
Huawei devices
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei S3352 SNMP Switch
Switches
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei-S7703 SNMP Switch
switch Page 141

Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei-S8505 SNMP Switch
Switch
Huawei devices
Switches
Switches
USG9300 Router
USG9520 Switches
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of SNMP Router
Huawei_AR3260 Switch
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Huawei SNMP Router

devices
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of SNMP Router
Huawei_SRG1220 Routers
Huawei devices
Huawei Memory Utilization Monitor the Memory Utilization for SNMP Switch /
Huawei devices Router
IBM IBM Interface Rx Traffic Monitors the total number of octets SNMP Server
received on the interface
IBM IBM Interface Tx Traffic Monitors the total number of octets SNMP Server
transmitted out of the interface
IBM IBM InterfaceRx Utilization Monitors the utilization of the interface SNMP Server
based on the incoming traffic
IBM IBM InterfaceTx Utilization Monitors the utilization of the interface SNMP Server
based on the outgoing traffic
IBM iBMPSGPhysicalMemoryDataWidth Monitoring the data width used in this SNMP Server
Physical Memory
IBM iBMPSGPhysicalMemoryTotalWidth Monitoring the total width used in this SNMP Server
Physical Memory
IBM IBMPSGProcessorCurrentClockSpeed Current clock speed of this Processor SNMP Server
IBM IBMPSGTachometerCurrentReading Monitors the fan speed SNMP Server
IBM IBMPSGTemperatureSensorCurrentReading Monitors the Current Reading of this SNMP Server
Temperature Sensor
IBM IBMPSGVoltageSensorCurrentReading Monitors the Current Reading of this SNMP Server
Voltage Sensor
IBM Total Memory Width Utilization Monitoring the total used width SNMP Server
utilization of this Physical Memory Page 142
Juniper Active Session Count Description SNMP Firewall

Juniper Average delay Average round-trip time (in SNMP Switch /
milliseconds) between two Router
measurement points.
Juniper Buffer Utilization Operating Buffer Utilization SNMP Switch /
Firewall
Juniper Component operating status Operational status of a router hardware SNMP Switch /
component Router
Juniper Component operating temperature Operational temperature of a hardware SNMP Networking
component, in Celsius Device
Juniper CPU load Average utilization over the past minute SNMP Networking
of a CPU. Device
Juniper CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Firewall SNMP Firewall
Juniper CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Juniper-EX Switch SNMP Switch
Juniper CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Juniper-SRX650 SNMP Firewall
Firewall
Juniper CPU Utilization(Last 1 min) Monitors the Last one minute CPU SNMP Firewall
utilization in percentage.
Juniper CPU Utilization(Last 15 min) Monitors the Last fifteen minutes CPU SNMP Firewall
Juniper CPU Utilization(Last 5 min) Monitors the Last five minutes CPU SNMP Firewall
Juniper DRAM size DRAM size SNMP Networking
Device
Juniper FRU state Operational status of each field- SNMP Switch /
replaceable unit (FRU) Router
Juniper Juniper Connections Monitors the Connections of Firewall SNMP Firewall
Juniper Juniper Temperature Temperature Measurement SNMP Swich / Router
Juniper Label Switched Path state Operational state of an MPLS label- SNMP Router
switched path
Juniper LSP utilization Utilization of the MPLS label-switched SNMP Switch /
path Router
Juniper Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Juniper-EX SNMP Switch
Switch
Juniper Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Juniper SNMP Switch
Switches
Juniper Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Juniper-SRX650 SNMP Firewall
Firewall
Juniper Memory utilization Utilization of memory on the Routing SNMP Swich / Router
Engine and FPC.
Juniper Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory Utilization SNMP Switch /
Page 143
Firewall
Juniper Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Firewall SNMP Firewall
Juniper Outbound Counters Number of bytes belonging to the SNMP Switch /
specified forwarding class that were Router
transmitted on the specified virtual
circuit
Juniper Outbound Counters for non-ATM Number of transmitted bytes or packets SNMP Router
per interface per forwarding class
Juniper Output queue size Size, in packets, of each output queue SNMP Switch /
per forwarding class, per interface Router
Juniper Rate of tail dropped packets Rate of tail-dropped packets per output SNMP Router
queue, per forwarding class, per
interface
Juniper Redundancy switchover Total number of redundancy SNMP Swich / Router
switchovers reported by this entity
Juniper Rss Session FailureCount Monitors the rss session failure count. SNMP Firewall
Juniper RSS SessionCount Monitor the allocate rss session SNMP Firewall
number
KYLAND CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for KYLAND SNMP Switch
KYLAND Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for KYLAND SNMP Switch
leadsec CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of leadsec Firewall SNMP Firewall
leadsec Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of leadsec SNMP Firewall
Firewall
MAIPU CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for MAIPU SNMP Swich / Router
MAIPU CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of MAIPU S4126E SNMP Switch
Switch
MAIPU CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of MAIPU S4128E SNMP Switch
Switch
MAIPU Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for MAIPU SNMP Swich / Router
MAIPU Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of MAIPU S4126E SNMP Switch
Switch
MAIPU Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of MAIPU S4128E SNMP Switch
Switch
MAIPU Temperature Monitors the Temperature of MAIPU SNMP Router
Router
MGE Battery Installed Battery Installed SNMP UPS
MGE Battery sys Shutdown Battery sys Shutdown Duration SNMP UPS
MGE UPS Load Monitors UPS Load SNMP UPS
Microsoft Bytes Received Number of bytes the server has WMI Server
received from the network. This
property indicates how busy the server
is
Microsoft Bytes Total Number of bytes the server has sent to WMI Server
and received from the network, an Page 144
overall indication of how busy the
server is
Microsoft Bytes Transmitted Number of bytes the server has WMI Server
received from the network. This
property indicates how busy the server
is
Microsoft Cache Hit Ratio Monitors the cache hit ratio SNMP Server
Microsoft ContextSwitches Rate of switches from one thread to WMI Server
another. Thread switches can occur
either inside of a single process or
across processes
Microsoft CPU Idle Time Monitors the CPU Idle ( MilliSecond ) of VIWMI Server
HyperV Host using WMI
Microsoft CPU Ready Monitors the CPU Ready ( MilliSecond ) VIWMI Server
of HyperV Guest using WMI
Microsoft CPU Usage MHz per core Monitors the CPU Usage MHz per core VIWMI Server
Microsoft CPU Used Monitors the CPU Used ( MilliSecond ) VIWMI Server
Microsoft CPU Used Time Monitors the CPU Used ( MilliSecond ) VIWMI Server
of HyperV Host using WMI
Microsoft CPU Utilization Monitors the Overall CPU Utilization of VIWMI Server
Microsoft CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU Utilization of HyperV VIWMI Server
Guest using WMI
Microsoft CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU Utilization using WMI WMI Server /
Desktop
Microsoft CPU Utilization Per Core Monitors the CPU Utilization per Core of VIWMI Server
Microsoft CPU Wait Monitors the CPU Wait ( MilliSecond ) of VIWMI Server
HyperV Guest using WMI
Microsoft Data Space of DB Monitors the total data size in Database SNMP Server
Microsoft Data Transaction LogSpace Monitors the data transaction logspace SNMP Server
Microsoft Delivered Outbound Messages Monitors the delivered outbound SNMP Server
messages
Microsoft Disk I/O Usage Monitors Disk I/O Usage of HyperV Host VIWMI Server
using WMI
Microsoft Disk Queue Length Number of requests outstanding on the WMI Server
disk
Microsoft Disk Read Latency Monitors Disk Read Latency of HyperV VIWMI Server
Host using WMI
Microsoft Disk Read Requests Monitors Disk Read Requests of HyperV VIWMI Server
Host using WMI Page 145
Microsoft Disk Read Requests Monitors Disk Read Requests of HyperV VIWMI Server
Guest using WMI
Microsoft Disk Read Speed Monitors Disk Read Speed of HyperV VIWMI Server
Host using WMI
Microsoft Disk Read Speed Monitors Disk Read Speed of HyperV VIWMI Server
Guest using WMI
Microsoft Disk Reads Rate of read operations on the disk per WMI Server /
Second Desktop
Microsoft Disk Space Usage Monitors Disk Space Usage Latency of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Disk Utilization Monitors the Disk Utilization using WMI WMI Server /
Desktop
Microsoft Disk Write Latency Monitors Disk Write Latency of HyperV VIWMI Server
Host using WMI
Microsoft Disk Write Requests Monitors Disk Write Requests of HyperV VIWMI Server
Host using WMI
Microsoft Disk Write Requests Monitors Disk Write Requests of HyperV VIWMI Server
Guest using WMI
Microsoft Disk Write Speed Monitors Disk Write Speed of HyperV VIWMI Server
Host using WMI
Microsoft Disk Write Speed Monitors Disk Write Speed of HyperV VIWMI Server
Guest using WMI
Microsoft Disk Writes Rate of write operations on the disk WMI Server /
Desktop
Microsoft File Read Bytes Overall rate at which bytes are read to WMI Server /
satisfy file system read requests to all Desktop
devices on the computer, including
read requests from the file system
cache
Microsoft File Read Operations Combined rate of file system read WMI Server /
requests to all devices on the computer, Desktop
including requests to read from the file
system cache
Microsoft File Write Bytes Overall rate at which bytes are written WMI Server /
to satisfy file system write requests to Desktop
all devices on the computer, including
write requests to the file system cache
Microsoft File Write Operations Combined rate of the file system write WMI Server /
requests to all devices on the computer, Desktop
including requests to write to data in
the file system cache
Microsoft Free Disk Space in GB Monitors the Free disk space in GB WMI Server /
using WMI Desktop
Microsoft Free Disk Space in MB Monitors the Free disk space in MB WMI Server /
using WMI Page 146
Desktop
Microsoft Free Physical Memory Physical memory currently unused and WMI Server /
available, in Mega Bytes Desktop
Microsoft Idle Time Percentage of time during the sample WMI Server /
interval that the processor was idle. Not Desktop
applicable for Windows XP and
Windows 2000 devices.
Microsoft Inbound Connection Rate Monitors the inbound connection rate SNMP Server
Microsoft IO Batch Writes Monitors the IO batch writes SNMP Server
Microsoft IO Outstanding Reads Monitors the IO outstanding reads SNMP Server
Microsoft IO Outstanding Writes Monitors the IO outstanding writes SNMP Server
Microsoft IO Page Reads Monitors the IO page reads SNMP Server
Microsoft Memory Active Monitors Memory Active in KB of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Memory Consumed Monitors Memory Consumed in KB of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Memory Overhead Monitors Memory OverHead in KB of VIWMI Server

Microsoft Memory Used Monitors Memory Used in KB of HyperV VIWMI Server
Host using WMI
Microsoft Memory Utilization Monitors Memory Usage of HyperV Host VIWMI Server
using WMI
Microsoft Memory Utilization Monitors Memory Usage of HyperV VIWMI Server
Guest using WMI
Microsoft Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory Utilization using WMI Server /
WMI Desktop
Microsoft Network Packets Received Monitors Network Packets Received of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Network Packets Received Monitors Network Packets Received of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Network Packets Transmitted Monitors Network Packets Transmitted VIWMI Server
of HyperV Host using WMI
Microsoft Network Packets Transmitted Monitors Network Packets Transmitted VIWMI Server
Microsoft Network Received Speed Monitors Network Received Speed of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Network Received Speed Monitors Network Received Speed of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Network Transmitted Speed Monitors Network Transmitted Speed of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Network Transmitted Speed Monitors Network Transmitted Speed of VIWMI Server
Microsoft Network Usage Monitors Network Usage of HyperV Host VIWMI Server
using WMI Page 147
Microsoft Network Usage Monitors Network Usage of HyperV VIWMI Server

Guest using WMI
Microsoft Non-delivery Reports (Total Inbound) Monitors the total inbound non-delivery SNMP Server
report
Microsoft Non-delivery Reports (Total Outbound) Monitors the total outbound non- SNMP Server
delivery report
Microsoft Outbound Connection Rate Monitors the outbound connection rate SNMP Server
Microsoft Page Faults Overall rate at which faulted pages are WMI Server /
handled by the processor Desktop
Microsoft Page Reads Number of times the disk was read to WMI Server /
resolve hard page faults Desktop
Microsoft Page Writes Overall rate at which faulted pages are WMI Server /
handled by the processor Desktop
Microsoft Pages Per Second Number of pages read from or written WMI Server /
to the disk to resolve hard page faults Desktop
Microsoft Partition Details of the Device(%) Monitoring the usage in each partition WMI Server /
of the Device using WMI. Desktop
Microsoft Privileged Time Percentage of non-idle processor time WMI Server /
spent in privileged mode Desktop
Microsoft Processor Queue Length Number of threads in the processor WMI Server /
queue Desktop
Microsoft Processor Time Percentage of time that the processor is WMI Server /
executing a non-idle thread Desktop
Microsoft Total Active Locks Monitors the total active locks SNMP Server
Microsoft Total Blocking Locks Monitors the total blocking locks SNMP Server
Microsoft Total IO Transactions Monitors the total IO transactions SNMP Server
Microsoft Total Messages Received (from internet) Monitors the total messages received SNMP Server
from internet
Microsoft Total Msgs (awaiting final delivery) Monitors the total awaiting messages SNMP Server
for delivery
Microsoft Total Msgs Queued for delivery (to internet) Monitors the to total messages queued SNMP Server
for delivery to internet
Microsoft Total Open User Connections Monitors the total open user SNMP Server
connections
Microsoft Total Size of DB Monitors the total database size SNMP Server
Microsoft Total Size of the Msgs (awaiting final Monitors the total size of the awaiting SNMP Server
delivery) messages for delivery
Microsoft Unused Space of DB Monitors the unused space in database SNMP Server
Microsoft Used Disk Space in GB Monitors the used disk space in GB WMI Server /
using WMI Desktop
Microsoft Used Disk Space in MB Monitors the used disk space in MB WMI Server /
using WMI Page 148
Desktop
Microsoft Used LogSpace Monitors the used logspace SNMP Server
Microsoft User Time Percentage of non-idle processor time WMI Server /
spent in user mode Desktop
NetApp, Inc. Active Disk Count Monitors the number of disks which are SNMP Storage
currently active, including parity disks.
NetApp, Inc. Active snapvault destinations. Monitors the number of active SNMP Storage
snapvault destinations
NetApp, Inc. Active snapvault sources Monitors the number of active SNMP Storage
snapvault sources.
NetApp, Inc. Aggregate Available Monitors the aggregate available in SNMP Storage
bytes
NetApp, Inc. Aggregate State Monitors the current state of the SNMP Storage
aggregates
NetApp, Inc. Aggregate Used Monitors the aggregate used in bytes SNMP Storage
NetApp, Inc. Aggregate Used Percentage Monitors the aggregate used SNMP Storage
percentage
NetApp, Inc. Battery Status Monitors the indication of the current SNMP Storage
status of the NVRAM batteries. { ok ( 1 ) ,
partiallyDischarged ( 2 ) ,
fullyDischarged ( 3 ) , notPresent ( 4 ) ,
nearEndOfLife ( 5 ) , atEndOfLife ( 6 ) ,
unknown ( 7 ) , overCharged ( 8 ) ,
fullyCharged ( 9 ) }
NetApp, Inc. Cache Age Age in minutes of the oldest read-only SNMP Storage
blocks in the buffer cache.
NetApp, Inc. CPU Utilization Monitors the percent of time that the SNMP Storage
CPU has been doing useful work since
the last time a client requested the
cpuBusyTimePerCent.
NetApp, Inc. Disk Read Bytes Monitors the total number of bytes SNMP Storage
read from disk since the last boot.
NetApp, Inc. Disk State Monitors the current state of the disks SNMP Storage
NetApp, Inc. Disk Write Bytes Monitors the total number of bytes SNMP Storage
written to disk since the last boot.
NetApp, Inc. Failed Disk count Monitors the number of disks which are SNMP Storage
currently broken.
NetApp, Inc. Fan Status Monitors the Count of the number of SNMP Storage
chassis fans which are not operating
within the recommended RPM range.
NetApp, Inc. FCP Operations Monitors the total number of FCP ops SNMP Storage
handled since the last boot
NetApp, Inc. FCP Read Bytes Monitors the total number of bytes SNMP Storage
read via fcp since the last boot.
NetApp, Inc. FCP Write Bytes Monitors the total number of bytes SNMP Storage
written via fcp since the last boot. Page 149
NetApp, Inc. Global Status Monitors the overall status of the SNMP Storage
appliance.{ other ( 1 ) , unknown ( 2 ) ,
ok ( 3 ) , nonCritical ( 4 ) , critical ( 5 ) ,
nonRecoverable ( 6 ) }
NetApp, Inc. ISCSI Operations Monitors the total number of iSCSI ops SNMP Storage
handled since the last boot
NetApp, Inc. ISCSI Read Bytes Monitors the total number of bytes SNMP Storage
read via iscsi since the last boot.
NetApp, Inc. ISCSI Write Bytes Monitors the total number of bytes SNMP Storage
written via iscsi since the last boot.
NetApp, Inc. LUN State Monitors the current state of the lun's SNMP Storage
NetApp, Inc. NetApp Temperature Monitors the indication of whether the SNMP Storage
hardware is currently operating outside
of its recommended temperature
range. { no ( 1 ) , yes ( 2 ) }.
NetApp, Inc. Power Supply Status Monitors Count of the number of power SNMP Storage
supplies which are in degraded mode. {
no ( 1 ) , yes ( 2 ) }
NetApp, Inc. qrV Files Used Monitors the current number of files SNMP Storage
used for this qrVEntry.
NetApp, Inc. qrVEntry Used bytes Monitors the current number of KBytes SNMP Storage
used for this qrVEntry.
NetApp, Inc. Quota State Status Monitors whether quotas are ON, OFF SNMP Storage
or initializing. quotaStateOff {( 1 ) ,
quotaStateOn ( 2 ) , quotaStateInit ( 3 ) }
NetApp, Inc. Snapvault Status Monitors the current transfer status of SNMP Storage
the snapvault relationship.
NetApp, Inc. Snapvault Total Primary Failures Monitors the total number of failed SNMP Storage
snapvault transfers on the snapvault
primary. Persistent across reboot.
NetApp, Inc. Snapvault Total Primary Successes Monitors the total number of successful SNMP Storage
snapvault transfers from the snapvault
primary. Persistent across reboot.
NetApp, Inc. Snapvault Total Secondary Failures Monitors total number of failed SNMP Storage
snapvault transfers on the snapvault
secondary. Persistent across reboot.
NetApp, Inc. Snapvault Total Secondary Successes Monitors the total number of successful SNMP Storage
snapvault transfers from the snapvault
secondary. Persistent across reboot.
NetApp, Inc. Total DiskCount Monitors the total number of disks on SNMP Storage
the system.
NetApp, Inc. Volume Available Monitors the volume available in bytes SNMP Storage
NetApp, Inc. volume available bytes monitors the total disk space in kbytes SNMP Storage
that is free for use on the referenced Page 150
file system.
NetApp, Inc. Volume State Monitors the current state of the SNMP Storage
volumes
NetApp, Inc. Volume Used Monitors the volume used in bytes SNMP Storage
NetApp, Inc. Volume Used Percentage Monitors the volume used percentage SNMP Storage
NetScreen Active Session Count Active Session Count Desc SNMP Firewall
Technologies,
Inc.
NetScreen CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU utilization SNMP Firewall
Technologies,
Inc.
NetScreen Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory Utilization SNMP Firewall
Technologies,
Inc.
Novell Cache maximum size Cache maximum size in Kbytes, this is SNMP Server
hard limit parameter
Novell Contact failures The number of failures since the last SNMP Server
time an attempt to contact the peer
eDirectory Server was successful
Novell Cumulative failures Cumulative failures in contacting the SNMP Server
peer eDirectory Server since the
creation of this entry
Novell Cumulative successes Cumulative successes in contacting the SNMP Server
peer eDirectory Server since the
creation of this entry
Novell Database Size Current size of the eDirectory Database SNMP Server
Novell Dynamic Cache Memory Dynamic Cache Adjust percentage SNMP Server
Novell Entries in cache Number of Entries in cache SNMP Server
Novell Entry hits Number of Entry hits SNMP Server
Novell Entry misses Number of Entries examined to SNMP Server
determine misses
Novell Fetched replication updates Number of replication updates fetched SNMP Server
or received from eDirectory Servers
Novell Incoming traffic Incoming traffic on the interface SNMP Server
Novell Operations forwarded Number of operations forwarded by SNMP Server
this eDirectory Server to other
eDirectory Servers
Novell Outgoing traffic Outgoing traffic on the interface SNMP Server
Novell Received add Entry requests Number of addEntry requests received SNMP Server
Novell Received read requests Number of read requests received SNMP Server
Novell Rejected bind requests Number of bind requests that have SNMP Server
been rejected due to inappropriate Page 151
authentication or invalid credentials
Novell Sent replication updates Number of replication updates sent to SNMP Server
or taken by eDirectory Servers
Novell Unauthenticated requests received Number of SNMP Server
unauthenticated/anonymous bind
requests received
Nsfocus CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Nsfocus Firewall SNMP Firewall
Nsfocus Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Nsfocus SNMP Firewall
Firewall
OpZoon CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of OpZoon Switch SNMP Switch
OpZoon CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of OpZoon PE-3810 SNMP Switch
Router
OpZoon CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of OpZoon Switch SNMP Switch
OpZoon Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of OpZoon Switch SNMP Switch
OpZoon Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of OpZoon PE- SNMP Switch
3810 Router
OpZoon Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of OpZoon Switch SNMP Switch
Oracle DataFile DiskReads Monitors the number of disk reads in SNMP Server
data file
Oracle DataFile DiskWrites Monitors the number of disk writes in SNMP Server
data file
Oracle DataFileSize Allocated Monitors the allocated data file size SNMP Server
Oracle Library CacheGets Monitors the number of request for SNMP Server
Library CacheGets
Oracle Library CacheInvalidations Monitors the number of SNMP Server
CacheInvalidations
Oracle Library CacheReloads Monitors the number of reloads SNMP Server
Oracle Number of UserCommits Monitors the number of commits SNMP Server
Oracle OraDbSysUserRollbacks Monitors the number of rollbacks SNMP Server
Oracle TableScan Blocks Monitors the number of blocks SNMP Server
Oracle Tablespace Allocated Monitors the total table space allocated SNMP Server
Oracle Tablespace Largest Available Monitors the largest available SNMP Server
tablespace
Oracle Tablespace Used Monitors the total tablespace used SNMP Server
Radware CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for Radware SNMP Switch
Radware Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Radware AD- SNMP Switch
508 Switches
Radware Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of Radware DP- SNMP Switch
502 Switches
Research In Average Response Time Monitors the average response time (in SNMP Server
Motion milliseconds) for operations for users Page 152
on this mail server in the last 10
minutes. Applies to BlackBerry
Enterprise Server for Lotus Domino
only.
Research In Failed Connections Monitors the number of failed SNMP Server
Motion connection attempts to this mail server
in the last 10 minutes. Applies to
BlackBerry Enterprise Server for Lotus
Domino only.
Research In MDS Connection Failure Monitors the number of failed SNMP Server
Motion connections initiated by MDS to
another address/service.
Research In MDS Connection Success Monitors the number of successful SNMP Server
Motion connections initiated by MDS to
another address/service.
Research In MDS Push Connections Monitors the number of push server SNMP Server
Motion connections.
Research In Messages received per min Monitors the total number of messages SNMP Server
Motion delivered to handhelds per min.
Research In Messages sent per min Monitors the total number of messages SNMP Server
Motion sent from handhelds per min.
Research In Total License Configured Monitors the total number of licenses SNMP Server
Motion installed on the server.
Research In Total License Used Monitors the total number of licenses SNMP Server
Motion in use currently.
Research In Total messages pending Monitors the total number of messages SNMP Server
Motion delivered to handhelds per min.
Research In Total messages received Monitors the total number of messages SNMP Server
Motion delivered to handhelds.
Research In Total messages sent Monitors the total number of messages SNMP Server
Motion sent from handhelds.
Research In Total Users Monitors the number of users who are SNMP Server
Motion homed on this mail server. Applies to
BlackBerry Enterprise Server for Lotus
Domino only.
Riverbed Active Connection(s) Monitors the current number of active SNMP WAN
Technology, (optimized) connections. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed BW aggregate in LAN Monitors the total optimized bytes SNMP WAN
Technology, across all application ports, in the WAN Accelerator
Inc. to LAN direction since the last restart of
service, as measured on the LAN side.
Riverbed BW aggregate in WAN Monitors the total optimized bytes SNMP WAN
Technology, across all application ports, in the WAN Page 153
Accelerator
Inc. to LAN direction since the last restart of
service, as measured on the WAN side.
Riverbed BW aggregate out LAN Monitors the total optimized bytes SNMP WAN
Technology, across all application ports, in the LAN Accelerator
Inc. to WAN direction since the last restart
of service, as measured on the LAN
side.
Riverbed BW aggregate out WAN Monitors the total optimized bytes SNMP WAN
Technology, across all application ports, in the LAN Accelerator
Inc. to WAN direction since the last restart
of service, as measured on the WAN
side.
Riverbed BW Passthrough In Monitors the Passthrough bytes in WAN SNMP WAN
Technology, to LAN direction. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed BW Passthrough Out Monitors the Passthrough bytes in LAN SNMP WAN
Technology, to WAN direction. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed BW Passthrough total Monitors the total passthrough bytes. SNMP WAN
Technology, Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed CPU Usage(5 mins avg) Monitors the Five-minute CPU load in SNMP WAN
Technology, hundreths. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed CPU Utilization Monitors the percentage CPU SNMP WAN

Technology, utilization, aggregated across all CPUs, Accelerator
Inc. rolling average over the past minute.
Riverbed dsCostPerSegment Monitors the Cost per segment SNMP WAN
Technology, expressed in microseconds. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed dsHits Total Monitors the total number of datastore SNMP WAN
Technology, hits since last restart of service. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed dsMiss Total Monitors the total number of datastore SNMP WAN
Technology, misses since last restart of service. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed Established Connection(s) Monitors the current number of SNMP WAN
Technology, established (optimized) connections. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed Half Closed Connection(s) Monitors the Current total number of SNMP WAN
Technology, half-closed (optimized) connections. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed Half Opened Connection(s) Monitors the current total number of SNMP WAN
Technology, half-opened (optimized) connections. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed Optimization Service Status Monitors the Current status of the SNMP WAN
Technology, optimization service. Page 154
Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed Optimized Connection(s) Monitors the current total number of SNMP WAN
Technology, optimized connections. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed Pass-Through Connection(s) Monitors the current total number of SNMP WAN
Technology, pass-through connections. Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed Steelhead Temperature Monitors the temperature of the SNMP WAN
Technology, system(C). Accelerator
Inc.
Riverbed System Health Status Monitors the current health of the SNMP WAN
Technology, system. The value is one amongst Accelerator
Inc. Healthy, Admission Control, Degraded,
Critical.
Riverbed Total Connection(s) Monitors the total number of SNMP WAN
Technology, connections. Accelerator
Inc.
RuiJie CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for RuiJie SNMP Switch
RuiJie Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for RuiJie SNMP Switch
SecGate CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of SecGate Firewall SNMP Firewall
SecGate Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of SecGate SNMP Firewall
Firewall
SOCOMEC Battery Capacity Estimate of the battery charge SNMP UPS
UPS remaining expressed as a percent of
full charge.
UPS remaining expressed in percent
SOCOMEC Battery Negative Voltage Battery negative voltage in volts SNMP UPS
UPS
SOCOMEC Battery Positive Voltage Battery positive voltage in volts SNMP UPS
UPS
SOCOMEC Battery Voltage Battery Voltage in volts. SNMP UPS
UPS
SOCOMEC Battery Voltage Battery Voltage in volts SNMP UPS
UPS
SOCOMEC Battery Voltage Battery Voltage in volts SNMP UPS
UPS
SOCOMEC Output Load Phase 1 Monitor UPS Output Load Phase 1 SNMP UPS
UPS expressed in percent
UPS expressed in percent Page 155
SOCOMEC Output Load Rate Phase 1 Monitor UPS Output Load Phase 1 SNMP UPS
SOCOMEC UPS Output Load Rate UPS Output Load Rate in %. SNMP UPS
UPS
Symbol UPS Battery current Custom Monitor SNMP UPS
Tainet CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of Tainet_Venus_2816 SNMP Switch
Switch
Tainet Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of SNMP Switch
Tainet_Venus_2816 Switch
Topsec CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of TopSec Firewall SNMP Firewall
Topsec Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of TopSec SNMP Firewall
Firewall
Topsec VPN-Connections Monitors the VPN-Connections of SNMP Firewall
TopSec Firewall
Trango SU Count SU Count SNMP Wireless
TrippLite UPS Charge Monitors UPS Charge SNMP UPS
TrippLite UPS Load Monitors UPS Load SNMP UPS
VENUS Connections Monitors the Connections of VENUS- SNMP Firewall
VSOS-V2.6 Firewall
VENUS Connections Monitors the Connections of VENUS_FW SNMP Firewall
Firewall
VENUS CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of VENUS-VSOS-V2.6 SNMP Firewall
Firewall
VENUS CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of VENUS_FW Firewall SNMP Firewall
VENUS Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of VENUS-VSOS- SNMP Firewall
V2.6 Firewall
VENUS Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of VENUS_FW SNMP Firewall
Firewall
Vmware Active Memory Amount of guest physical memory VIWebService Server
actively used.
Vmware Balloon Memory Amount of guest physical memory that VIWebService Server
is currently reclaimed from the VM
through ballooning.
Vmware Compressed Memory Amount of memory compressed by ESX VIWebService Server
for VM Page 156
Vmware Consumed Memory Amount of memory consumed by a VIWebService Server

virtual machine,
Vmware CPU Idle Time Total time that the CPU spent in an idle VIWebService Server
state
Vmware CPU Ready Time that the virtual machine was VIWebService Server
ready, but could not get scheduled to
run on the physical CPU
Vmware CPU Usage Sum of the actively used CPU of all VIWebService Server
powered on virtual machines on a host.
Vmware CPU Used Total CPU usage By HostSystem VIWebService Server
Vmware CPU Used Time accounted to the virtual machine VIWebService Server
Vmware CPU Utilization Actively used CPU of the host, as a VIWebService Server
percentage of the total available CPU
Vmware CPU Utilization Actively used VCPU, as percentage of VIWebService Server
total available CPU. This is the host view
of the CPU usage
Vmware CPU Wait CPU time spent in wait state VIWebService Server
Vmware Datastore Free Space VMware Datastore Freespace Monitor VIWebService Server
Vmware Datastore Read IOPs Average number of read commands VIWebService Server
issued per second to the datastore
during the collection interval.
Vmware Datastore Read Latency Average amount of time for a read VIWebService Server
operation from the datastore
Vmware Datastore Read Latency Average amount of time for a read VIWebService Server
operation from the datastore
Vmware Datastore Read Rate Rate of reading data from the datastore VIWebService Server
Vmware Datastore Read Requests Average number of read commands VIWebService Server
Vmware Datastore Read Requests Rate Average number of read commands VIWebService Server
Vmware Datastore Read Speed Rate of reading data from the VIWebService Server
datastore.
Vmware Datastore Throughput Usage The current bandwidth usage for the VIWebService Server
datastore or LUN.
Vmware Datastore Write IOPs Average number of write commands VIWebService Server
during the collection interval
Vmware Datastore Write Latency Average amount of time for a write VIWebService Server
operation to the datastore
Vmware Datastore Write Latency Average amount of time for a write VIWebService Server
operation to the datastore
Vmware Datastore Write Rate Rate of reading data to the datastore VIWebService Server
Page 157
Vmware Datastore Write Requests Average number of write commands VIWebService Server
Vmware Datastore Write Requests Rate Average number of write commands VIWebService Server
Vmware Datastore Write Speed Rate of reading data to the datastore. VIWebService Server
Vmware Disk Bus Resets Number of SCSI-bus reset commands VIWebService Server
issued during the collection interval.
Vmware Disk I/O Usage Aggregated diskI/O rate for HostSystem VIWebService Server
over VMs
Vmware Disk I/O Usage Aggregated disk I/O rate VIWebService Server
Vmware Disk Max Total Latency Highest latency value across all disks VIWebService Server
used by the host.
Vmware Disk Read Rate Rate at which data is read from each VIWebService Server
disk on the vm
Vmware Disk Read Requests Number of times data was read from VIWebService Server
each disk on the vm
Vmware Disk Read Speed Rate at which data is Read from each VIWebService Server
LUN on the host
Vmware Disk Reads Number of times data was read from VIWebService Server
each LUN on the host.
Vmware Disk Write Rate Rate at which data is written to each VIWebService Server
disk on the vm
Vmware Disk Write Requests Number of times data written to each VIWebService Server
disk on the vm
Vmware Disk Write Speed Rate at which data is written to each VIWebService Server
LUN on the host
Vmware Disk Writes Number of times data written to each VIWebService Server
LUN on the host
Vmware Dropped Received Packets Number of received packets dropped VIWebService Server
Vmware Dropped Transmitted Packets Number of transmitted packets VIWebService Server
dropped during the collection interval.
Vmware Memory Active Sum of all active metrics for all VIWebService Server
powered-on virtual machines plus
vSphere services
Vmware Memory Compression Rate Rate of memory compression for the VIWebService Server
VM
Vmware Memory Consumed Amount of machine memory used on VIWebService Server
the host
Vmware Memory Decompression Rate Rate of memory decompression for the VIWebService Server
virtual machine
Vmware Memory Granted Amount of Granted to Entities by VIWebService Server
HostSystem Page 158
Vmware Memory Overhead Total of all overhead metrics for VIWebService Server
powered-on virtual machines, the
overhead of running vSphere services
on the host.
Vmware Memory SwapIn Rate Rate at which memory is swapped from VIWebService Server
disk into active memory
Vmware Memory SwapOut Rate Rate at which memory is being VIWebService Server
swapped from active memory to disk
Vmware Memory Usage Percentage of available machine VIWebService Server
memory Used
Vmware Memory Usage Amount of machine memory used by VIWebService Server
the VMkernel to run the VM
Vmware Network Packets Received The number of packets received by VIWebService Server
each vNIC on the VM
Vmware Network Packets Transmitted Number of packets transmitted by each VIWebService Server
vNIC on the virtual machine
Vmware Network Received Packets Number of packets Received during the VIWebService Server
collection interval.
Vmware Network Received Rate The rate at which data is received VIWebService Server
across each physical NIC instance on
the host.
Vmware Network Received Rate The rate at which data is received VIWebService Server
across the VMs vNIC
Vmware Network Transmitted Packets Number of packets Transmitted during VIWebService Server
the collection interval.
Vmware Network Transmitted Rate The rate at which data is transmitted VIWebService Server
across each physical NIC instance on
the host.
Vmware Network Transmitted Rate The rate at which data is transmitted VIWebService Server
across the VMs vNIC
Vmware Network Usage Sum of data transmitted and received VIWebService Server
across all physical NIC instances
connected to the host.
Vmware Network Usage Sum of data transmitted and received VIWebService Server
across all vNIC instances connected to
the VM
Vmware Overhead Memory Amount of machine memory used by VIWebService Server
the VMkernel to run the VM
Vmware Shared Memory Sum of all shared metrics for all VIWebService Server
powered-on virtual machines, plus
amount for vSphere services on the
host.
Vmware Shared Memory Amount of guest physical memory VIWebService Server
shared with other VMs Page 159
Vmware Swapped Memory Current amount of guest physical VIWebService Server

memory swappedout to the VMs swap
file by the VMkernel.
Vmware Swapped Used Memory Amount of memory that is used by VIWebService Server
swap. Sum of memory swapped of all
powered on VMs and vSphere services
on the host.
Vmware Total Disk Latency Average amount of time taken to VIWebService Server
process a SCSI command issued
from/by the Guest OS to the VM
Vmware Total Disk Read Latency Average amount of time takento VIWebService Server
process a SCSI read command issued
from GuestOS to the VM
Vmware Total Disk Write Latency Average amount of time taken to VIWebService Server
process a SCSI read command issued
by GuestOS to the VM
YAMAHA NVR500_CPU Utilization (1 Min) Custom Monitor SNMP Switch
YAMAHA NVR500_CPU Utilization (5 Min) Custom Monitor SNMP Switch
YAMAHA NVR500_CPU Utilization (5 Sec) Custom Monitor SNMP Switch
YAMAHA NVR500_Memory Utilization Custom Monitor SNMP Switch
YAMAHA RTX1200_CPU Utlization (1 Min) Custom Monitor SNMP Router
YAMAHA RTX1200_CPU Utlization (5 Min) Custom Monitor SNMP Router
YAMAHA RTX1200_CPU Utlization (5 Sec) Custom Monitor SNMP Router
YAMAHA RTX1200_Inbox Temperature Custom Monitor SNMP Router
YAMAHA RTX1200_Memory Utlization Custom Monitor SNMP Router
YAMAHA RTX810_CPU Utilization (1 Min) Custom Monitor SNMP Router
YAMAHA RTX810_CPU Utilization (5 Min) Custom Monitor SNMP Router
YAMAHA RTX810_CPU Utilization (5 Sec) Custom Monitor SNMP Router
YAMAHA RTX810_Memory Utlization Custom Monitor SNMP Router
ZhongXing CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for ZhongXing SNMP Switch
ZhongXing Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for ZhongXing SNMP Switch
ZTE CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of ZTE-2850-26TM SNMP Switch
Switch
ZTE CPU Utilization CPU Utilization for ZTE SNMP Switch
Page 160
ZTE CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of ZTE-ZXPON-EPON- SNMP Switch
ONU Switch
ZTE CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of ZTE-ZXR10-2826E SNMP Switch
Switch
ZTE CPU Utilization Monitors the CPU of ZTE-ZXR10-2826S- SNMP Switch
LE Switch
ZTE Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of ZTE-2850-26TM SNMP Switch

Switch
ZTE Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of ZTE-ZXPON- SNMP Switch
C220 Switch
ZTE Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of ZTE-ZXR10- SNMP Switch
2826E Switch
ZTE Memory Utilization Monitors the Memory of ZTE-ZXR10- SNMP Switch
2826S-LE Switch
ZTE Memory Utilization Memory Utilization for ZTE SNMP Switch
Page 161
Adding WMI-based Custom Monitors
In addition to OpManager's default monitors, you can also create your own monitors for the WMI-enabled devices in your network.
1. Go to Device Snapshot page on which you wish to add a custom WMI monitor.
2. Click Monitors ? Performance Monitors ? Actions ? Add monitor.
3. Select the required WMI class, and OpManager will list the performance counters available under that class.
4. Along with the counter, you can also select the instance of the counter that you wish to monitor.
5. Once you've selected the counters and the instances, click Add to add the monitor to the device.
Page 162
Device-specific Monitors
The monitoring configuration may need alteration for specific devices. Doing a bulk-configuration using the device templates, applies
the same set of configurations for the devices of the same type. In order to change the configuration for specific devices, here are
the steps:

2. Click on Monitors > Performance Monitors
3. Click the Edit icon against the monitor name. The Edit Monitor page is displayed.
4. Change the values for the required parameters and and click Save.
The changes to the monitor are effected only for that device.
Page 163
Configuring thresholds for performance monitors
Configuring thresholds enable OpManager to proactively monitor the resources and the services running on the servers and network
devices, and raise alerts before they go down or reach the critical condition. OpManager offers multiple threshold levels namely:
Attention threshold - low severity

Trouble threshold - medium severity
Critical threshold - high severity
Rearm - to rearm the alert after it has been triggered
You can configure multiple thresholds for the monitors that are associated to a single device, and even configure them from a device
template in order to apply across multiple devices.
Configure threshold limits for performance monitors in an individual device

2. Click Monitors ? Performance Monitors ? click on the edit icon corresponding to the monitor for which you want to configure
threshold limits. Edit Monitor page opens.
3. Ensure that the monitoring Interval is configured.
4. Specify the unit for the monitored resource in terms of percentage, MB, KB etc (based on how the parameter is measured).
5. Select the condition [>,=, <, or !=] for Warning Threshold, Trouble Threshold & Error Threshold, and enter the value. Alert is raised
if the monitored value is greater than, equal to, not equal to, or lesser than (which ever is selected ) the threshold value.
Also, for = operator, you can provide multiple values using pipe '|' as the separator. Note that this is applicable only for thresholds
configured from Device Snapshot ? Monitors.
6. Enter the Rearm Value. Rearm is the value that determines when the monitor is reverted back to 'Normal' status.
Example: The Warning threshold condition for a memory monitor is selected as greater than [>] and the threshold value is
configured as 75. If the value of the monitor oscillates between 72, 80 and 73 for three successive polls, an alert is not raised
for the poll with value '80' but the admin might still wish to receive an alert for it.
To avoid this, you can set the Rearm value at a considerably wide interval (say 70 in this situation) to make sure the status
returns to 'Normal' only when the value goes below this threshold.
Note that if you set the thresholds' conditions using '>' criteria, then the rearm value can only be set using '<=' and vice versa.
7. In the Consecutive Times field enter the value of how many consecutive times the thresholds (Attention, Trouble and Critical) can
be violated to generate the alert.
8. Click on Save.
Configure threshold limits for multiple devices of same type using Device Template
1. Go to Settings ? Configuration ? Device Templates and select the template in which you want to configure the threshold.
2. Under Monitors column, all the monitors that are currently associated with the devices are listed. If you want add or remove
required monitors. Click on Edit Thresholds button. Edit Thresholds page opens.
3. Configure the Attention, Trouble, Critical Threshold and the Rearm Value and click on OK
4. Click on OK.
Configure from the Performance Monitors page:
1. Go to Settings ? Performance monitors and click the 'Edit' icon next to the monitor of your choice.
2. Change the threshold values as required and click 'Save'.
3. Once it's done, click the 'Associate' button next to the monitor to associate it to the necessary devices. Page 164
Monitoring TCP Services Page 165
OpManager provides out-of-the-box support for the following services: Web, HTTPS, FTP, IMAP, LDAP, Telnet , MySQL, MS-Exchange, SMTP, POP3, WebLogic,
Finger, Echo, DNS, and NTTP. By default, during discovery, OpManager scans the devices for the services: DNS, MSSQL, MySQL, Oracle, SMTP, Web. You can also
select other services in the list. When they are found running on their default ports, OpManager starts monitoring the services.
Scanning Services during Discovery
By default, OpManager scans each device on the network for the services that are chosen during discovery.
To modify this list, follow the steps given below:
Go to Settings > Monitoring > Service Monitors > Select the service and check "Scan during discovery"
OpManager allows you to change the settings for monitoring these services as per your network needs. You can configure new services that are not available
in the list. OpManager can manage services running on standard TCP ports.
Note:
The list contains the service names and the corresponding port numbers. To edit the settings of any of the available services, click on the service name.
If you do not find the service you want to manage in the list, you can add the service by clicking Add Service. (Adding a New Service).
Viewing Service Status and Response Time
Go to the Device Snapshot page > Monitors > Service Monitors > you will see the list of services managed in the device, if any, with their status and current
response time.
Click the service name to view the historical report on the response time and the availability chart of the service.
Configuring Alerts
By default OpManager raises an alarm if a service is down. If required you can configure OpManager to raise an alarm if the service is unavailable for an N
number of times consecutively.
Go to the Device Snapshot page > Monitors > Service Monitors > Click the edit icon against the service on which you wish to cofigure the threshold or to
modify the consecutive time.
Note: Threshold alert will be raised based on the response time of the service.
Page 166
Monitoring TCP Services on a Device
To select the services to be monitored in a device, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Inventory > Click on the Device for which you wish to add a service.
2. Click Monitors > Service Monitors > Add Monitor at the top of the page
3. Select the services to be discovered from the list and click Add Monitor.
4. If you wish to associate the monitor to existing devices, click on Save & Associate. This option will prompt you to select the
required devices to which the monitor must be associated
Select the required devices and click on Save.
5. If you wish to only add the monitor ( and not associate it to any of the existing devices ), click on Save.
You can also associate existing service monitors to devices.
1. Go to Inventory > Click on the Device for which you wish to associate a service monitor.
2. Click Monitors > Service Monitors > Associate Monitor at the top of the page
3. Select the services to be discovered from the list and click Associate.
Page 167
Adding New TCP Service Monitors
You can add new TCP services for monitoring.
1. Go to Settings > Monitoring > Service Monitors > Click Add.

2. Specify the name of the TCP service that you want to monitor.
3. Specify the TCP Port number that has to be checked for service availability
4. Specify the timeout interval in seconds for the port-check request.
5. Specify the consecutive time to generate an alarm if the service unavailable for N number of times
6. Select an option for Scan during Discovery. This will scan network devices for the monitored service during the discovery process
and will automatically associate the monitor to the device if the specified service is available.
Associating the Service to Devices
1. Go to Settings > Monitoring > Service Monitors > Associate

2. Select the required TCP service from the Service Monitors drop-down.
3. Select the devices on which you want to monitor the service from the column on the left and move them to the right.
4. Click Associate.
Dissociate Devices
1. Go to Settings > Monitoring > Service Monitors > Associate option.

2. Select the monitor from the Service Monitors drop-down menu.
3. Select the devices on which you do not want to monitor the service from the column on the right and move them to the left.
4. Click Associate.
You can also associate/dissociate service monitors to devices from the Quick Configuration Wizard. Go to Settings > Configuration >
Quick Configuration Wizard > Service Monitors and associate/dissociate services to devices as mentioned above.
Page 168
Monitoring Windows Services
Certain applications in Windows machine run in the background as services. OpManager discovers and monitors the status of such
services using WMI monitoring. OpManager generates alarms whenever they fail.
Monitoring Windows Services
Prerequisites
To monitor Windows services, OpManager should be installed in a Windows machine. OpManager uses WMI to monitor the Windows
services and hence you need to provide the log on details of a user with administrative privilege to connect to the device. So, make
sure you configure a WMI credential so that you can apply this to the windows devices.
Add Windows Services to a Device
To monitor a Windows service with OpManager's Windows service monitoring feature, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to the Inventory and click on the device to which you want to add a Windows Service monitor.
2. Confirm if the correct WMI credential is associated to the device. Else, configure the credential details in the device.
3. Click Monitors ? Windows Service Monitors. This option will be available only for devices being monitored using WMI.
4. Click Actions on the top-right corner and the click 'Add Monitor'.
5. Select the necessary Windows services and click on 'Add' to add those monitors to the device.
Note: The polling interval cannot be set at single monitor level. This value is same as the polling interval of the device.
Associate Windows Service Monitors to several devices
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Windows Services.

2. Click Associate next to the monitor you wish to associate to your devices.
3. In the following window, select all the devices you want to add the monitor to, move them to the 'Selected Devices' column on the
right and click 'Save'.
4. You can also do the same action from Settings ? Configuration ? Quick Configuration Wizard ? Service Monitors and selecting
the 'Associate a Windows Service' icon.
Configuring Alerts
By default OpManager raises an alarm if a Windows service is down. If required you can configure OpManager to raise an alarm if
the service unavailable for a N number of times consecutively.

2. Monitors ? Windows Service Monitors, click on the Edit icon corresponding to the Windows service for which you want to
configure the alert.
3. Modify the count entered for 'Generate alarm if unavailable for _ consecutive times'. For example if you enter the value as 2,
OpManager will raise alarm only if the service is unavailable for 2 consecutive polls.
4. You also have to option to either restart the service (automatically restart a service when the service is down) or restart the server
(automatically restart the server when a service is down). Select the check box and the appropriate radio button.
5. Click Save.
Page 169
Adding New Windows Service Monitors
In addition to the Windows service monitoring performance monitors supported by OpManager out-of-the-box, you can add monitors
for other windows services too.
To add a new Windows service monitor, follow the steps given below:
Adding Windows Service Monitors
1. Go to Settings > Monitoring ? Windows Services.

2. Click Add and select the device from the drop-down.
3. Type the domain administrator user name and password for the device (not required for the localhost) in the respective fields and
click Next.
4. A list of all the Windows Services available on that machine is displayed. From this select the services that you want be monitored
on the device.
5. Configure the consecutive time for alert.
6. Based on whether you want to restart the service (automatically restart a service when the service is down) or restart the server
(automatically restart the server when a service is down), select the corresponding option.
7. Click Save & Asssociate. You can choose the devices to which you want to associate this new Windows Service monitor.
8. Select the devices and click 'Save'. If you just wish to save the monitor and not associate it to any devices for now, you can just
leave the devices unselected and click 'Save'.
Associating Windows Services to Devices
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Windows Services ? Associate option.

2. Select the monitor from the Windows Service Monitors drop-down menu.
3. Select the devices to which you would like to associate this monitor and click on the right arrow to move these devices into the
Devices on which the service is monitored column.
4. To dissociate devices, select the devices in which you would not like to monitor the services and click on the left arrow. This will
move these devices to the Devices on which the service is not monitoredcolumn.
5. Click Associate.
Dissociate Devices
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Windows Services ? Associate option.

2. Select the monitor from the Windows Service Monitors drop-down menu.
3. Select the devices in which you would not like to monitor the services from the right-pane and click on the left arrow. This will
move these devices to the Devices on which the service is not monitored column.
4. Click Associate.
You can also associate/dissociate service monitors to devices from the Quick Configuration Wizard. Go to Settings ? Configuration ?
Quick Configuration Wizard ? Service Monitors and associate/dissociate services to devices as mentioned above.
Page 170
Monitoring Processes on Windows/Unix Servers & Desktops
OpManager provides out-of-the-box support for monitoring the availability of all the processes running on a Windows or Unix
system. Windows systems use WMI and Unix systems use CLI to monitor the processes that are running on a system. We also
support SNMP in the Server/ Desktop and Domain Controller categories.
Here are the steps for configuring a Process Monitor:

2. Ensure that you have associated the SNMP/WMI/CLI Credentials to the device.
3. Click Monitors ? Process Monitors.
4. Click Add Monitor, select the required Process Monitors and click Add at the bottom of the page to get these monitors associated
to the device.
Note: The polling interval cannot be set at single monitor level. This value is same as the polling interval of the device.
Configure Thresholds for Process Monitors
You can set resource thresholds for the Process Monitor. Once a resource (CPU/memory) utilization by a process exceeds the
configured threshold, an alert is triggered.
1. Click the Edit icon against the process name.

2. Configure the threshold values for CPU and Memory resources.
3. Configure the number of times you would like to allow threshold violation before being notified. For instance, if you configure the
value as 3, OpManager will notify you if the resource threshold is violated 3 consecutive times.
4. Configure the number of the process instances, exceeding which you would like to be notified. For instance, if you would like to be
notified if the number of Apache.exe instances on the monitored device exceeds 3, configure the value here as 3 and save the
changes.
Alerts are fired based on the above settings.
You can also view active processes on a device and process diagnostics against a system resource. We currently support active
processes for SNMP/WMI/CLI protocols.
Page 171
Viewing Active Processes
OpManager provides you the information on the processes that are currently running on the managed device. For this, OpManager
uses the protocol of the default credential of that device (SNMP / WMI / CLI).
To view the details, navigate to the Snapshot page of the device from the Inventory, and you can view all the processes that are
currently running on the device from the Active Processes tab.
Note:
When multiple types of credential profiles are associated, OpManager follows this priority to fetch the active processes: WMI
> CLI > SNMP
Example 1: If a device has both SNMP and WMI credentials associated to it, OpManager will first try to fetch the active
processes via WMI. If that fails, then the processes will be fetched via SNMP.
Example 2: If a device has bot SNMP and CLI credentials associated, OpManager will first try to fetch the processes via CLI
and then via SNMP.
Also, if you have enabled Custom Dials for your devices, you can view the top 10 processes of a device by clicking on the Process
Diagnostics icon on the top-right corner of the dial. From there, you can choose to end processes that are consuming a lot of
resources by simply clicking on the Kill Process (bin) icon. (Top 10 processes available only for CPU utilization and memory utilization
dials)
Adding New Process Template Page 172
Process templates helps you to select the processes that are running on a device, convert each of them into individual templates and apply all of them across
multiple devices. To add a new process template,
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Processes and click 'Add'.

2. Device Name: Select the device which runs the process(es) that needs to be converted into template(s).
3. Protocol: Select the relevant protocol to access the device.
4. Select the relevent credential from the drop-down by clicking on the Credential radio button or Click Associated username password to associate the
accociated credential.
5. Click Next. All the processes that are currently running on the device are listed along with their ID, Path and Arguments.
6. Select the required process(es).
7. Click Save button at the bottom of the page.
The selected processes are now added and available as templates under Settings ? Monitors ? Processes.
Associating Process Template to Multiple Devices Page 173
To associate a process template across multiple devices, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Processes

2. Click Associate.
3. Select the process template to be associated to multiple devices
4. From the listed devices, select and move the required devices to box seen on the right.
5. Click Associate
The selected process template is applied across multiple devices.

Associating Script Monitoring Templates Page 174
Script Monitoring templates help you create custom scripts to monitor custom parameters .
Follow the steps given below to add script templates
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Script Templates.

2. Click Associate
3. This will open a page to associate multiple devices to a specific template.
4. Select the required script from the drop-down.
5. Select the devices from left-side box and move it to the right box
6. Click Associate
You have successfully associated script template to multiple devices.

Page 175
Log File Monitoring
Every application prints status messages, error messages, and other critical information in its log. It is very tedious to skim through
all these bulky log files to understand application performance. To manage such mission critical applications in real time, monitoring
their log files is necessary. OpManager offers agent-based log file monitoring for real-time fault and performance management.
Log File Monitoring
How does log file monitoring work?
The log file monitoring agent installed in the end machine, monitors the log files continuously for the required string (It may even be
a regex). Once that string is printed, it immediately notifies the OpManager server, which in-turn raises an alarm based on the
polling interval specified for that file monitor.
Steps to add a log file monitor
Prerequisites:
Ensure that device in which you are about to install the agent has already been added in OpManager.
Download and install the log file monitoring agent in the device(s). You can do it in two ways:
From the OpManager UI: You can go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Agents and click on 'Download agent' to download the
file monitoring agent.
In case of multiple devices, you can remotely push the downloaded agent through your AD service, and OpManager
agent will get automatically installed on all selected devices.
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Files ? Add a New Template.

2. Enter a template name, and a path to the file.
3. Set the polling interval, so that the alarms can be raised.
4. Under File Contains row, enter the string to be searched. OpManager supports regular expressions as well. Note: All the special
characters should be preceded by a backslash.
5. Select 'Match Case' check box, if you want the search to be case-sensitive.
6. Enter the number of consecutive times of the log print for which you want to raise the alarm.
7. Save the template and associate it to a device.
8. Now map the agent to the device that you have added in OpManager (prerequisite).
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Agents. You can find the agent installed device listed.
2. Select the respective device in the Mapped Device column.
3. Click 'Confirm' to map the device.
You can also add a log file monitor from a particular device's snapshot page.
1. Go to the Device's Snapshot Page ? Monitors ? File Monitor ? Add New Monitor.
2. Follow the same steps as provided above to add the file monitor.
3. There is an additional option available here which allows you to test the file path to ensure that the file is available.
You have successfully created a log file monitor.

Note: Page 176
1. If the file monitoring interval is modified, the match string appeared in the current polling span (old monitoring interval) will be
ignored and hence the alert will not be generated. The alert will be raised as usual based on the new monitoring interval from next
poll.
For example:
Consider the file monitoring interval is 5 mins, starting at 10.00 AM.

Search string appears in the monitored log file at 10.02 AM (which will be raised as an alert at 10.05 AM).
File monitoring interval is modified as 10 mins at 10.03 AM.
In the above case, the agent will ignore the search string which appeared at 10.02 AM. It starts monitoring the log file afresh from
10.03 AM based on the new monitoring interval (10 mins).
2. Once a log file monitor is added and the agent is mapped to a device, a pointer will be set at the very end of that log file.
OpManager will only monitor strings that are input after this point, and ignores all instances of the same string that were present
before the monitor was mapped to the device.
Adding File Monitoring Template Page 177
You can now track changes on critical system and user files and be notified if a specific change occurs.
E.g. If you want to get notified about an increase in a file's size, you can configure an appropriate file monitoring template with a file
size monitor and apply the same to devices in which you want the files monitored.
Using file monitoring, you can monitor the following parameters on Windows/ WMI based devices:
File Content: Presence of a word/string or in a log file (Supports RegEx too)

File size: Monitor increase or decrease in the size of the file
Presence of a file: Check the availability of a file in the specified directory (to check if it has been moved, renamed, or deleted)
File age: Keep track of the age of a file and take actions based on its age
File modification: Get notified if a file has been modified
Steps to configure a file monitoring template
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Files.

2. Click New Template. Add New Template page opens.
3. Configure the following fields:
Template Name: Configure a name for the template.
File Path: Specify the path in which OpManager should locate the file.
Polling Interval: Configure the interval at which OpManager should monitor the file.
Description: Provide a brief, meaningful description for the template.
required devices to which the monitor must be associated. Select the required devices and click on Save.
5. If you wish to only add the monitor (and not associate it to any of the existing devices), click on Save.
Configuring Alerts for File Monitors

Configure the monitoring criteria based on which you want to be notified:
1. File Contains: To monitor if a word/string is being printed in a log file, you have to install OpManager's log file monitoring agent in
the end server/device where the application is running. Once you install the agent, it looks for the specified string in the said log
file. If the word/string is printed in the log file, OpManager raises an alert. If required, you can configure the agent to match the
case when searching for the word/string, and also to notify the admin if the alert is raised for a certain number of times.
Click here to know more on this type of monitor and the prerequisites to be satisfied for log file monitoring.
2. File Existence: OpManager looks for the file in the specified path and alerts based on the conditions specified. You can configure
to be notified if the file does not exist in the path specified, or be notified if the file exists, or you can choose not to monitor. Also,
you can choose the severity that you would like to assign to this alert. The notification can be triggered if the alert condition is met
for a predefined number of times. That is, OpManager alerts you if a particular file exists/ is unavailable in a path during two
consecutive polls.
3. File Size: Configure OpManager to alert you if the file size goes over, or comes below a specified size. Select the relevant threshold
for alerting. You can configure the size in terms of bytes, KB, MB, or GB, and you can also choose the severity that you would like to
assign to this alert. The alert can be triggered if the threshold is violated a specified number of times.
4. File Age: Similarly, you can configure OpManager to alert you based on the age of the file. For instance, you can be notified if a file
is over 20 days old.
5. File Modification: When a file is modified, the date on which the file is modified is updated. You can configure OpManager to
notify you whenever there is a change in the date modified. This option helps you keep track of any changes done in critical files.
Configuring alarms - available variables for alarm messages
Page 178
You can customise your alarm message generated when a provided criteria is violated, by using these alarm variables in the Alarm
Message Format field:
1. $MONITOR - Displays the name of the monitor. Can be used with all criteria types.
2. $CURRENTVALUE - Displays the latest polled value of the provided trigger criteria (File Contains/Age/Size). Can be used with all
criteria types EXCEPT File Existence and File Modification.
Note: The variable $CURRENTVALUE works differently for File Contains and File Age/Size. For File Contains criteria type the
provided search string is returned, whereas it returns the latest polled value for File Age/File Size criteria types.
3. $THRESHOLDVALUE - Displays the threshold value of the provided trigger criteria. Can be used with File Size and File Age criteria
types.
4. $UNITS - Displays the units of the trigger criteria. Can be used for File size and File Age criteria types.
Available units in File Size: bytes, KB, MB, GB

Available units in File Age: minutes, hours, days
5. $MODIFIEDTIME - Displays the latest Modified Time value of the file in the provided file path. Can be used with File Modification
criteria type.
Sample messages for each criteria type using alarm variables
Criteria type Supported alarm variables Sample alarm message with variables Generated alarm message
File contains $MONITOR - Monitor name File monitor $MONITOR contains the File monitor FileMonitor1
string $CURRENTVALUE contains the string test
$CURRENTVALUE - Search string
File $MONITOR - Monitor name File monitor $MONITOR exists File monitor FileMonitor2
Existence exists
(OR)
(OR)
File monitor $MONITOR does not exist
any more File monitor FileMonitor2
does not exist any more
File Size $MONITOR - Monitor name File size of the monitor $MONITOR is File size of the monitor
$CURRENTVALUE, violating the threshold FileMonitor3 is 2, violating
$THRESHOLDVALUE - Minimum size of $THRESHOLDVALUE $UNITS the threshold of 1 GB
of file required to trigger the alarm
(in bytes/KB/MB/GB)
$CURRENTVALUE - Current size of

the file in the path (in
bytes/KB/MB/GB)
$UNITS - Units provided for the

threshold value (bytes/KB/MB/GB)
File Age $MONITOR - Monitor name File age of the monitor $MONITOR is File age of the monitor
Page 179
$CURRENTVALUE, violating the threshold FileMonitor4 is 95, violating
$THRESHOLDVALUE - Minimum size of $THRESHOLDVALUE $UNITS the threshold of 90 mins
of file required to trigger the alarm
(in seconds/minutes/hours)
$CURRENTVALUE - Current size of

the file in the path (in
seconds/minutes/hours)
$UNITS -Units provided for the

threshold value
(seconds/minutes/hours)
File $MONITOR - Monitor name File monitor $MONITOR got modified at File monitor FileMonitor5
Modification $MODIFIEDTIME got modified at 8/13/2017
$MODIFIEDTIME - Latest value for 1:12:35 AM
Modified Time of the value
(MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM)
Associating the File monitor to devices

Having created a template with the alert criteria, you can now associate the template to the devices.
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Files.

2. Click Associate.
3. Select the required template from the drop-down.
4. Select the devices for which you want to apply this template and click on the right arrow to move them to the 'Selected devices'
list.
5. Click Associate button at the bottom of the tab to associate the template to all the selected devices.
The monitor is now added to the device and OpManager raises alerts based on the alert conditions provided by the user.
Page 180
Adding Folder Monitoring Template
Besides monitoring files on the systems, you can also monitor the folders.You can track changes in folders based on the folder size,
the number of files in a folder etc. Again, like file monitors, you can be notified if a specific change occurs. For instance, you might
want to be notified if the folder size increases beyond a defined limit, if some files in a folder are missing etc. Configure meaningful
templates in OpManager and apply them to devices on which you want the folders monitored. Monitor the following parameters on
folders:
Folder size: Watch for an increase or decrease in the file size

Existence of a file: Check the availability of a file in the specified directory (may have been moved, renamed, or deleted)
Folder Modification: Keep track of any file changes (add/remove/rename) in a folder.
File Name: Watch files in a folder by their name.
File Size/Age: Check the last modified file or all files in a folder for file size and age.
File count: Keep track of the number of files within a folder.
Steps to configure a file monitoring template

1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Folders.
2. Click New Template. Add New Template window opens.
3. Template Name: Configure a name for the template.
4. Folder Path: Specify the path in which OpManager should locate the file. You can either provide the local directory (C:) or UNC
share path (\servername\shareddirectory).
5. Polling Interval: Configure the interval at which OpManager should monitor the file.
6. Description: Provide a brief, meaningful description for the template.
.
Configuring Thresholds for Folder Monitors

Configure the monitoring criteria for Folder/File monitoring conditions based on which you want to be notified:
1. Folder Existence: OpManager looks for the folder in the specified path and alerts based on the conditions specified. You can
configure to be notified if the folder does not exist in the path specified, or be notified if the folder exists , or you can choose not
to monitor.
2. Folder Size: Configure OpManager to alert you if the folder size goes over, or comes below a specified size. Select the relevant
threshold for alerting. You can configure the size in terms of bytes, KB, MB, or GB. Configure the rearm accordingly to reset the
alarm.
3. Folder Modification: Select Alert if modified check box to receive alerts when files/sub-folders are added/deleted/renamed in the
specified folder.
4. File Filter: By default all the files in the specified folder are monitored. Deselect All files check box and enter the file name or
extension (*.pdf,*.txt) of the files alone you want to monitor. You can enter multiple values separated by comma, but no blank
space is allowed. You can enter the filename in the following formats:
Full file name with extension �stdout.doc,stdlog.txt�

File name with wild characters �*out� or �std*�. Files containing the same prefix or suffix name with same/different
extension will be monitored
File name in date format �2011062200001.txt�. Enter the file name in a static format $YYYY$MM$DD*.txt or $YYYY
$DD$MM*.txt
Page 181
5. File Name Contains: OpManager looks for the files in the specified folder and alerts based on the conditions specified. You can
configure to be notified if the folder does not contain any file in the specified name , or be notified if the folder contains files in
the specified name, or you can choose not to monitor.
6. File Size/Age: OpManager looks either last modified file or all files for file size and age. If the threshold condition for either file
size or file age is violated, an alarm is raised. Configure the relevant threshold and rearm conditions.
7. File Count: You can monitor the number of files specified in the File Filter and be alerted if the count changes, or of it violates a
count threshold. Configure the rearm accordingly to reset the alarm.
Configuring Alerts for Folder Monitors

Configure the following alerting options:
1. Severity: Choose the severity that you would like to assign to this alert.
2. Consecutive Times: Specify how many time the threshold can be violated to generate the alert
3. Alarm Message Format: Configure the alarm message. You can include the alarm variables by appending $ to the variable name.
Associating the Folder monitor to devices

Having created a template with the alert criteria, you can now associate the template to the devices.
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Folders.

2. Click Associate
3. Selecte the required Template from the drop-down
4. Select the devices for which you want to apply this template and move them to the right.
5. Click on Associate button at the bottom of the column to associate the template to all the selected devices.
The monitor is added to the device and OpManager alerts based on the alert conditions configured.
Page 182
Active Directory Monitoring
Active directory monitoring feature takes OpManager a step further in proactive monitoring of Windows environment. The system
resources of the Domain Controllers where the Active Directory (AD) database resides, and few critical Active Directory Services are
monitored in OpManager.
To make AD monitoring more simple and easily accessible, The Domain Controllers are classified under a separate category under
Infrastructure Views. The categorization of the device as a Domain Controller is done automatically if SNMP is enabled. The system
resources of the device and the AD services are monitored using WMI.
The snapshot page of the Domain Controller shows the dial graphs for Availability, Packet Loss and Response Time. In addition to
this, there are also provisions to monitor CPU, Disc and Memory utilization.
The other utilization data displayed in the snapshot page for the Domain Controller are:
Resource Utilization by LSASS ( Local Security Authority Subsystem Service)

Resource Utilization by NTFRS (NT File Replication Service)
Ad Store Utilization
Performance Counters showing information such as the AD Reads, the AD Replication objects etc
Besides these, following are the AD Services monitors associated by default:
Windows Time service : The service synchronizes the time between domain controllers, which prevents time skews from
occurring.
DNS Client Service : This service resolves and caches (Domain Name Server) DNS names.
File Replication Service : This service maintains file synchronization of file directory contents among multiple servers.
Intersite Messaging Service : This service is used for mail-based replication between sites. Active Directory includes support for
replication between sites by using SMTP over IP transport.
Kerberos Key Distribution Center Service : This service enables users to log on to the network using the Kerberos version 5
authentication protocol.
Page
Security Accounts Manager Service : This service signals other services that the Security Accounts Manager subsystem 183
is ready
to accept requests.
Server Service : This service enables the computer to connect to other computers on the network based on the SMB protocol.
Workstation Service : This service provides network connections and communications.
Remote Procedure Call (RPC) Service : This service provides the name services for RPC clients.
Net Logon Service : This service supports pass-through authentication of account logon events for computers in a domain.
You can add more AD Monitors to be monitored by clicking the Add Monitor button.
Page 184
Exchange Server Monitoring
You can monitor critical MSExchange (2000/2003/2010/2013/2016/2019) Services and parameters using OpManager's exchange
monitoring feature. Monitoring is done using WMI. Thresholds are pre-configured for critical services. You can also modify or enable
thresholds for other services and parameters.
The services monitored are:
Information Store
Site Replication Store
MTA Stacks
Exchange Management
SMTP
POP3
IMAP4
System Attendant
Routing Engine
Event Service
The Exchange parameters that are monitored can be classified under the following categories:
Address List Monitors

POP3 and IMAP Monitors
Information Store Public Folder Monitors
Event Service Monitors
SMTP Monitors
Information Store Mailbox Monitors
Message Transfer Agent Monitors
Directory Service Monitors
Information Store Monitors
Configuring Exchange Parameters and Services Monitoring
1. Go to the snapshot page of a device that has Exchange running.

2. Click Monitors > Performance Monitors > Add Exchange Monitor
3. Select the Exchange Server version. The monitors of all the Exchange parameters and services are displayed.
4. From this list, select the required Monitors and Click Add to associate it to the Server.
These monitors are associated to the device. Ensure to associate the correct WMI credential to the device. OpManager uses these
credentials to connect to the device using WMI.
Page 185
Monitoring MSSQL Parameters
MSSQL Services and Parameters can be monitored using WMI. OpManager detects the SQL servers by itself and MSSQL related
resource metrics are added automatically.
Here are the steps to manually associate the MSSQL monitors to a device :
1. Go to the snapshot page of a device that has MSSQL running.
2. Click on Monitors > Performance Monitors > Add MSSQL Monitor
3. The monitors of all the MSSQL parameters are displayed.
4. From this list, select the required MSSQL Monitors and click Add to associate it to the Server.
These monitors are associated to the device. Ensure to associate the correct WMI credential to the device. OpManager uses these
credentials to connect to the device using WMI.
Monitoring Windows Event Logs Page 186
The Event Log is a Windows service that logs about program, security, and system events occurring in Windows devices. The events can be related to
some application, system or security. You can monitor these events using OpManager and configure to generate alarms when critical events are
logged. OpManager uses WMI to fetch the details of these logs and hence you need to provide the log on details of a user with administrative
privilege to connect to the Windows machine.
You can view the list of all events monitored by OpManager, Go to Settings > Monitoring > Event Log Rules
Monitoring Windows Events in a Device

Creating an Event Log Monitor
Monitoring Custom Event Logs
Monitoring Windows Events in a Device

To monitor Windows events, you need to associate the event log monitors with the device. To do so, follow the steps given below:

2. Click Monitors > EventLog Monitors > Add Monitor.
3. Select the event logs to be monitored in the device.
4. Click Associate to add the selected monitors to the device.
Note: The Monitoring Interval checkbox must be enabled. If disabled, all the event log monitors associated with the device will be disabled and
they will not work although they are associated to the device.
Creating an Event Log Monitor

To create an event log monitor, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Settings > Monitoring > Event Log Rules

In this page, you can see the rules supported by OpManager. They are categorized into Applications, Security, System, DNS Server, File Replication
Service, and Directory Service. You can add the event logs that you want to monitor under any of these categories.
2. Click Add New Rule under any one of the categories to add a rule.
Entries to all the fields except Rule Name are optional. Event ID is a required field to identify the event but can be left empty in few exceptional
cases, such as you want to monitor all events that are of the Event Types, say, error or information. Here the filter will be based on the Event Type.
1. Select the Log File Name.
2. Type a unique Rule Name.
3. Enter the Event ID to be monitored. This is the unique identifier for the event logs.
4. Enter the event Source. This is the name of the software that logs the event.
5. Enter the event Category. Each event source defines its own categories such as data write error, date read error and so on and will fall under
one of these categories.
6. Type the User name to filter the event log based on the user who has logged on when the event occurred.
7. Choose the Event Types to filter the event logs based on its type. This will typically be one among Error, Warning, Information, Security audit
success and Security audit failure.
8. Description Match Text : Enter the string to be compared with the log message. This will filter the events that contains this string in the log
message.
9. Generate Alarm if event is raised : By default OpManager raises an alarm if the event occurs. However, you can configure the no. of
consecutive times the event can occur within the specified no. of seconds, to raise an alarm.
10. Choose a severity for the alarm generated in OpManager for this event.
3. Click OK to save the event log rule.
Monitoring Custom Event Logs

You can monitor event logs under a custom category too. Some applications log the events in a new category other than the default
System/Applications/Security category. You can now configure rules in OpManager to parse the events in such custom categories andPage
trigger 187
corresponding alerts in OpManager. Here are the steps:
1. Go to Settings > Monitoring > Event Log Rules

2. Click Add Custom Event log
3. Select a device from the drop-down on which you can query for the event categories.
4. Provide the WMI details User Name and Password of the device.
5. List logs that were created in last Configure the time to list the logs and Click Query Device
6. The custom logs in the selected device are listed. Select a log from Discovered Log Files and click OK
You can now associate the rules (default or custom event logs) to the required devices.
Page 188
Associating URL Monitors to Desktop, Servers and Domain Controllers
You can add URL monitors to Desktop/Servers/Domain Controllers to check the availability of local URLs.

2. Click Monitors ? URL Monitors.
3. Click the Actions button and select 'Add monitor'.
4. Configure all the values for the URL Monitor and Click 'Save'.
The configured URL is monitored for availability. You can configure to receive an e-mail or SMS when the URL monitored in a device
goes down. For this, you can create a notification profile for the 'URL is down' criteria and associate it to the devices.
Page 189
Adding Syslog Rules
Syslog is a client/server protocol that sends event notification messages to the syslog receiver. These event notification messages
(usually called as syslog messages) help in identifying the authorized and unauthorized activities like installing software, accessing
files, illegal logins etc. that take place in the network. In OpManager Syslog rules helps in notifying you if some particular syslog
messages such as kernel messages, system daemons, user level messages etc. are sent by the devices.
Apart from the pre-defined syslog rules you can also add any number of syslog rules. Here are the steps to add a syslog rule:
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Syslogs.

2. Click on Add New. Add Syslog Rules page opens.
3. Enter a unique Rule Name.
4. Enter a brief Description about the rule.
5. Select a Facility. Facility refers to the application or the OS that generates the syslog message. By default "Any" is selected.
6. Select the required Severity.
7. Match Text : Enter the text that needs to be verified for matching. Note: Regex is supported for this field.
8. Select the Alarm Severity.
9. Enter the Alarm Message.
Page 190
10. Click the Advanced button to configure advanced (threshold) rules. This is optional.
1. Number of Occurrences: Enter the count of the number of consecutive times OpManager can receive syslog message from a
device before raising an alert.
2. Time Interval (seconds): Enter the time interval that should be considered for calculating the number of occurrences.
To clear or rearm the event:

3. Select the Facility Name.
4. Select the Severity.
5. Enter the Matching Text.
6. Click Save.
Configuring Syslog Ports Page 191
OpManager receives the syslog packets via the default syslog port 514. However, if required you can configure additional ports in OpManager to
receive the syslog packets. To configure additional ports, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Syslog Rules.

2. Click on the Syslog Port.
3. Enter the port number(s) separated by a comma.
4. Click Save.
Page 192
Monitoring Syslog Packets
Syslog viewer allows you to ensure whether OpManager receives the syslog packets sent by the devices. Here are the steps to view
the list of the devices that send the syslog packets:
1. From Settings tab, click Tools ? Syslog Viewer.

2. Click on the Start button to start listening to the Syslog packets.
The syslog packets sent by the devices to OpManager are listed. You can also filter the syslog packets by device and port.
Filtering Syslog packets
Enter the device's IP address in the Source field.

(OR)
Enter the port number via which OpManager receives the syslog packets.
Page 193
Viewing Syslog Flow Rate
To view the flow rate of the syslog packets,
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Syslog Rules and click on 'Flow Rate'

2. Click on the Flow Rate tab to view the Syslog flow rate.
The flow rate of the Syslog packets are displayed in packets/sec.

Page 194
Hardware Health Monitoring
Monitor the hardware health of key device parameters such as temperature, voltage, power, fan speed, status of processors, disk
arrays, etc. of VMware, HP, Dell, Cisco, Nexus & Checkpoint Firewall systems and get alerted if they violate pre-defined thresholds.
To enable hardware monitoring, go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Monitor Settings ? Hardware. Select 'Enable' next to the
Hardware Monitoring field and click 'Save'.
You can also enable hardware monitoring for individual devices from their Device Snapshot page by clicking on the Enable
option for Hardware Monitoring under the Summary tab.
Before you start monitoring the hardware of your network device(s), ensure that it satisfies OpManager's prerequisites for hardware
monitoring.
Collecting Hardware Health Data:

OpManager uses SNMP to monitor and collect the hardware health status of servers, routers & switches. In-case of VMware, the
vSphere API is used to collect sensor data. The hardware health monitors are associated automatically whenever you add a device
with proper SNMP credential. If you encounter any problem associating the hardware health monitors, then check for the correct
SNMP credentials or contact our support team.
Reporting of Hardware Health:

OpManager provides historical reports on the status of hardware health which can be scheduled based on user needs.
Suppress Hardware alarms at device level:

OpManager allows you to suppress hardware alarms for individual devices. Just go to the Hardware tab in the device snapshot page
of the corresponding device, and click on Suppress Hardware Alarms to turn off the hardware alarms for that particular device.
Customize the hardware health monitoring interval at device level:

You can customize the hardware health monitoring interval for each device from the corresponding device snapshot page. To
change the hardware monitoring interval for a particular device, go to the Hardware tab in the device snapshot page and edit the
value for the Interval option.
Page 195
Prerequisites for Hardware Monitoring
It is essential to monitor the hardware components of various critical devices in your network to ensure continuous service
availability and network uptime. OpManager, the advanced hardware monitor solution, supports monitoring the hardware status of
the servers and network devices in your environment from vendors such as Cisco, Juniper, HP and Dell. It monitors various important
hardware parameters such as voltage, temperature, power, fan speed, processors, etc., via SNMP for your network and server devices
and via vSphere for VMware ESX/ ESXi hosts. OpManager offers in-depth server and hardware monitor functionality for your network.
Prerequisites for HP/Dell Servers:
HP:
If Hardware Sensor Monitors are not displayed, then please make sure that these tools are installed on that server:
HP Insight Server Agents

HP Insight Foundation Agents
HP Insight Storage Agents
Dell:
If Hardware Sensor Monitors are not displayed, then please make sure that Dell OpenManage has been installed on that server.
Where are the hardware tabs?

If you find the hardware tabs missing, follow the below steps:
1. If the device is a VMware ESX/ESXi host:

OpManager uses the methods hardwareStatusInfo and numericSensorInfo from VMware API to poll the hardware status and stats
of devices in the VMware environment. To make sure hardware monitoring works properly, check whether sensor information are
available on MOB by using the following MOB link:
In case of ESX discovery:
For numericSensorInfo:
https://<<hostname/IPAddress>>/mob/?moid=ha-host&doPath=runtime.healthSystemRuntime.systemHealthInfo.nu
mericSensorInfo
For hardwareStatusInfo (cpuStatusInfo / memoryStatusInfo / storageStatusInfo):
https://<<hostname/IPAddress>>/mob/?moid=ha-host&doPath=runtime.healthSystemRuntime.hardwareStatusInfo
In case of vCenter discovery:
https://<<vcentrename/IPAdress>>/mob/?
After logging into the MOB, navigate to the paths given below and check if values are being populated for both the methods:
For numericSensorInfo: content ? rootFolder ? childEntity ? hostFolder ? childEntity [select appropriate host] ? host ?
runtime ? healthSystemRuntime ? systemHealthInfo ? numericSensorInfo
For hardwareStatusInfo: content ? rootFolder ? childEntity ? hostFolder ? childEntity [select appropriate host] ? host ?
runtime ? healthSystemRuntime ? hardwareStatusInfo ? cpuStatusInfo (or) memoryStatusInfo (or) storageStatusInfo
Page 196
Note that OpManager raises alerts based on the colour value available (alerts are raised if the colour is anything other than
"green").
If the sensors are not available, install VMware tools on that host.
2. If the device is HP/Dell/Cisco/Juniper:

Query the below OIDs and check if it responds for all the OIDs if it responds then rediscover the device. If it is not responding, then
OpManager won't show the tabs.
HP:
OID Parameter
.1.3.6.1.4.1.232.11.2.2.1.0 Operating System
.1.3.6.1.4.1.232.11.2.2.2.0 OS Version
.1.3.6.1.4.1.232.2.2.4.2.0 Model
.1.3.6.1.4.1.232.2.2.2.6.0 Service tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.232.2.2.2.1.0 Serial number
Dell:
OID Parameter
.1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.300.10.1.8.1 Manufacturer
.1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.300.10.1.9.1 Model
.1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.300.10.1.11.1 Service Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.400.10.1.6.1 Operating System
.1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.400.10.1.7.1 OS Version
Cisco:
OID Parameter
.1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1.13.1 Hardware Model
.1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1.11.1 Serial Number
Juniper:
OID Parameter
.1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.2.0 Model
.1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.3.0 Serial Number
3. Check whether Hardware monitoring is enabled under Settings ? Monitoring ? Monitor Settings ? Hardware.
4. Check if Hardware monitoring is enabled for the individual devices in the Device snapshot ? Hardware tab.
5. Suppress Hardware Alarms:
Page 197
a. Check if the hardware alarms for the respective devices have been suppressed in OpManager.
b. To suppress all the Hardware Alarms for all devices: Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Monitor Settings ? Hardware tab and click on
Suppress Alarms under Hardware section.
c. You can also go to the Hardware tab in the Device Snapshot page and suppress the hardware alarm for a particular device.
6. Check if Hardware status is not updated:

For OpManager to monitor the hardware of your devices, check if the following OIDs are responding properly.
For Cisco devices:
Supported MIBs: Cisco-envmon-mib | ENTITY-MIB MIB

(All Cisco devices that use these MIBs can be monitored using OpManager)
.1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1.13.1 - HW_MODEL
.1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1.11.1 - HW Serial num
Metric type OID of corresponding metric OID of corresponding metric OID of corresponding metric
name status value
Temperature .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.3.1.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.3.1.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.3.1.6
(TemperatureStatusDescr) (TemperatureStatusValue) (TemperatureState)
Voltage .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.2.1.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.2.1.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.2.1.7
(VoltageStatusDescr) (VoltageStatusValue) (VoltageState)
Fan .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.4.1.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.4.1.3 NA
(FanStatusDescr) (FanState)
Power .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.5.1.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.13.1.5.1.3 NA
(SupplyStatusDescr) (SupplyState)
For Cisco Nexus devices:
Supported MIB: CISCO-ENTITY-FRU-CONTROL-MIB

(All Cisco Nexus devices that use this MIB can be monitored using OpManager)
Metric type OID

Power .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.117.1.1.2.1.1
{FRUPowerAdminStatus)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.117.1.1.2.1.2
(FRUPowerOperStatus)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.117.1.1.2.1.3
(FRUCurrent)
Fan .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.117.1.4.1.1.1
(FanTrayOperStatus)
For Checkpoint devices:
Supported MIBs: CHECKPOINT-MIB

(All Checkpoint devices that use these MIBs can be monitored using OpManager)
name status value Page 198
Voltage .1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.3.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.3.1.6 .1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.3.1.3

(voltageSensorName) (voltageSensorStatus) (voltageSensorValue)
Fan .1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.2.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.2.1.6 1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.2.1.3
(fanSpeedSensorName ) (fanSpeedSensorStatus) (fanSpeedSensorValue)
Temperature .1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.1.1.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.1.1.6 1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.6.7.8.1.1.3

(tempertureSensorName) (tempertureSensorStatus ) (tempertureSensorValue)
For HP servers:
Supported MIBs: CPQHOST-Mib | CPQHLTH-Mib | CPQSINFO-Mib

(All HP servers that use these MIBs can be monitored using OpManager)
name status value
Temperature .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.6.8.1.8 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.6.8.1.6 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.6.8.1.4
(TemperatureHwLocation)
(or)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.6.8.1.3
(TemperatureLocale)
Fan .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.6.7.1.11 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.6.7.1.9 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.6.7.1.12
(FanHwLocation) (FanCondition) (FanCurrentSpeed)
(or)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.6.7.1.3
(FanLocale)
Processors .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.1.2.2.1.1.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.1.2.2.1.1.6 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.1.2.2.1.1.4
(CpuName) CpuStatus) (CpuSpeed)
Power .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.9.3.1.11 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.9.3.1.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.9.3.1.8
(PowerSupplySerialNumber) (PowerSupplyCondition) (PowerSupplyCapacityMaximum)
Partition details .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.11.2.4.1.1.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.11.2.4.1.1.8 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.11.2.4.1.1.5
(FileSysDesc) (FileSysStatus) FileSysPercentSpaceUsed)
Memory .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.14.12.1.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.14.12.1.11 .1.3.6.1.4.1.232.6.2.14.12.1.9
(BoardCpuNum) (BoardCondition) (BoardOsMemSize)
For Dell servers:
Supported MIBs: DELL-RAC-Mib | StorageManagement-MIB.mib | MIB-Dell-10892.mib

(All Dell servers that use these MIBs can be monitored using OpManager)
name status value
Temperature .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.700.20.1.8 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.700.20.1.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.700.20.1.6
(ProbeLocationName) (ProbeStatus) (ProbeReading)
Fan .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.700.12.1.8 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.700.12.1.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.700.12.1.6
(DeviceLocationName) (DeviceStatus) (DeviceReading)
Processors .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.1100.30.1. .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.1100.30.1. .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.1100.30.1.1
23 5 1 Page 199
(DeviceBrandName) (DeviceStatus) (DeviceMaximumSpeed)
Power .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.60.1.6 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.60.1.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.60.1.9
(EntityName) (Status) (PeakWatts)
Voltage .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.20.1.8 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.20.1.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.20.1.6
(ProbeLocationName) (ProbeStatus) (ProbeReading)
Disk Array Data .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10893.1.20.130.4.1. .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10893.1.20.130.4.1. .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10893.1.20.130.4.1.
2 4 17
(arrayDiskName) (arrayDiskStatus) (arrayDiskUsedSpaceInMB)
Battery .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.50.1.7 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.50.1.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10892.1.600.50.1.4
(LocationName) (Status) (StateSettings)
For Juniper devices:
Supported MIB: JUNIPER-MIB

(All Juniper devices that use these MIBs can be monitored using OpManager)
For Juniper devices, performing a walk on the OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.15.1.6 gives us a list of all hardware components or
'Field-Replaceable Units' (FRUs) present in the Juniper device(s). OpManager primarily monitors Power, Temperature and
Fan speed, and these are the responses for the corresponding FRU types:
Temperature - 6 | Power - 7 | Fan - 13
The instances that respond with these values are noted, and the suffix for the instance can be used to obtain data for that
FRU.
For example, consider an SNMP walk being performed on a Juniper device, on the FruType OID (1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.15.1.6)
and it returns the following response:
1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.15.1.6.A ? 13
1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.15.1.6.B ? 6
1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.15.1.6.C ? 7
1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.15.1.6.D ? 2
1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.15.1.6.E ? 6
Note: The values of A, B, C, D, E can be anywhere from one to four octets, i.e, they can have the value of 'z', 'z.y', 'z.y.x'
or 'z.y.x.w'.
Now we take the instances that returned 6 (or) 7 (or) 13 as the response, and we note down their instance IDs. Here, A, B, C
and E are the instances that provided the required responses. Therefore, these are the instances that OpManager should
be able to query to perform hardware monitoring on that device.
Now that we know the instance IDs, we can use them to check if we can query the required parameters from that instance.
OpManager queries the name, status and value of each instance. So, if you want to perform hardware monitoring on the
gives Juniper device, the following OIDs must respond when queried:
Response Metric Type Instance ID OID of corresponding OID of corresponding OID of corresponding
for FruType metric identifier metric status Page
metric value200
(OperatingDescr) (OperatingState) (OperatingTemp)
6 Temperature B .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13.1. .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13. .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13.
5.B 1.6.B 1.7.B
6 Temperature E .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13.1. .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13. .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13.
5.E 1.6.E 1.7.E
7 Power C .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13.1. .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13. NA
5.C 1.6.C
13 Fan A .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13.1. .1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.3.1.13. NA
5.A 1.6.A
Note:
The following are the Hardware sensor status responses for devices from various supported vendors (N/A for VMware Hosts):
HP: 1 - Unknown | 2 - Clear | 3 - Trouble | 4 - Critical
Dell: 1 - Unknown | 2 - Unknown | 3 - Clear | 4 - Trouble | 5 - Critical | 6 - Service Down
Cisco: 1 - Clear | 2 - Trouble | 3 - Critical | 4 - Service Down | 5 - Unknown | 6 - Unknown
Cisco Nexus: 2 - Clear | 3 - Critical | 4 - Trouble (Any other response is considered as 'Unknown')
Checkpoint: 1 - Clear | 2 - Trouble | 3 - Critical | 4 - Service Down | 5 - Unknown | 6 - Unknown
Juniper: 1 - Unknown | 2 - Clear | 3 - Clear | 4 - Clear | 5 - Clear | 6 - Critical | 7 - Attention
7. Check if SNMP is installed:

It is mandatory that SNMP is enabled in the corresponding devices, since OpManager primarily uses SNMP to query device status
and metrics. To install SNMP agent in a Linux device, follow this steps.
Page 201
VoIP Monitoring with OpManager
OpManager allows you to manage your VoIP links effectively using the VoIP monitoring add-on. It combines the functionalities of fault
and performance management with the Quality of Service monitoring through Cisco's IPSLA technology to give you a comprehensive
view of your VoIP connections. Click on the links below to know more on this topic:
Adding a new VoIP monitor

Configuring VoIP monitor template
Viewing top 10 call paths
Learn more about VoIP monitoring in OpManager.

Page 202
VMware monitoring with OpManager
OpManager provides intensive, agentless virtual device monitoring to enable effortless performance management of your VMware
devices. With proactive VMware monitoring and extensive reporting, make sure that your virtual devices are constantly running at
peak performance. Also, set thresholds for critical parameters in your network and get notified when they cross the set values.
Click on any of these topics to browse through the help documents:
About VMware monitoring

Discovering VMware servers
Monitoring VMware performance
Configuring Thresholds for VMware Host and VMs
Managing VMware Alerts
Notifying VMware Alerts
Page 203
HyperV Monitoring
OpManager provides support to monitor the HyperV servers in your network, and also its hosts. OpManager provides a dedicated
snapshot page to comprehensively monitor your HyperV server stats such as Health, Inventory, Performance and other critical
metrics.
Click on any of these links to navigate to the help document:
About Hyper-V Monitoring

Discovering Hyper-V Server
Configuring Thresholds for Hyper-V Host and VMs
Managing Hyper-V Alerts
Notifying Hyper-V Alerts
Page 204
WAN monitoring with OpManager
WAN links are an important part of any corporate network, and it's really important that they are constantly monitored for any
changes in performance such as improper connectivity or outage issues. Using OpManager, you can manage and monitor your WAN
links and detect issues before they even affect your network. Also, visualize the entirety of your WAN network, and keep an eye on
critical performance metrics to ensure peak performance.
Adding a new WAN monitor

Configuring WAN monitor template
Viewing WAN Monitor alerts
Page 205
Monitoring CIS-hardened devices
A CIS-hardened device goes a long way in improving overall security in your network. CIS hardening corresponds to tightening of
security in the software component, based on the benchmarks provided by CIS (Center for Internet Security). It can mean anything
from disabling unused ports and services to restricting visitor access to a system.
Monitoring CIS-enabled devices require special permissions to be provided to the network monitoring software. Please follow the
steps below to enable monitoring of CIS-hardened devices in OpManager:
1. Monitoring availability via ICMP

2. Monitoring via SNMP
3. Monitoring via WMI
3.1 Enable WMI traffic, DCOM, WMI, callback sink and outgoing connections in Firewall.
3.2 Allow remote WMI access with restricted permissions
3.3 Set permissions to Service Control Manager Security for Windows Service Monitoring
1. Monitoring availability via ICMP

To monitor device availability via ICMP, we first have to enable access for ICMP v4 protocols in our firewall. Below are the steps to
enable ICMP in the monitored device:
1. From the monitored device, open Command Prompt in Administrator mode.

2. If you want to enable firewall access for OpManager server, please execute the command below, replacing <OpManager_IP> with
OpManager server's IP.
netsh advfirewall firewall add rule name="OPM_ICMP_RULE" dir=in action=allow enable=yes protocol=ICMPv4
remoteip=<OpManager_IP>
2. Monitoring via SNMP

To monitor your devices through SNMP, we just have to configure SNMP service on all your network devices. Know more here on how
to enable and configure SNMP in your network devices.
3. Monitoring via WMI
3.1 To enable WMI traffic, DCOM, WMI, callback sink and outgoing connections in Firewall.
To monitor hardened devices using WMI, a few connections/protocols have to be enabled for OpManager to be able to reach the
device, the foremost of which would be to allow OpManager's traffic (both inward and outward) through your firewall. By default,
WMI settings in Windows Firewall settings are configured to enable only WMI connections, rather than allowing other DCOM
applications too. We must add an exception in the firewall for WMI, that allows the remote device to receive remote connection
requests and asynchronous callbacks to Unsecapp.exe. To enable the necessary connections in your firewall, execute the below
commands one by one in the monitored device, depending on your requirements.
1. To establish a firewall exception for DCOM port 135, use the following command:
Firewall access for OpManager server:
netsh advfirewall firewall add rule dir=in name="OPM_DCOM_CIS"

program=%systemroot%\system32\svchost.exe service=rpcss action=allow protocol=TCP localport=135
remoteip=<OpManager_server_IP>
2. To establish a firewall exception for the WMI service, use the following command:
Page 206
netsh advfirewall firewall add rule dir=in name ="OPM_WMI_CIS"

program=%systemroot%\system32\svchost.exe service=winmgmt action = allow protocol=TCP localport=any
3. To establish a firewall exception for the sink that receives callbacks from a remote computer, use the following command:
netsh advfirewall firewall add rule dir=in name ="OPM_UnsecApp_CIS"

program=%systemroot%\system32\wbem\unsecapp.exe action=allow remoteip=<OpManager_server_IP>
4. To establish a firewall exception for outgoing connections to a remote computer that the local computer is communicating
with asynchronously, use the following command:
netsh advfirewall firewall add rule dir=out name ="OPM_WMI_OUT_CIS"

program=%systemroot%\system32\svchost.exe service=winmgmt action=allow protocol=TCP localport=any
3.2 Allow remote WMI access with restricted permissions:

You can configure a regular Windows user to access WMI information by adding the necessary user account to the Distributed
COM Users and the Performance Monitor Users group using lusrmgr.msc, and then configuring the DCOM security settings to
allow the groups to access the system remotely (using dcomcnfg).
Note: These configurations are required to be performed in the User profiles of the client devices that are to be monitored.
Configuring Distributed COM Users in Local user and Groups Setting:
To begin with, we are adding the DCOM user group in our local user settings.
1. Click Start ? Run, type lusrmgr.msc and click OK.

2. In the Users folder, right-click the user to bring up the menu, and select Properties.
3. Click over to the Members of tab, and click Add.
4. Under 'Enter the object names to select', type 'Distributed COM Users' (without quotes), click Check Names, then click OK.
5. Click Add.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 for the Performance Monitor Users group and Event Log Readers group.
Configuring the DCOM Security Settings to allow the groups to access the system remotely:
Next, we're providing basic access permissions to the user groups (Distributed COM Users and Performance Monitor Users) to
be able to gain control of the device remotely.
7. Click Start ? Run, type dcomcnfg and click OK.

8. Drill down into the Component Services tree until you get to My Computer. Right-click 'My Computer' to bring up the
menu, and click Properties.
9. Click the COM Security tab, then click Edit Limits under the Launch and Activation Permissions section.
Page 207
10. Click Add.
12. Click Add.
13. Repeat steps 9-12 for the Performance Monitor Users group.
14. Check Allow for each of the permissions (Local Launch, Remote Launch, Local Activation, Remote Activation) for each of
these groups, and click OK.
Setting the WMI Control security settings to be applied to all namespaces:
Finally, access is provided for all classes under all namespaces for both the user groups, in order to enable OpManager to fetch
those data using WMI.
15. Click Start ? Run, type wmimgmt.msc and click OK.

16. Right-click WMI Control (Local) to bring up the menu, and click Properties.
17. Click over to the Security tab, then click Root, and click the Security button.
18. Click Add.
20. Make sure the Distributed COM Users group is selected, and click Advanced.
21. Highlight the row with Distributed COM Users in it and click Edit.
22. From the 'Applies to' drop-down list, select 'This namespace and subnamespaces'.
23. Under the 'Allow' column, check Execute Methods, Enable Account and Remote Enable, and then click OK.
24. Repeat steps 17-23 for the Performance Monitor Users group.
25. Click OK to close all windows.
3.3 Set permissions to Service Control Manager Security for Windows Service Monitoring:
If you wish to monitor whether Windows Service monitors are up/down, you need to grant permission to SCManager. The access
to the Windows services is controlled by the Security Descriptor of Service Control Manager, which by default is restricted for
hardened OS. The below mentioned steps will grant remote access to Service Control Manager in user level, to get the list of
services on a server.
Retrieve the user SID of the User Account
From the monitored device, open Command Prompt in Administrator mode.

Run the below command to retrieve the user SID. Replace UserName with the user name for the User account.
wmic useraccount where name="UserName" get name,sid
Example:
wmic useraccount where name="administrator" get name,sid
Note down the SID. (Ex. S-1-0-10-200000-30000000000-4000000000-500)
Retrieve the current SDDL for the SC Manager
Run the below command which will save the current SDDL for the SC Manager to the CurrentSDDL.txt.
sc sdshow scmanager > CurrentSDDL.txt
Page 208
Edit the CurrentSDDL.txt and copy the entire content.

The SDDL will be look like below:
D:(A;;CC;;;AU)(A;;CCLCRPRC;;;IU)(A;;CCLCRPRC;;;SU)(A;;CCLCRPWPRC;;;SY)(A;;KA;;;BA)(A;;CC;;;AC)S:
(AU;FA;KA;;;WD)(AU;OIIOFA;GA;;;WD)
Update the SDDL:
Frame new SDDL snippet for above SID
(A;;CCLCRPWPRC;;;<SID of User>)
Ex.
(A;;CCLCRPWPRC;;;S-1-0-10-200000-30000000000-4000000000-500)
Now place this snippet in before "S:" of original SDDL.

Updated SDDL will be like this:
D:(A;;CC;;;AU)(A;;CCLCRPRC;;;IU)(A;;CCLCRPRC;;;SU)(A;;CCLCRPWPRC;;;SY)(A;;KA;;;BA)(A;;CC;;;AC)
(A;;CCLCRPWPRC;;;S-1-0-10-200000-30000000000-4000000000-500)S:(AU;FA;KA;;;WD)(AU;OIIOFA;GA;;;WD)
Finally Execute the below command with Updated SDDL:
sc sdset scmanager D:(A;;CC;;;AU)(A;;CCLCRPRC;;;IU)(A;;CCLCRPRC;;;SU)(A;;CCLCRPWPRC;;;SY)(A;;KA;;;BA)

(A;;CC;;;AC)(A;;CCLCRPWPRC;;;S-1-0-10-200000-30000000000-4000000000-500)S:(AU;FA;KA;;;WD)
(AU;OIIOFA;GA;;;WD)
This will grant the following permissions to the user:

CC - To Get Service's current configuration
LC - To Get Service's current status
RP - To Read Properties/Start the Service
WP - To Write Properties/Stop the Service
RC - To Read the Security Descriptor.
Page 209
Monitoring VMware servers
OpManager monitors your VMware servers for availability and performance using native APIs. The advantage of using native APIs is
that it does not require any agent to be installed on your servers. Moreover, it enhances the usability and offers in-depth monitoring
capabilities to troubleshoot your Virtual Infrastructure.
Some of the highlights of monitoring VMware Servers with OpManager:
Supports ESX/ESXi from 4.0.

Monitors effective utilization of critical resources like CPU, Memory, Network and Disk
Supports monitoring of hardware health such as temperature, voltage, power, fan speed, status of processors etc. via VMware
API.
Out-of-the-box 70 plus reports on Host and VMs
Automatically maps the VMotioned VMs to the corresponding Hosts
Apart from monitoring the Hosts, VMs & DataStores, OpManager's VMware monitoring functionalities also encompass monitoring the
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) of guest OSs. Similar to that of any Windows or Linux server, OpManager monitors the applications,
Windows & TCP services, processes running on the VMs using WMI/SNMP/CLI.
Pre-requisites for monitoring VMware ESX/ESXi Servers
VCenter's vSphere / ESX client User Name and Password: As OpManager uses native APIs to monitor the VMware servers, it
requires the username and password of the VCenter / Host server to poll the performance data. Provide the correct username
and password when discovering the Host / VCenter.
VMware Tools (optional): We recommend that you install VMware tools on the VMs. In general, VMware tools improve the
performance of the Virtual Machine. Moreover, they offer IP address of the VMs, which helps OpManager to automatically
discover them. Click here to know the procedures for installing VMware tools.
If VMware Tools are not installed, OpManager discovers it using the VM's name. You can assign the IP address manually for such
VMs in the host's snapshot page and monitor the VMs.
Page 210
Discovering VMware ESX / ESXi servers in OpManager
To discover the host and the VMs, you just need to provide the IP Address/DNS Name and the vSphere credentials of the vCenter/
Host.
Note that the vSphere user must have access to all hosts and VMs (at least Read access) in order to monitor the devices without any
issues. In case a user wants to execute actions like powering on/off VMs, please make sure that user has sufficient privileges for
those actions (providing Administrator privileges works in most situations).
Discover vCenter: Use discover vCenter with the vCenter's VMware credentials, to discover all the hosts, VMs and datastores
managed by that particular vCenter.
Discover ESX: Use discover ESX with the ESX's VMware credentials, to discover the host along with its datastore and VMs.
Configuring VMware credentials

Before proceeding, ensure that you have configured the VMware credentials for the vCenter/ ESX host and the SNMP and WMI
credentials for the VMs in the credential library.
1. Go to Settings ? Discovery ? Credentials ? Add Credentials (or) Settings ? Discovery ? Virtualization Discovery ? Add Credential.
2. Select VMware as the Credential type and enter the vCenter/ Host's vSphere login Username and Password.
3. Enter the HTTPS (VMware web service's) port number and timeout interval for the connection between the vCenter/ Host and the
OpManager server.
4. Select the Auto VM Discovery option to automatically discover any new VMs that are henceforth created in the vCenter.
5. Click Save to add the credential.
Similarly, add the vCenter's SNMP/WMI/CLI credentials to monitor additional performance metrics such as disk partition, process
count details, etc., in vCenter servers. Select the Credential Type as WMI for Windows, CLI for Linux and SNMP for other non-Windows
OS.
Discovering vCenter/Host
Page 211
1. Go to Settings ? Discovery ? Virtualization discovery ? VMware.

2. If you wish to add and monitor VMs and their corresponding ESX hosts in a vCenter, select vCenter Discovery. Or, if you wish to
monitor only a particular ESX host, select ESX Discovery.
3. Enter the vCenter server's DNS Name/ IP Address.
4. Select the appropriate vCenter's VMware credentials and other dependant SNMP/WMI/CLI credentials.
5. Click Next to list all the hosts and VMs in a particular vCenter.
6. By default, all hosts will be added to OpManager. However, you can select the VMs that you want to discover.
7. Click Next to select the VM's SNMP/WMI/CLI credentials for in-depth monitoring. You can also select multiple credentials.
Page 212
8. You can choose the time interval in which want any changes in the vCenter environment should be automatically updated in
OpManager by choosing a value for Scan vCenter/ ESX Interval (hrs). This will automatically rediscover any changes in the vCenter
environment.
9. Also, you can choose whether to sync the display name of the virtual device (the name that will be displayed in OpManager) with
the entity name by enabling the "Sync entity name with display name" button. Once you're done, click 'Discover' to start the
discovery process.
If any of the VMs are already discovered or added, OpManager automatically maps them as virtual devices.
Configuring VM IP Address
OpManager, with the help of the installed VMware Tools, identifies the IP address of the VM and maps it to the host. If VMware Tools
are not installed, OpManager discovers it using the VM's entity name. You can assign the IP address manually for such VMs in the
host's snapshot page.
If VM's are not discovered/ mapped to its vCenter/Host because of an unassigned IP address, you can assign an IP address in the
vSphere environment. OpManager will automatically map that VM to its vCenter/Host. (or) You can manually assign an IP address to a
VM by following the simple steps below.
Go to the vCenter/Host's snapshot page ? Virtual Machines tab.
Click the start monitoring button in the Monitoring column for devices that are not monitored.
This will open IP Mapping. Enter the VM's IP address/ DNS name and the corresponding credentials to rediscover and map the
VM to its vCenter/Host.
You can now choose to monitor only the required VMs on a Host. If you wish to stop monitoring a VM, you can do so by clicking on
Page
the Stop monitor button of the corresponding VM under Virtual Details tab in the vCenter/Hosts snapshot page. Select the 213
relevant
icon to stop monitoring the required VMs on the host. OpManager maintains this configuration when a HA, VMotion, or rediscovery
happens.
To learn more about VMware monitoring, click here.

Page 214
Monitoring VMware ESX servers
All the discovered hosts, VMs and datastores are mapped in the 'VMware' section in the Virtualization menu . Click on Virtualization
to access the dashboard page, which provides a quick glance of your critical resources such as CPU, Memory, Network & Disk that are
under pressure. Though ideal resource utilization is the key benefit we get from virtualization, it can lead to other problems because
it is shared among the servers. Even if a single system has a resource crunch, it hugely affects the performance of the other systems
running on the same host. Quickly identifying and fixing the resource utilization problems is therefore vital for a business to run
smooth.
OpManager's VMware monitoring feature shows the top hosts and VMs by resource utilization and the recent alarms raised. Click on
the host / VM / Datastore name to see its snapshot page. The Virtualization Dashboard page refreshes automatically every 5 minutes
to reflect the latest collected statistics.
Listed below are a few of the various types of top resource utilization widgets that can help you to quickly identify any over utilized
resource. These widgets give a quick glance on systems which are the top consumers of CPU, Memory, Network, Disk I/O and Disk
Space and much more.
Top VMs Top Hosts
1. Top CPU Consumers 1. Top CPU Consumers

2. Top CPU Ready Consumers 2. Top Memory Consumers
3. Top Memory Consumers 3. Top Swap Memory Consumers
4. Top Swap Memory Consumers 4. Top Network Consumers
5. Top Disk I/O Consumers 5. Top Disk I/O Consumers
6. Top Network Consumers 6. Top Disk Space Consumers
Snapshot page of a ESX Server Host
Snapshot page of a host provides a summary of the current statistics, recent alarms, configuration details such as hardware status,
VMs inventory, resource allocation for each VM, Network Adapters, HBA list and Datastores.
Host Details and Performance Charts
In this section you can find the Host details like IP Address, Vendor of Host, CPU Cores etc. on the left side. The right side gives a quick
glance on performance data like CPU Utilization, Memory Utilization, Disk I/O Usage etc., collected during the last poll. These values
are collected periodically at a pre-defined interval ( in minutes ). These data help you determine the current performance of the Host.
Host Health At-a-Glance

This section provides the current day's performance chart of the host by default. You can view the reports of last 12 hours / 24 hours
Page 215
/ 7 days or even a custom date range. You can export the report as XLS / PDF or even schedule it to be delivered via email.
Hardware details
You can view a host device's hardware stats such as sensor information, battery, memory , power, processor etc under the
hardware tab in the device snapshot page.
The hardware tab also shows the basic hardware and software information of the host such as manufacturer, OS version, model,
alarms etc.
VM List & Resource Allocation Details

This section lists all the VMs on the Host, resources allotted to each VM, network adapters, storage adapters and datastore details.
Any change in the inventory, gets updated automatically. You can also find the monitors that are enabled on the Host andPage 216
notification
profiles associated to it. Click on the respective tab to view its details.
Click on the VM name to see its snapshot page. The snapshot page of the VM is similar to that of any Windows or Linux Server's
snapshot page. It also displays the VMs virtual details.
Page 217
Configuring Thresholds for VMware ESX and VMs
OpManager out-of-the-box offers monitoring templates for ESX hosts and VMs. The templates help you configure thresholds for
multiple ESX hosts and VMs at one shot. For each performance metric you can configure Warning Threshold as well as Error
Threshold, and receive proactive alerts if they are violated.
To configure the threshold value and apply the template
1. Go to Settings ? Configuration ? Device Templates.

2. You can find the ESX Server and VMware Virtual Machine templates for the hosts and VMs respectively. Click on the required
template.
3. Click on the monitor name to enable or disable the threshold, and to modify Warning Threshold, Error Threshold and Rearm
Values.
4. Click OK.
5. Click on Save to save the device template. Click on Save & Associate to save the device template and apply the changes to the
devices associated to the template. Page 218
6. Click Associate for the devices to inherit the configurations in the template. Or, click Associate & Overwrite for the devices to
remove the old and add the new configurations in the template.
Note: To edit the threshold values of a single ESX host, go its snapshot page and click the Monitors tab under Inventory Details. Click
on the Edit icon of a monitor to edit its threshold values.
Page 219
Managing VMware Alerts
OpManager fetches events from each VCenter / ESX Host, similar to SNMP traps. Currently we support important events, and this list
is updated every release. Apart from these events, OpManager also monitors threshold for critical performance indicators and raises
alerts.
To change the pre-set threshold values for each performance monitor, go to the monitors section under the snapshot page of the
host / VM / Datastore.
To view the complete list of VMware monitors,
Go to the Monitors tab in the VMware host's snapshot page.

Under the Performance Monitors tab, click on the + sign. This will display a list of all performance monitors available in
OpManager.
To view the list of Performance monitors for VMware hosts alone, scroll down to the VMware-Host Monitors section.
To view the list of Performance monitors for VMs, scroll down to the VMware- VM Monitors section.
To view the list of Performance monitors for Datastore, scroll down to the VMWare - Datastore Monitors section.
You can also view and add the performance monitors for hosts / vms by clicking on 'Add Monitors' under their corresponding
Device Templates.
Table 1: List of few Threshold Monitors for critical performance indicators related to host, datastore & VM's supported by
OpManager
S.No. Threshold Monitors Virtual Device Type Resource Severity

1. Host connection Status Host General =2 (notresponding) - Critical
=1 (disconnected) - Warning
2. Host Data Received (avg) Host Network >1000000 KBps - Critical
>800000 KBps - Warning
3. Host Data Transmission (avg) Host Network >1000000 KBps - Critical
4. Host Network Usage (avg) Host Network >4000000 KBps - Critical
5. Host CPU Utilization (avg) Host CPU > 90% - Critical
> 85% - Warning
6. Host Memory Utilization (avg) Host Memory > 90% - Critical
> 85% - Warning
7. Host Disk Read Latency Host Disk > 50ms - Critical
> 45ms - Warning
8. Host Disk Write Latency Host Disk > 50ms - Critical
> 45ms - Warning
9. Datastore Freespace Host Network < 5GB - Critical
< 10GB - Warning
10. VirtualMachine Data Received (avg) VM Network >125000 KBps - Critical
11 VirtualMachine Data Transmitted (avg) VM Network >125000 KBps - Critical
12. VirtualMachine Network Usage (avg) VM Network >250000 KBps - Critical
>200000 KBps - Warning Page 220
13. VirtualMachine CPU Usage (avg) VM CPU > 90% - Critical

> 85% - Warning
14. VirtualMachine Memory Usage (avg) VM Memory > 90% - Critical
> 85% - Warning
Table 2: Few of the VCenter / ESX hosts' Events supported by OpManager
S.No. Events Virtual Device Type Severity

1. VmFailedToPowerOffEvent VM Major (Cleared on event 2 or 3)
2. VmPoweredOffEvent VM Clear
3. VmPowerOffOnIsolationEvent VM Clear
4. VmFailedToPowerOnEvent VM Major (Cleared on event 5)
5. VmPoweredOnEvent VM Clear
6. VmFailedToSuspendEvent VM Major (Cleared on event 7)
7. VmSuspendedEvent VM Clear
8. VmFailedToRebootGuestEvent VM Major (Cleared on event 9)
9. VmGuestRebootEvent VM Clear
10. VmFailoverFailed VM Critical (Cleared on event 11)
11 VmPrimaryFailoverEvent VM Clear
12. VmUpgradeFailedEvent VM Major (Cleared on event 13)
13. VmUpgradeCompleteEvent VM Clear
14. VmDisconnectedEvent VM Warning (Cleared on event 15)
15. VmConnectedEvent VM Clear
16. VmDiskFailedEvent VM Major
17. VmRelocatedEvent VM Clear
18. VmRelocateFailedEvent VM Critical (Cleared on event 17)
You can view the complete list of ESX host / VCenter Events that are supported by OpManager, under Settings -> Monitors ->
VMware Events.
Note: OpManager only triggers alarms based on VMware events, and they have to be manually cleared once the issue/notification
has been taken care of.
Page 221
Notifying VMware Alerts
Notification profiles help you to notify when any alert is raised for virtual devices. The notification can be a sound alert/ email alert/
running a script etc. You can associate any of the notification profiles that is already created for the VCenter / ESX host. To associate
a notification profile to a virtual device,
1. Go to the snapshot page of the host.

2. Click on Notification icon present at the top.
3. If no profiles are associated. Then click on 'Associate' to view the list of notification profiles already created.
4. Select the notification profile that you want to associate and click Associate.
You can create a notification profile specifically for receiving alerts on events related to Virtual devices using the following steps :
Go to Settings -> Notifications -> Add Profile.

Select the required mode of notification ( email / sms / web console etc ) and fill in the required fields. Click here to know more
about setting up notification profiles generally.
Click on next.
Scroll down to the section that says "When any Virtual Devices has a problem". Click on it and select the situations for which
you wish to get alerted.
You can get alerted either for General Alarms ( like VM Power on / off, VM Failover failed, Host disconnect failed etc) or for virtual
device related performance issues ( such as threshold violations ) .
Click on Next and continue the steps followed to setup a notification profile ( click here to view the complete list of steps
required for setting up notification profile. )
Page 222
Monitoring Hyper-V Host and VMs
OpManager aids in comprehensive Hyper-V monitoring via WMI. It provides separate dashboard for Hosts and VMs, to have a quick
view on its performance. It also offers a dedicated Snapshot page for the Hyper-V host, which provides comprehensive data such as
Health, Inventory, Performance Reports, etc.
Some highlights of monitoring Hyper-V servers with OpManager:
Monitors effective utilization of critical resources like CPU, Memory, Network and Disk
Out-of-the-box offers 50 reports on Host and VMs
Automatically maps the migrated VMs to the corresponding Hosts
Apart from monitoring the Hosts and VMs, OpManager also monitors the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) of guest OSs. Similar to
that of any Windows or Linux server, OpManager monitors the applications, Windows & TCP services, processes running on the VMs
using WMI/SNMP.
Page 223
Discovering Hyper-V Servers in OpManager
To discover the Hyper-V host and VMs, you just need to provide the IP address and WMI credentials of Hyper-V host. The VMs are
automatically discovered along with the host.
Steps to discover the Hyper-V host and VMs:
Before proceeding to discover the host and VMs, ensure that you have configured the credentials for both the host and VMs in the
credential library. To discover the host and VMs:
1. Go to Settings ? Discovery ? Add Device.

2. Enter the Host Name / IP Address.
3. Enter the correct Netmask and select the appropriate credentials.
4. Click OK button to add the host.
If any of the VMs are already discovered or added, OpManager automatically maps them as Virtual Device.
Note: If the device has been added successfully, but not displayed under the 'Virtualization' tab. Search for that device. Upon
finding the particular device, Go to its snapshot page and look for the device type. If it is mentioned as 'unknown', wrong
credentials might have been provided or it is not reachable during discovery. Provide the correct credentials and click on
'Rediscover Now' present under three-line menu at the top right corner in the snapshot page, to discover it as an Hyper-V host.
To learn more about Hyper-V monitoring, click here.

Page 224
Configuring Thresholds for Hyper-V Host and VMs
OpManager out-of-the-box offers monitoring templates for Hyper-V hosts and VMs. The templates help you configure thresholds for
multiple hosts and VMs at one shot. The process is similar to that of configuring threshold to monitors available for Windows/Linux
servers.
To configure the threshold value and apply the template
1. Go to Settings ? Configuration ? Device templates.

2. You can find the HyperV Server and HyperV Virtual Machine templates for the hosts and VMs respectively. Click on the required
template.
3. Click on Edit Thresholds button to configure the threshold and rearm value for the required monitors.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Associate for the devices to inherit the configurations in the template. While associating the template, click on Apply &
Overwrite for the devices to remove the old and add the new configurations in the template.
Note: To edit the threshold values of a single host, go its snapshot page and click the Monitors tab under Inventory Details. Click on
the Edit icon of a monitor to edit its threshold values.
Page 225
Managing Hyper-V Alerts
OpManager monitors Hyper-V host and VM similar to that of any Windows server. Upon clicking the monitors tab in the host
snapshot page, the monitors listed for a Windows server is listed here. You can add the required monitors and configure thresholds.
If the threshold is violated, OpManager raises an alarm.
Page 226
Notifying Hyper-V Alerts
Notification profiles help you to notify when any alert is raised for virtual devices. The notification can be a sound alert/ email alert/
running a script etc. You can associate any of the notification profiles that is already created for the Hyper-V host.
Click here to know how to create a new notification profile.

Page 227
Discovering Nutanix clusters in OpManager
Nutanix is a vendor of distributed computing and storage virtualization solutions, specialising in an area called 'Hyperconverged
Infrastructure'. Basically, the idea is to provide an all-inclusive virtual environment, including the storage component of the VM itself.
This is to enable data requests to be handled inside the VM itself instead of being sent to an external storage, and so the latency for
data retrieval and access reduces to a negligible level.
OpManager makes use of the Prism API framework to fetch performance metrics from the devices in the Nutanix environment.
Discovering your Nutanix cluster into OpManager

1. Go to Settings ? Discovery ? Add Nutanix. You can also go to Settings ? Virtualization discovery and select the Nutanix tab.
2. Enter the IP address. The IP address of the Nutanix cluster is to be provided here.
3. In the credentials field, select the credentials of the cluster. If you haven't already added it, you can click on 'Add Credentials' and
create a credential profile right away. Click on 'Add Credentials', select 'Nutanix' and provide the following details:
1. Profile name (mandatory): A name for the credential profile
2. Description: A short description for the credential profile
3. Username (mandatory): The username of the Prism element used to manage the Nutanix environment.
4. Password (mandatory): Password of the Prism element.
5. Protocol (mandatory): Select http/https, based on your requirement.
6. Time out (mandatory): The time out threshold for the connection. The default value is 20 seconds.
7. Port number (mandatory): The port number on which the Prism element is running. The default value is 9440.
Page 228
4. Once you have provided all these details, click 'Save' to create the credential profile.
5. If you want to monitor your cluster OS more intensively for other performance metrics, just click on 'Advanced settings' and select
the necessary credential profiles (either of these - SNMP, WMI or CLI).
6. Once you've provided all these basic details, click on 'Discover' to start discovering the elements in your Nutanix network.
7. In the next window, all the Hosts and the VMs under that cluster are listed. You can simply choose which elements you want to be
monitored by checking them. Once done, click 'Next'.
8. If you want to perform in-depth monitoring of your Hosts/VMs based on other protocol (SNMP / WMI / CLI), you can select which
credentials you want to use for the same in the following 'Select Credentials' window.
9. You can also choose whether or not you want to auto-discover new VMs under this cluster by enabling or disabling the 'Discover
new VMs automatically' option. Once you're done, click 'Discover'.
10. The Nutanix discovery is now initiated, and OpManager adds all the selected elements using the chosen credentials. You can view
the progress of the discovery in the discovery progress bar in the bottom-right corner of the window.
11. Once discovered, click on Virtualization and go the Nutanix tab to view all the clusters, hosts and VMs that have been discovered
into OpManager.
Page 229
Introduction to Storage Monitoring
OpManager helps you to efficiently monitor and manage all your storage devices with the storage monitoring add-on. Now, monitor
your RAID and Tape Libraries, get forecasts on usage of storage space and manage your FC switches proactively with OpManager.
Some of the key features in the storage monitoring add-on are:
Monitor your storage devices such as RAIDs and Tape Libraries
Manage FC (Fiber Channel) switches in your Storage Area Network
Get notified of issues in real-time with instant mobile and email notification.
Know the overall picture of your network storage through extensive reports.
Note: Before you proceed with the installation, make sure you check out the prerequisites of the installation.
Page 230
Supported devices for storage monitoring
Below is the list of supported vendors and the respective devices for storage monitoring in OpManager.
If you couldn't find a device, send us a request here so that we can extend support to your storage device.
Dell EMC storage devices

HP storage devices
IBM storage devices
Infinidat storage devices
NetApp storage devices
Hitachi storage devices
Huawei storage devices
InforTrend storage devices
Promise storage devices
Storage devices from other vendors
�
Page 231
�
Prerequisites to add storage devices

The list of storage devices that are monitored by OpManager and their respective supported models, features supported and
prerequisites for monitoring are listed below.
SAN Switches Storage Arrays Tape� Libraries
Brocade Silkworm Series IBM ESS HP ESL / HP EML

McData Sphereon series HP MSA DELL
EMC Connectrix HP EVA IBM 3584 / TS� 3310 / TS� 3500
Cisco MDS series EMC CLARiiON Overland Neo
QLogic SANbox Infortrend ADIC Scalar
HP Switches NetApp StorageTek
Hitachi� Lightning Qualstar
Hitachi Thunder Quantum
Huawei Storage Tandberg
IBM DS4000 / FastT SUN StorEdge
StorageTek / LSI Logic
SUN StorEdge
Areca RAID
EMC Centera
IBM Spectrum Virtualize
Monitoring Brocade switches & directors

OpManager provides monitoring and management of Brocade silkworm switches and directors.
Models Supported
Brocade SilkWorm switches
SilkWorm 4100
SilkWorm 4102
All the rebranded models or OEM models are supported.
Features Supported
Inventory information for switch & switch ports

Switch ports monitoring
Reports:
Switch zoning configuration report

Availability reports for switch & switch ports
Performance reports for switch Ports
Page 232
Bandwidth Utilization
Errors
Rx Traffic
Rx Utilization
Tx Traffic
Tx Utilization
Switch summary reports
Real time graphs for trouble shooting

SNMP trap based alarms
Launch of telnet/applet brocade client for configuration
Prerequisites for Monitoring
Ensure SNMP agent is running in the Brocade silkworm switch/director.

By default, OpManager uses SNMP port 161 and read community 'public' for discovery. If your settings are different , please
provide the same in the OpManager web-client while adding Switch.
Ensure that the IP of the server running OpManager is included in the the SNMP access listof the Brocade Switch.
The following command can be used to know the snmp community & access list configurations in brocade silkworm
switches.
Run the command� agtcfgdefault via CLI� console of the switch.
Details: Refer the "Brocade Fabric OS Reference Manual"
Register OpManager server IP address as a trap destination for the Brocade Silkworm Switch.
Use agtcfgset command in the Brocade Fabric OS command line interface to specify the Trap Recipient.
Note: For more details refer the Brocade Fabric OS Reference Manual
Note:� In case the device is not discovered, then the probable reasons for non discovery are displayed in the client. Please go
through the instructions and try re-adding the device.
Monitoring McData switches / directors

OpManager provides monitoring and management of McData switches and directors like Sphereon / Intrepid etc.
Models Supported
� Sphereon 4500 Fabric Switch

� ES-3016 switch
� ES-3032 switch
� ES-1000 switch
� Intrepid 6064 Director
Page 233
� Intrepid 6140 Director
� ED-6064 director
� ED-5000 director
Features Supported
Complete inventory information for switch & switch ports

Reports:

Errors
Rx Traffic
Rx Throughput
Tx Traffic
TxThroughput
Total Throughput
Switch Port summary reports

Launch of Telnet/web client for configuration
Ensure SNMP agent is running in the McData switch / director. McData Switch SNMP information can be checked in the McData
Switch's Web-based� interface -> Configure (option)� -> SNMP� (option).
By Default, OpManager uses SNMP port 161 and read community 'public' for discovery. If your settings are different , please
Register OpManager server IP address as trap destination.
For details refer Configure SNMP section in the McData Switch Product Manager user manual.
Note: In case the device is not discovered, then the probable reasons for non discovery are displayed in the client. Please go through
the instructions and try readding the device.
Monitoring EMC switches / directors

OpManager provides monitoring and management of EMC switches and directors.
Models Supported
EMC Connectrix switches

EMC Connectrix directors
Features Supported
Page 234
Inventory information of switch & switch ports
Reports:

Errors
Rx Traffic
Rx Throughput
Tx Traffic
Tx Throughput
Total Throughput

Launch of Telnet/Applet EMC client for configuration
Ensure SNMP agent is running in the EMC Switch / director.

By default, OpManager uses SNMP port 161 and read community 'public' for discovery. If your settings are different, please
Register OpManager server IP address as a trap destination for the EMC Switch.
the instructions and try re-adding the device.
Monitoring Cisco MDS switches / directors

OpManager provides monitoring and management of Cisco MDS 9000 Series SAN Switches.
Models Supported
Cisco MDS 9000 Series Switches such as Cisco MDS9216i

Cisco SN 5428-K9 Storage Router
Features Supported

Cisco VSAN information
Reports:
Availability reports for switch & switch ports Page 235
Bandwidth Utilization
Port Frame Error Rate
Port In Drop Rate
Port Out Drop Rate
Rx Utilization
Rx Throughput
Tx Utilization
Rx Throughput
Total Throughput

Remote launch of CLI to facilitate device configuration
OpManager by default uses 'public' snmp community for discovery. This community should have read access right. In case your
read community is different , please provide the same in the OpManager web-client while adding Switch.. You can check the
community names (and their access rights) configured in your MDS switch by issuing the command "show snmp community"
via telnet to switch
To set the access rights for a community in your cisco switch , you need to do the following ,
Go to config mode , by typing the command ,
config t
Set the snmp community by typing the command,
snmp-server community <community> <rw | ro>
For example, to set read-only access right to "public" community you can type ,
snmp-server community public ro
Register OpManager server IP address as a trap destination for the Cisco Switch.
Check if the server running OpManager is registered as a trap destination in the switch by issuing the command "show
snmp host" via telnet to switch. This should have an entry with OpManager server IP and port 162
If entry is not available, use snmp-server host <host_address>traps command to specify Trap Recipient.
Note: For more details check Cisco MDS 9000 Family Command Reference Guide.
Monitoring QLogic switches Page 236
OpManager provides monitoring and management of QLogic SANbox switches.
Models Supported
SANbox2-64
SANbox 5600
SANbox 5200
SANbox 3050
SANbox Express 1400
Features Supported

Reports:

Errors
Tx Traffic
Rx Traffic
Tx Throughput
Rx Throughput
Total Throughput
Switch port summary reports

Launch of telnet / QLogic client for configuration
Ensure SNMP agent is running in the QLogic SANbox Switch. To view the SNMP settings, use the QLogic Switch telnet command
"show setup snmp". For any changes use "set setup snmp". (Refer "QLogic Switch Management User’s Guide" for details.)
OpManager by default, uses snmp port 161 and read community 'public' for discovery. If your settings are different , please
Register OpManager server IP address as a snmp trap destination for the QLogic Switch.
Monitoring HP switches / directors

OpManager provides monitoring and management of HP Storageworks switches and directors.
Models Supported Page 237
HP storageworks switches
HP storageworks directors
Features Supported
Inventory information for switch & switch ports

Reports:
Switch zoning configuration report

Errors
Rx Traffic
Rx Throughput
Tx Traffic
Tx Throughput
Total Throughput

Launch of telnet/applet HP client for configuration
Ensure SNMP agent is running in the HP storageworks switch / director.

By default, OpManager uses snmp port 161 and read community 'public' for discovery. If your settings are different , please
Register OpManager server IP address as a trap destination for the HP StorageWorks Switch.
Monitoring IBM ESS Shark Storage Systems

OpManager provides monitoring and management of IBM ESS Shark series� storage systems.
Models Supported
DS6000 Series
DS8000 Series
ESS 2105-800
ESS 2105-750
Page 238
ESS 2105-F20
Features Supported
Inventory information of physical components
Array Controllers, Array controller Ports

Disk Drives
Logical configuration details
Storage Pools
Storage Volumes
Intercocnnects Info
Monitoring
Array system status

Array controller status
Disk drive status, Storage Pools Status, Storage Volumes status
Reports:
Availability reports for storage system, RAID controller & RAID controller ports
OpManager uses the IBM Common Information Model (CIM) Agent for ESS to monitor the IBM ESS Shark Array
The IBM ESS CIM agent can be installed on any server that is pingable from the server where OpManager is installed.
IBM CIM agent install requires esscli utility is already installed in the server
Install the necessary software from the OEM website.
Disable DigestAuthentication by setting DigestAuthentication flag to false in cimom.properties file
Note : Default directory is C:\Program Files\IBM\cimagent
Start the ESS Provider service CIM Object Manager - DS Open API from the Windows services menu
Ensure that, OpManager installed host and the Storage system has a Fibre Channel Connectivity.
Monitoring HP Modular Storage Arrays

OpManager provides monitoring and management of HP Modular Storage Arrays.
Models Supported
HP MSA 1000
HP MSA 1500
Features Supported
Page 239
Inventory information of physical components ,
Array Controllers, Array controller Ports

Disk Drives
Storage Pools
Storage Volumes
Intercocnnects Info
Monitoring
Array system status

Array controller status
Disk drive status, Storage Pools Status, Storage Volumes status
Reports:
Prerequisites for Monitoring HP MSA Array
OpManager uses the HP SMI-S MSA Provider based on SNIA standard to monitor the HP MSA
The MSA provider can be installed on any server running Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server.
This server must have a path through the SAN to the MSA devices that will be managed.
Also the server must be reachable from the server where OpManager is installed.
Ensure that MSA firmware version is compatible with the installed SMI-S provider (latest download corresponds to SMI v1.0.3).
Start the MSA Provider service hp StorageWorks SMI-S CIMOM from the Windows services menu.
Monitoring HP StorageWorks Enterprise Virtual Array

OpManager provides monitoring and management of HP StorageWorks Enterprise Virtual Array.
Models Supported
HP StorageWorks EVA 3000,4000,5000,6000,8000
Features Supported
Raid Controllers
Raid Controller Ports
Page 240
Disk Drives
Storage Volume
Storage Pool
Interconnects Info
Monitoring
Disk Drive status

Raid Controller status
Raid Controller Port status
Reports:
Performance reports for HP EVA arrays (via evaperfutilutility)
Array Statistics
Total Host Req/s, Total Host MB/s
Array Controller Statistics
CPU %, Data %
Virtual Disks
Read Hit MB/s, Read Hit Latency(ms), Read Hit Req/s, Read Miss Req/s, Read Miss MB/s, Read Miss Latency, Write
Req/s, Write MB/s, Write Latency(ms), Flush MB/s, Mirror MB/s,
Host Port Statistics
Read Req/s, Read MB/s, Read Latency(ms), Write Req/s, Write MB/s, Write Latency (ms), Av. Queue Depth
Physical Disks
Disk Queue Depth, Drive Latency(ms), Read Req/s, Read MB/s, Read Latency (ms), Write Req/s, Write MB/s, Write
Latency(ms)
Physical Disk Groups
Total Read Req/s, Total Read MB/s, Average Read� Latency(ms), Total Write Req/s, Total Write MB/s, Average Write
of Latency(ms), Total Flush Bytes, Total Mirror Bytes, Total Prefetch Bytes
Availability reports for Raid Controller & Raid Controller ports
Threshold monitoring for Disk Drive Temperature , Power Supply status
Prerequisites for Monitoring HP StorageWorks EVA
OpManager monitors HP EVA based on the Command View EVA(CV EVA) version installed in the your environment.
A) SSSU Installation Instructions
OpManager uses SSSU (Storage System Scripting Utility) available as part of HP StorageWorks Windows Kit for Enterprise Virtual
Array installation.
This needs to be installed in the server where OpManager is installed and running Page 241
Ensure that "SSSU.exe" is included in the� PATH environment variable in the server in which OpManager is installed. (You can
check this by executing SSSU.exe in a command prompt which will print the version) .
Note: In case your current SSSU version is higher (say 5.0) , you need to download SSSU.exe (Version 4.0) and include it in the
%PATH%. For this you may follow the steps below,
1. Open the HP software download URL, HP Software Download Page

2. Click on "HP StorageWorks Command View EVA V4.0 Media Kit". This will open a page which lists the supported Operating Systems
3. Click on the operating system corresponding to the server running OpManager (Example: Windows 2003)
4. Click on the "Download" button corresponding to the "HP StorageWorks Storage System Scripting Utility (SSSU) v4.0". This will
download SSSU.exe
Steps to add the HP� EVA into OpManager (using SSSU)
After including SSSU utility in the %PATH% environment variable, restart OpManager (shutdown & start). This is required for
the Environment PATH settings to take effect.
In the OpManager browser client go to� Admin tab -->� Manage Storage Devices option.
In the "IP Address" field enter the Management_Appliance_IP_address (The IP address of the HP Management Appliance
that is managing the HP EVA array)
Choose Device Type as Raid
Choose Vendor as HP
Choose Model as "EVA(Below 6.0)"
Provide the Administrator Username, Password and the Community String
Click on Add Device.
B) EVA SMI Provider Installation Instructions
OpManager uses the HP SMI-S EVA Provider (SNIA standard) to monitor the HP EVA (Command View EVA version 6.0.2 and above)
The HP SMI-S EVA Provider is integrated with Command View EVA.
Ensure that EVA firmware version is compatible with the installed SMI-S provider
Check the SMI service say like, HP StorageWorks SMI-S CIMOM or HP StorageWorks CIM Object Manager is listed in Windows
Services of the Command View EVA Host.
Now start the service
� � � Steps to add HP EVA into OpManager (using SMI-S)
Ensure that SMI provider is properly started and is listed in Windows Services Panel
Restart OpManager (shutdown & start). This is required for the Environment PATH settings to take effect.
In the OpManager client go to Admin Tab -->Manage Storage Devices Page 242
Provide� IP Address of the host� in which SMI-S Provider is running
Choose Device Type, Vendor and Model as RAID, HP and EVA(Above 6.0) respectively
In Username field enter the EVA Provider username
In the Password field enter the EVA Provider password
Provide the� Port number at which the CIM Agent is running(5989 or 5988)
Choose whether the SSL should be Enabled(https) or Disabled(http)
Provied the name space (by default root/eva)
Change the Timeout if needed.
Click on Add Device
Note: If the Ping option is disabled for the device, then please uncheck 'Ping the given IP' field.
through the instructions and try readding the device.�
C) evaperf Installation Instructions
For Performance monitoring, evaperf utility needs to be installed in the server running OpManager.
Ensure that, the evaperf utility installed host and the CommandView EVA running host are connected via Fibre Channel.
1. Include evaperf in the PATH environment variable

2. Ensure that� the installed EvaPerf utility is compatible with EVA firmware version.
3. Ensure that evapdcs (EVA Performance Data Collection Service) is installed along with evaperf by executing the command
"evapdcs -v"
If it prints "evapdcs is currently installed" , you may check its startup status in the Windows "Services" menu . This service is
registered with the name "HP EVA Performance Data Collector". (If the status is "disabled", it indicates that it is in an improper
state and you will need to restart the host server once and then check the above again)
In case the above command prints "evapdcs not installed" , install evapdcs via the following command evapdcs -i -m
4. The server running OpManager needs to be registered to the Command View EVA server via , "evaperf fnh [hostname]
[username] [password]"
hostname - CVE host name , username - CVE username , password - CVE password
5. OpManager uses EVA name (known as friendly name in EVA terminology ) to issue evaperf commands. For this the EVA name -
WWN mapping needs to be registered via "evaperf fn" command
6. If the EVA is password protected, the EVA password needs to be registered for the respective EVA WWN via "evaperf spw
array_WWN array_Password" command
7. You can check if evaperf is able to fetch valid data by entering the following command in the OpManager/ directory ,
evaperf all -sz <EVA Name> -csv -nots (This will automatically start evapdcs service, if it is not started already) . This should
print all the EVA performance statistics (for Array, VDisk , Disk etc).�
The sample output should look similar to the one given below : CPU %,Data %,Ctlr,Serial,Node
82,81,A,V8398ADVBP2003,5065-1FD1-5021-8781
94,99,B,V8398ADVHV200D,5060-1FF1-5031-8582
Note: Installation details for evaperf are available in the HP StorageWorks Command View EVA installation guide.
Monitoring EMC CLARiiON Networked Storage System

OpManager provides monitoring and management of EMC CLARiiON Networked Storage Systems.
Page 243
Models Supported
CX Series like CX3-20, CX3-40, CX3-80, CX300, CX500, CX700 & CX800
FC Series like FC4700
Features Supported
Storage Processor (SP)

SP Ports
Disk Drives
LUNs
RaidGroups
Host-Port mapping
InterConnects Info
Monitoring
SP status
SP Port status
Free space of Disk Drives / Raid Groups /LUNs
Reports:
Performance
Storage Processors
Utilization, Total Bandwidth, Total throughput, Read Bandwidth, Read Size, Read throughput, Write Bandwidth,
Write Size, Write throughput, Dirty Pages, Flush Ratio, Mbs Flushed,� Idle Flush On, High Water Flush On, Low
water Flush Off, Write Cache Flushes
Disk Drives
Total Bandwidth, Total throughput, Read Bandwidth, Read Size, Read throughput, Write Bandwidth, Write Size,
Write throughput, Disk Service Time
LUNs
Read Bandwidth, Read Size, Read throughput, Write Bandwidth, Write Size, Write throughput, Read Cache Hits,
Read Cache Hit Ratio, Write Cache Hits, Write Cache Hit Ratio, Forced Flushes.
Availability reports for SP & SP ports
Prerequisites for Monitoring EMC CLARiiON

NaviCLI should be installed in the server in which OpManager is installed.
Include the directory containing NaviCLI.exe in the PATH environment variable. (This is normally C:\Program Page 244
Files\EMC\Navisphere CLI\ ).
Ensure that OpManager is restarted (shutdown & started) after including NaviCLI in the path.� This is required for the latest
path changes to take effect for OpManager.
Now open a command prompt to execute the navicli command to check for the proper response from EMC CLARiiON RAID.
Command: navicli -h <array name> getall
For Performance monitoring, please ensure that setStats flag is enabled. You can enable the same using NaviCLI command
Command : NaviCLI -h <array-ip> setstats -on
Note: In case the device is not discovered, then the probable reasons for non-discovery are displayed in the client. Please go through
Monitoring Infortrend EonStor Storage System

OpManager provides monitoring and management of Infortrend EonStor Storage System.
Models Supported
EonStor storage systems such as,
A16F-G2422
A24F-R2224
A24F-G2224
A16F-R2221
A16F-G2221
A16F-R/S1211
A12F-G2221
A08F-G2221
A16U-G2421
A12U-G2421
A08U-G2421
A08U-C2412
A08U-C2411
U12U-G4020
F16F-R/S2021
F12F-G2A2
FF-R/S2021-4/6
S16F-R1430
S16F-G1430
All the rebranded models or OEM models are supported.

Features Supported
Page 245
RAID Controllers
RAID Controller� Ports
Channels
Disk Drives
LUNs
Raid Partitions
Logical Volumes
Logical Drives
Monitoring
RAID Controller status

RAID Controller port status
Fan, Power supply, UPS, � Battery, Temperature Sensor, Voltage status, Door status, Speaker status
Reports:
Performance
CurrentQueuedIOCount,CurrentLunNumber,CurrentAccessDelayTime
CurrentTagCount,CurrentIOTimeOut,CurrentDriveCheckPeriod
CurrentSAFTEPollingPeriod,CurrentAutoDetectPeriod
Availability reports for storage system, RAID Controller & RAID Controller ports
Ensure SNMP agent is running.

Register OpManager server IP address as trap destination
Note :� In case the device is not discovered, then the probable reasons for non discovery are displayed in the client. Please go
Monitoring NetApp Primary Storage series

OpManager provides monitoring and management of NetApp Primary Storage series System.
Models Supported
FAS series like ,
FAS200
FAS250
FAS270
Page 246
FAS270c
FAS3000
FAS 920
FAS920c
FAS940
FAS940c
FAS960
FAS960c
FAS980
FAS980c
FAS3000
FAS3020
F-500, F-600 & F-700 series like ,
F825c
F825
F210
F230
F520
F630
F720
F740
F760
C Series like ,
C1200
C2100
C6200
Features Supported
Discovers and displays NetApp Raid information including status parameters such as Global Status, Fan / Power supply status
Monitors Volume� usage� including snapshots
Monitors cluster status information when deployed in cluster configuration
Receives SNMP Traps covering over 75 system and threshhold alerts
Performance graphs
NFS/CIFS Ops/sec
NetRx/Tx Throughput
Disk Read Writes / sec� , Tape Read Writes� / sec
CacheAge
Prerequisites for Monitoring Page 247

Monitoring Hitachi HDS Lightning 9900V� series storage systems

OpManager provides monitoring and management of HDS Lightning 9900V series storage System.
Models Supported
Hitachi HDS Lightning 9900V series storage systems such as HDS Lightning 9970V & HDS Lightning 9880V�
NSC55
Features Supported
Disk Controllers,� Disk Units,� Disk Processor

Port Details
LUNs
LUN Host Mapping
Monitoring
Disk Controller status

Disk Unit status
Port Status
Reports:
Availability reports
Capacity Summary
Monitoring and alarm generation for faulty conditions (via SNMP traps)

�
Page 248
Monitoring Hitachi HDS Thunder 9500V series storage systems
OpManager provides monitoring and management of HDS Thunder 9500V series storage system.
Models Supported
Hitachi HDS Thunder 9500V series storage systems such as HDS Thunder 9570V & HDS Thunder 9585V
Hitachi HDS TagmaStore
Features Supported
RAID Controller
RAID Controller Ports
LUNs
LUN Host Mapping
Interconnects Info
Monitoring
RAID Controller status

RAID Controller Port status
Reports:
Performance
LUNs
ReadCommandNumber,ReadHitNumber, ReadHitRate
WriteCommandNumber,WriteHitNumber,WriteHitRate
Availability reports for RAID, RAID Controller & RAID Controller ports
Controller blockade
Drive blockade
Internal FCAL Loop failure
� NAS server / path failures.
Battery/Fan alarms.
Other alarms defined in MIB

Page 249
Refer the SNMP Agent Support Function user guide of Hitachi Freedom Series Thunder 9500 V Series for agent installation and
configuration detail.
Monitoring Huawei Storage Systems

OpManager supports monitoring and management of Huawei OceanStor storage devices
Models Supported
Huawei OceanStor V3/V5 Series.

Huawei OceanStor Dorado V3/V6 Series.
Pre-Requisites:
Select 'Enable Performance Monitor' checkbox under Settings in the Huawei Storage UI to monitor the performance of Huawei
storage devices with OpManager
Monitoring IBM FastT, DS4000 Storage Systems

OpManager provides monitoring and management of IBM FastT / DS4000 series storage systems
Models Supported
IBM FastT series

IBM DS4000 series
Features Supported
RAID,� RAID Controller,� RAID Controller Ports

Disk Drives
Tray/Enclosure Component Health Information
VolumeGroups
Volumes
VolumeLUN Mappings
Host Groups
Interconnects Info
Monitoring
RAID status
RAID� Port status
Page 250
Status of Volume Groups, Volumes & Disk Drives
Reports:
Performance reports for DS4000 / IBM FastT Storage arrays
Includes reports for Controllers, Volumes and Array for the following stats (via SMcli utility),
Total IO Count
Read Percentage
Cache Hit Percentage
Current Data Transfer Rate
Maximum Data Transfer Rate
Current IO Count
Maximum IO Count
Alarms

Status alerts for Disk Drives, Volume Groups & Volumes
OpManager uses command line utility (SMcli.exe) available as part of IBM FastT / DS4000 Storage Manager installation
Ensure that SMcli is installed in the server in which OpManager is installed.
Include the directory containing SMcli.exe in the PATHenvironment variable.
By default for Windows Servers this is C:\Program Files\IBMFastT\client\

By default for UNIX Servers this is /opt/IBMFastT/client/
Ensure that OpManager is restarted (shutdown & started) after including SMcli in the path
Register OpManager server IP address as snmp trap destination.
Ensure that� the OpManager installed server and the Storage system are connected via Fibre Channel.
through the instructions and try readding the device.
Monitoring StorageTek Storage Systems

OpManager provides monitoring and management of StorageTek B-series & D-series storage systems.
Models Supported
D Series
B Series
Flexline 200 series
Page 251
Flexline 300 series
Features Supported
RAID,� RAID Controller,� RAID Controller Ports

Disk Drives
Tray/Enclosure Component Health Information
VolumeGroups
Volumes
VolumeLUN Mappings
Host Groups
Intercocnnects Info
Monitoring
RAID status
RAID� Port status
Status of Volume Groups, Volumes & Disk Drives
Reports:
Performance reports for StorageTek /LSI Storage arrays
Total IO Count
Read Percentage
Current IO Count
Maximum IO Count
Alarms

OpManager uses command line utility (SMcli.exe) available as part of SANtricity Storage Manager Client installation
Include the directory containing SMcli.exe in the PATHenvironment variable. Page 252
By default for Windows Servers this is C:\Program Files\SM8\client\
By default for UNIX Servers this is /opt/SM8/client/
Register OpManager server IP address as SNMP trap destination.
Monitoring SUNStorEdge Systems

OpManager provides monitoring and management of SUN StorEdge systems.
Models Supported
SUN StorEdge 6920

SUN StorEdge6120
Features Supported
Disk Drives
Storage Volumes, Storage Pools
Ports info
DSP information
Disk Drives
Volumes
Domains
SCSI info
Ports info
Monitoring
Drive status
Storage pool status, Storage volume status
Domain status
Port status
Reports:
Performance reports for StorageTek /LSI Storage arrays
Total IO Count
Read Percentage
Page 253
Current IO Count
Maximum IO Count
Alarms

OpManager uses command line utility (SMcli.exe) available as part of SANtricity Storage Manager Client installation
Include the directory containing SMcli.exe in the PATHenvironment variable.
By default for Windows Servers this is C:\Program Files\SM8\client\

By default for UNIX Servers this is /opt/SM8/client/
Register OpManager server IP address as SNMP trap destination.
Monitoring Areca ARC Storage System

�
OpManager provides monitoring and management of Areca ARC Storage System
Models Supported
ARC Series like ARC-5010, ARC-6010, ARC-6020.
Features Supported
RAID Controller
Disk Drives
Raid Set
Volume Set
Page 254
Monitoring
Disk Drive state

Raid Set state
Volume Set state
Power Supply state
Disk Drive temperature
Reports:
Availability reports for RAID Controller.
Prerequisites for Monitoring Areca ARC

Monitoring EMC Centera Storage System
OpManager provides monitoring and management of EMC Centera Storage Systems.
Features Supported
Centera Clusters
Centera Nodes (Access & storage)
Centera Internal Switches
CenteraClusterPools
CenteraProfiles
Monitoring
Centera HeartBeat
Cluster status
Node status
Free space of Clusters / Nodes
Reports:
Availability reports for Cluster Page 255
Prerequisites for Monitoring EMC Centera
OpManager uses CLI interface to monitor EMC Centera

Ensure that CenteraCLI software is installed in the server in which OpManager is installed (By default this is C:\Program
Files\EMC\Centera\2_4\SystemOperator\lib)
Copy the following jars to {OpManager Install Dir/classes/ directory.
C:\Program Files\EMC\Centera\2_4\SystemOperator\lib\CenteraViewer.jar
C:\Program Files\EMC\Centera\2_4\SystemOperator\_jvm\lib\jsse.jar
Ensure that OpManager is restarted (shutdown & started) after copying these JAR files.
Monitoring IBM Spectrum Virtualize

Models Supported
OpManager supports the following models:
All IBM devices with IBM Spectrum Virtualize can be monitored by adding them in this template. For Eg: IBM SVC/ Storwise, IBM
FS9100, 9150, 9110.
Pre-requisite
The default port must be 7443.�
Monitoring HP EML and ESL Tapelibraries in SAN / NAS networks

OpManager provides monitoring and management of HP EML and ESL Tapelibraries.
Models Supported
HP EML E-Series
HP ESL E-Series
Features Supported
Inventory information
Tape library
Tape Drive status
Chassis Info
Fibre Channel ports
Storage Media details
Media Access Device
Monitoring
Tape library status
Page 256
Tape drive status
Drive port status
Changer device status
Reports:
Availability reports for Tape library
Prerequisites for monitoring HP EML / ESL Tapelibrary
OpManager uses the HP SMI-S TL Provider to monitor the HP Tape Libraries

The TL provider can be installed on any server running Microsoft Windows 2000 / Windows 2003 / Windows XP / Windows
Professional.
This server must have a path through the SAN to the TL devices that will be managed.
Also the TL Provider installed server must be pingable from the server where OpManager is installed.
Start the TL Provider service hp StorageWorks SMI-S CIMServer from the Windows services menus
Monitoring Dell PV - PowerVault tape libraries

OpManager provides monitoring and management of Dell PV series tape libraries like DELL PV 132T & Dell PV 136T
Models supported
DELL PV132T
DELL PV136T
Features Supported
Tape Drives
Movers
Monitoring
Tape library status

Tape drive status
Mover status
Reports:
Availability reports for Tape library . Page 257
Tape library state

Door state
MailBox state
Error notification
Shutdown notification
Service Action Code (SAC) notification
In the RemoteManagementUnit (RMU) ensure that the SNMP agent is running.

Check if the community name is configured as public
To ensure this check the value of Public Name under Configuration tab-->SNMP Configuration area. Note: If a different
community is used, it needs to be specified when you add the device via OpManager
Details are available� in ADIC Scalar 100 User's Guide (Dell PV 136T is essentially a rebranded version of ADIC scalar 100 tape
library)
Monitoring IBM 3584 / TS 3500 tape libraries

OpManager provides monitoring and management of IBM 3584 / TS 3500 Tape Libraries.
Models Supported
IBM 3584
TS 3500
IBM ULT3582
Features Supported
Chassis details
Changer Device details
Library Fibre Channel Port details
Library SCSI Controllerdetails
Storage Media details
Media Access Device
Monitoring
Tape Library status
Page 258
SCSI Controller status
Changer Device status
Media Access Device status
Reports:
Availability reports for Tape library , Media Access Device
Prerequisites for monitoring IBM 3584 / TS 3500 Tapelibrary
Ensure that the SNMP agent is enabled in the tape library before adding the device via OpManager web-client .
The details are available in the "IBM 3584 Planning & Operator Guide" in "Chapter 4 Advanced Operating Proceedures -->
Selecting the Network Settings".
Monitoring Overland Neo series tape libraries

OpManager provides monitoring and management of Overland Neo series tape libraries like Overland Neo 2000, Overland Neo 4000.
Models Supported
Overland Neo series tape libraries like�
Overland Neo 2000

Overland Neo 4000
Features Supported
Tape Drives
Library Modules (Master module / Slave module)
Monitoring
Tape library status

Tape drive status
Library Module status
Reports:
Availability reports for Tape library.

Page 259
Tape library state
Door state
Mail Slot state
Power supply state
Tape drive state
Tape drive cleaning state
Library Module state
Prerequisites for monitoring Overland Neo series
Ensure that the SNMP agent is running.

Monitoring ADIC Scalar i2000 & 100 tape libraries

OpManager provides monitoring and management of ADIC Scalar i2000 & Scalar 100 tape libraries
Features Supported For ADIC Scalar i2000
Complete inventory information of physical components
Tape Library
Tape Drives
Monitoring
Tape library status

Tape drive status
Reports:
Sensor state change (Voltage, Temperature, Cooling)

Tape library state change
Tape drive added/removed
Media mounted /unmounted
Features Supported For ADIC Scalar 100

Complete inventory information of physical components , Page 260
Tape Library
Tape Drives
Library partitions
Movers
Monitoring
Tape library status

Tape drive status
Mover status
Reports:
Tape library state

Door state
MailBox state
Error notification
Shutdown notification
Service Action Code (SAC) notification
Prerequisites for Monitoring ADIC Scalar 100
In the RemoteManagementUnit (RMU) ensure that the SNMP agent is running.

Check if the snmp community name configured as public.
To ensure this check the value of Public Name under Configuration tab->SNMP Configuration area.
Note: If a different community is used, it needs to be specified when you add the device via OpManager.
Details are available in ADIC Scalar 100 User's Guide.
Prerequisites for Monitoring ADIC Scalar i2000

Details are available in ADIC Scalar i2000 User's Guide.
the instructions and try re-adding the device.�
Monitoring StorageTek L-series tape libraries

OpManager provides monitoring and management of STK - StorageTek L-series tape libraries like L20 , L40 & L80.
Page 261
Models Supported
L20
L40
L80
Features Supported
Complete Inventory information
Tape library
Tape Drives
Monitoring
Tape library status

Tape drive status
Reports:
Availability reports for Tape library .

Performance reports
Get fails/Retries
Label fails/Retries
Num of cartidge moves
Num of door opens , IPLs , Mounts
Put fails/ retries
Target fails/retries
Alarm generation for faulty conditions (via SNMP traps)
Tape library state

Tape drive state
CAP state
PTP state

Monitoring QualStar TLS, QLS & RLS series tape libraries

OpManager provides monitoring and management of QualStar TLS, QLS & RLS series tape libraries like TLS-1210, QLS-SDX-220 & RLS
4445. Page 262
Models Supported
Qualstar TLS series tape libraries like TLS-1210 & TLS-1220

Qualstar QLS series tape libraries like QLS-SDX-220 , QLS-4G-236
Qualstar RLS series tape libraries like RLS-4221 & RLS-4445
Features Supported
Tape Drive
Fibre Channel details
Library SCSI details
Cartidge details
LUN information for library SCSI
Monitoring
Tape library status

Tape drive status
Reports:

Tape Library status report
No of door opens
No of cartidge moves
No of picks
No of times placed
No of grips
Door Open
Unit Fault
Inventory Violation
Needs Maintenance

Refer the Q-Link (Qualstar's Remote Library Management software) user manual section "SNMP" under the chapter "Q-Link
Remote Library Manager" for details. Page 263
Monitoring Quantum - ATL tape libraries

OpManager provides monitoring and management of Quantum - ATL tape libraries - PX, P, M and DX series.
Models Supported
P series
P7000
P4000
P3000
P2000
P1000
PX series
PX502
PX506
PX510
PX720
M Series
M1500
M1800
M2500
DX Series
DX3000
DX5000
DX100
DX30
Features Supported
Tape library Inventory information

Tape library status Monitoring
Reports:
Availability reports for Tape library.
Tape library state
Page 264
Tape library availability state
Ensure that the SNMP agent is running

Has the SNMP community name configured as� "public" ?� (If a different community is used , it needs to be specified when
you add the device via OpManager.)
Monitoring Tandberg tape libraries

OpManager provides monitoring and management of Tandberg M series tape libraries.
Models Supported
M Series
M1500
M2500
Features Supported

Reports:
Tape library state


Has the SNMP community name configured as� "public" ?� (If a different community is used , it needs to be specified when
�
Page 265
Monitoring SUN StorEdge tape libraries
OpManager provides monitoring and management of SUN StorEdge L-series tape libraries.
Models Supported
L Series
140
400
1000
1800
Features Supported

Reports:
Tape library state


Have the snmp community name configured as� "public"? � (If a different community is used , it needs to be specified when
Page 266
Discovering storage devices
The topics covered under this section are:
Prerequisites For Device Discovery

Adding A Device
Adding Device Details
Prerequisites for Device discovery

The list of storage devices that are monitored by OpManager and their respective supported models, features supported and
prerequisites for monitoring are listed below.
SAN Switches Storage Arrays Tape� Libraries
Brocade Silkworm Series IBM ESS HP ESL / HP EML

McData Sphereon series HP MSA DELL
EMC Connectrix HP EVA IBM 3584 / TS� 3310 / TS� 3500
Cisco MDS series EMC CLARiiON Overland Neo
QLogic SANbox Infortrend ADIC Scalar
HP Switches NetApp StorageTek
Hitachi� Lightning Qualstar
Hitachi Thunder Quantum
Huawei Storage Tandberg
IBM DS4000 / FastT SUN StorEdge
StorageTek / LSI Logic
SUN StorEdge
Areca RAID
EMC Centera
Adding a device�
After the initial discovery, you can use 'Add Storage Device' option under Settings → Discovery� to add a new device.
�
Note: Only Admin users can add devices.
Steps for adding a Device :
Click the ‘Settings’ tab in the OpManager client.

Select ‘Discovery' tab and click on 'Add Storage Device'.
Enter the IP address of the new device.
Choose the Device Type whether it is a RAID array, FC Switch or a Tape Library.
Choose the Device model of the storage device.
Page 267
Depending on the Device model selected, enter the credential as SNMP/SMI/CLI/NetAppAPI/Storage API.
Note: If you want to add a new credential, click the 'Add Storage Credential' button on the top right corner and provide the
necessary details.
You can test the device right away from the same window by clicking the 'Test Connection' button.
Click 'Add Device' button to add it.
Adding Device details

Clicking on any device name in the Inventory tab takes you to the device snapshot page. There you can view all the operational stats
of the device in a single pane and also its basic details such as IP Address, Device vendor and model, Firmware version, and so on.
To edit the device details
1. Go to the Inventory tab, click on ‘Storage’ and then click on the device whose details you want to edit.
2. In the device snapshot page that is opened, click on the three-line menu button on the top-right corner of the screen and
select ‘Edit Device Details’.
3. Here, you can change the details of the device namely IP Address, Display name and the monitoring interval.
Note: Only Admin users can add and edit device details.
Page 268
Fault Monitoring And Escalation
�
The traps and other notifications from the devices are received by the software and are converted into events and alarms.
Depending of the criticality of the fault condition, each event and alarm is assigned a severity ranging from critical to clear. Each
severity is given a specific color for easy visual identification.
OpManager actively monitors the faulty events and reports or escalates the faults to the user, administrator, or any other person via
email or SMS.
Alarms are widely classified into two types : Device status-based alarms and threshold-based alarms.
The topics covered under this section are :
Viewing Alarms
Viewing Alarm Details
Alarm Operations
Escalate Unattended Alarms
Viewing alarms
You can view all the alarms in a single console under ‘Alarms’ tab. Here, the alarms related to storage can be found by clicking 'Filter
→ Storage Alarms' from the 'Sort by category' pane.
This tab displays all the alarms with their source, status, date & time, and message. It displays a maximum of 500 alarms in a page,
and you can use the navigation buttons on the bottom of the page to view the other alarms. Each column heading is a link, which
when clicked, sorts the alarms based on that column.
You can go to the alarm details page with a single click. To see the details of the device that caused an alarm, click on the source link
of the alarm. To see the details of the alarm, click the message of the alarm.
Just above the table on the top right corner there are options to acknowledge, clear, or delete alarms. To do any of these operations,
select the specific alarms, and clicking on the corresponding link.
You can even view the alarms depending on the criteria like Severity, Category or alarms generated between a specific time
period.� For this, you can just click on the relevant heading on the alarms pane, and the alarms will be sorted based on that criteria.
Page 269
If needed, you can export the same to HTML, PDF, Excel sheet and CSV formats.
Viewing alarm details

Clicking on the message link in an alarm brings you to the alarm details page.
Alarm details page shows :
Message - The warning message in the specified alarm.

Status - The status of that alarm (Attention, Trouble, Critical or Clear).
Date & Time - The date and time at which the alarm was triggered.
To see details of the device that caused the alarm, click on the source link.
Just above the table there are options to acknowledge, clear, delete, and annotate alarms.
To take ownership of the alarm, click 'Acknowledge'. You can also revert the acknowledgement by using the 'Unacknowledge'
button.
To add comments to the alarm, click 'Add note' (The plus icon).
To ping and test the concerned device manually, click 'Ping' (The sync icon).
To perform a traceroute on the device, click 'Trace Route'.
To clear the alarm, click on 'Clear' (The tick icon).
To delete the icon, click on 'Delete' (The trashcan icon).
Alarm Operations
Acknowledging Alarms :
OpManager provides an option for the users to pick and own alarms that they work on. This helps in avoiding multiple users working
on a single alarm.
Alarms can be acknowledged in two ways.
Page 270
1. In the 'Alarms' tab, select the checkbox before the specific alarm and click ‘Acknowledge’. This option is available only for Admin
users.
2. In the alarm details page, click ‘Acknowledge’.
By doing one of the two actions above, the user becomes the owner of the particular alarm.
To unacknowledge an alarm, click ‘Unacknowledge’ in the specific alarm details page. The alarm ownership gets removed.
Annotating Alarms :
In case of a user wants to add more details on a particular alarm, he can annotate the same in the alarm. This will be useful for later
reference.
To annotate an alarm, click ‘Add note’ link in the specific alarm details page and add the content in the text-box. The annotation will
get added in the alarm notes table.
Clearing alarms :
After fixing the fault condition in the device, the particular alarm can be cleared by the user, so that its status becomes clear.
To clear an alarm, click ‘Clear’ link in the specific alarm details page. The severity of the alarm will change to clear.
Deleting alarms :
After fixing the fault condition in the device, the particular alarm can be deleted by the user, if he feels that the record need not be
maintained.
To delete an alarm, click ‘Delete’ link in the specific alarm details page. The alarm and its related events will get deleted permanently.
Escalate unattended alarms

When some alarms are not attended for a particular time-period, it needs to be escalated to the administrator or the IT manager
(based on need). For example, you get a critical alarm for a tape library and the fault condition is not resolved within 6 hours, it might
cause a major problem in the operation of the storage infrastructure. Such alarms can be escalated and quick action can be taken to
avoid any major problem.
To add an alarm escalation rule :
From web client go to Settings → Configuration → Alarm Escalation rules.

Click on 'Add Rule'.
Enter a name for the new rule.
Provide all the details for the escalation rule.
Finally provide the contact details of the people that have to be notified. You can provide either.
Enter the time duration in which the above rule has to be checked.
Click ‘Add Rule’.
The rule gets added in the table in the page. You can disable the rule by clicking on the green icon inside the modify rule window.
To modify an alarm escalation rule :
Click the name link of the rule that needs to be modified.

The configured values are shown in the form below.
Page 271
You can edit the required values and click ‘Save’.
To delete an alarm escalation rule :
Click the trash-can icon against the particular rule, in the escalation rules table.
Page 272
Storage reports
OpManager helps you get crucial insights on the performance of your network storage using intuitive reports. Reports help you with
both real-time monitoring and historical stat analysis of your network.
Some of the storage reports available are:
Storage Summary reports: Know the overall status of yor network's storage devices with this report.
RAID Capacity Utilisation: Know how much your RAID disks have been utilised, with Max, Min and Avg values for each storage.
RAID IOPS: View the number of Input/Output Operations per second (IOPS) for your RAID disks.
RAID Latency: Know the latency in your network storage so that you can understand the overall accessibility of your disks. These
reports are very useful to find performance bottlenecks.
Disk IOPS: Know the IOPS stats for your storage disks.
RAID Forecast by utilisation: Know when your storage might reach 80%, 90% and 100% of its capacity with this report.
It predicts the storage space availability using the current usage rate and usage growth rate, helping you to avoid any kind of
data loss due to delay in disk addition.
RAID Reads/Sec: Rate of read operations on the RAID storage per second with Max, min and Avg values
RAID Writes/Sec: Rate of write operations on the RAID storage per second with Max, min and Avg values
RAID Controller IOPS: Number of input/output operations per second on your RAID controller
RAID Controller Reads/sec: Number of read operations per second on your RAID controller
RAID Controller Writes/sec: Number of write operations per second on your RAID controller
Disk Reads/sec: Number of read operations per second on individual disks in your storage
Disk Writes/sec: Number of write operations per second on individual disks in your storage
Growth trend: Detailed stats on growth trend in your storage including utilization, growth rate percentage, growth rate per day
and average future utilization
More reports for storage monitoring are available under Reports ? Storage Reports.
Create Custom Dashboards Page 273
The dashboard customization feature in OpManager helps you to create your own dashboard and view desired performance metrics and reports at a glance.
Now, a user can create and share dashboards with other users.
Note: For an operator to create custom dashboards, admin user has to first enable the 'Create dashboard for Operator' option.
To enable this feature go to Settings ? System settings. Under General, select Enable the Allow dashboard creation for operator.
1. Click on Dashboard. In the top right corner of the screen, click on the icon with + symbol. Create New Dashboard page opens [screen shots given below].
2. Name: Enter a unique name for the dashboard.
3. Description: Enter a description about the dashboard.
4. Click Next.
5. Select Widget(s) from the list of widget categories. You could use the search bar to find the widget.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the user(s) whom you wish to share the dashboard with (Refer to the table below for privilege-based actions on custom dashboards).
Page 274
8. You can associate the dashboards with either of the following
All admins and/or all operators (or)

You can manually select individual users.
Note: When you select all admins, all operators or both, the dashboard will be associated with existing users as well as future users in the selected group.
9. After selected users to be associated, click on create. A new dashboard is created and listed on the My Dashboard page.
Privilege-based actions allowed for admins/operators on custom dashboards

The role-based sharing/editing actions that can be performed by the admin/operator on custom dashboards have been tabulated below.
Action Admin Operator
Create dashboard Available Available
Dashboard association Can associate with all users. Can associate with other
authority operators only
Edit/Modify Widget On dashboards of all users. On dashboards created by

self
Delete widget / Delete Can delete self-created and Can delete self-created
Dashboard associated dashboards dashboards
View dashboard All Only Self-created and

associated dashboards
To Add/Remove Widgets from Default Dashboard:
1. Go to Settings > General Settings > System Settings.

2. Enable the Add/Remove Widgets from Default Dashboard option.
Page 275
Delete Dashboard
To delete a dashboard, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Dashboard > My Dashboard page

2. Click Delete icon of the Dashboard that you want to delete. A confirmation window pops-up.
3. Click OK to confirm deleting.
Adding New Widgets Page 276
To add a new widget to a dashboard follow the steps given below:
1. Click on� Dashboard. Click on the green colored icon at the top right of the menu bar. Select the dashboard you want to add widgets to from from� My
Dashboards. If you want to know the steps to create a new custom dashboard, click here
2. Click on� Add Widgets� seen at the bottom� of the page.
3. Select the Widget(s) that you want to add to the dashboard.
4. Click� Add� button to add the selected widget(s) to the dashboard.
Editing Widgets
To modify the existing widgets go through the steps given below:
1. Click on the� Edit� against the widget on which you wish to modify the fields.
2. Modify the required fields.
3. Click Save� to effect the changes.
�
Page 277
Embedding widgets
The embed widget feature lets you� embed a dashboard widget with its realtime data on� any webpage. To embed a widget into your webpage, simply copy
and paste the code snippet into the HTML of the website� where you want it to be displayed.�
The following are the steps to obtain the code snippet to embed a widget:
1. Click on the embed widget icon in the top right of the widget.
2. Copy the code snippet.
3. Paste the code snippet into the HTML of the webpage.
Page 278
Note: The regenerate private link option generates a new authentication key for a widget. If you click on this option,
the previously generated code snippet for the widget will no longer be valid.
Deleting widgets
To delete a widget go through the steps given below:
1. Click on Delete� icon available on the widget box.� A confirmation window pops up.
2. Click OK to confirm deleting the widget.
�
�
�
Page 279
Page 280
Adding New NOC View/CCTV
NOC View or CCTV helps you view only the required dashboards repeatedly at required intervals. To add a new NOC view follow the
steps given below:
1. Go to Dashboard page and click NOC views.

2. Click Create NOC View. New NOC page opens.
3. Name: Enter a unique NOC name.
4. Refresh Interval: Select the interval required to switch over to the next dashboard.
5. Description: Enter a brief description about this NOC view.
6. Select the desired dashboards that you want to include in this NOC view.
7. Click Create NOC View.
8. A new NOC view has been added.
Viewing NOC
Page 281
To view a NOC view, go to Dashboard page > NOC Views > Click on the name of the NOC that you want to view. That particular NOC
view opens in a new window.
Editing NOC
To edit a NOC view follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Dashboard > NOC Views on the top right > Click on the edit icon against the NOC name that you want to edit.
2. Make the necessary changes.
3. Click Edit NOC View to effect the changes.
Embedding a NOC view

To embed a NOC view link, follow the steps below.
Page 282
1. Go to the Dashboard page and click NOC Views on the top right.
2. Click the Embed icon present next to the NOC Name. The Embed link will be displayed.
3. Click the link to copy it to your clipboard. The NOC Embed link is ready to be shared.
4. Click the Regenerative Private link icon present towards the bottom of the Embed link box to generate a new embed link. This
will deactivate the embedded link generated previously.
Note:
The NOC embed URL allows a viewer to modify or customize it as per his/her requirements. However, the change will not be
saved on the server. If any new user accesses the same NOC view using the embed link, he/she will be loaded with the default
version.
Page 283
Menu Tab Customization
By default, OpManager comes with features arranged into menus and submenus based on their functionality. You can now fully
customize the default menu layout using the Menu Tab customization option in a matter of minutes. Click on the three dots at the
top right corner to access the Menu Tab Customization options and start customizing your menu as per your preferences.
1. Drag and drop menu / submenu tabs
The menu and submenu buttons can be rearranged. To do this, click the Edit button on the right corner and dragging the menu /
submenu that you want to rearrange to its desired location. Click Yes to save the changes.
2. Add a menu / submenu tabs (with URL / Embed URL in it)
To create an additional menu / submenu, click the Edit option and select the Plus icon. You can now create a new menu/sub menu
from one of the two types.
URL - Enter an URL of your choice. Choosing this option will open the entered URL in a new browser tab.
Embed - Add an URL of your preference. Choosing this option will open the specified URL in an embedded view within the
product.
Note: The page will not be displayed if the embedded page has an X-Frame-Options header that is set to restrict
embedding in the frame.
Page 284
3. Hide default menu / submenu tabs
The default menu / submenu that is present and cannot be deleted. However, they can be hidden.
To hide the default menu/sub menu, choose Edit and select the Visibility icon (eye shaped) that is present in the top left corner of all
the default menu/sub menu tabs. when you click on it, the tab becomes faded out. (which means this tab is hidden) Click Yes to
confirm the changes.
Click the eye icon on the faded out tab to make it visible again.
Note: Only default tabs can be hidden.
4. Delete custom menu / submenu tabs
To delete a menu / submenu that was created by you, click the edit option and click on the red cross on the top right corner of the
tab. This will delete the respective tab. Press Yes to save progress.
The default menu / submenu cannot be deleted. However, they can be hidden by clicking on the eye icon present at the top left
corner of the tabs.
5. Rename the menu / submenu tabs
To rename the menu / submenu tabs, click on Edit and select the Pencil icon on the tab whose name has to be changed. Enter the
new name and click the save button.
6. Reset Default menu / submenu tabs
Choose Reset Default to restore default settings of all the menu / submenu. This will erase all the custom tabs created by that
particular user.
Press Yes to confirm reverting to default settings.
7. Customize user-specific menu / submenu with that user login
The changes made in the menu/submenu are mapped to the particular user who has made them. The next time this particular user
logs in, all their saved preferences will be loaded.
Note: Admin user cannot set a defined menu / submenu for any user.
Page 285
Page 286
Client Settings
Change Password
To change the Login Password, click Client Settings icon > Change Password
Provide the Current Password
Provide the New Password
Provide the new password again in Re-type password
Click Save
Change Language
OpManager is available in English, Spanish, Chinese Simplified, Japanese, French, German, Korean and Italian languages. The
following are the steps to change OpManager from one language to other supported language.
To change the OpManager language, click Client Settings icon > Language Selector
Select your preferred language
Keyboard Shortcuts for Quick Navigation

Click Client Settings icon > Keyboard Shortcuts
ALT + C Clear Alarm

ALT + H Home Dashboard
ALT + S Server Dashboard
ALT + N Network Dashboard
ALT + SHIFT + I IPAM Dashboard
ALT + I Inventory
ALT + W Workflow
ALT + M Maps
ALT + V Virtualization
ALT + L Group Chat
ALT + SHIFT + A About
ALT + Q Submit Query
CTRL + ALT + 1 View Logs
ALT + SHIFT + S Screenshot feedback
ServiceDesk Plus Integration

ServiceDesk Plus software can be integrated with OpManager using this shortcut
To integrate ServiceDesk Plus with OpManager, click Client Settings icon > ServiceDesk Plus
Page 287
Configure all the required parameters
Click Save
To send a screenshot feedback to OpManager support
To send a screenshot feedback to OpManager support, click Client Settings icon > Screenshot Feedback
Alternatively, you can use the keyboard shortcut Alt + SHIFT + S
Screenshot of the selected portion of the screen will be taken and a text box will appear on top to add the feedback. Enter the
feedback
Click Submit
To sign out as current user from OpManager client
To sign out as current user from OpManager client, click Client Settings icon > Sign Out
Page 288
Workflow Execution Logs
Workflow Logs provide the ouput of the executed workflows. It provides the result as well the data of each task that had been
included in the workflow.
To view Workflow logs
Click on Workflows from the left pane and select Workflow Logs. Workflow output for each of the associated device is listed
along with the executed date & time and numnber of tasks.
Severity
Each task once executed is logged with its severity for understanding its execution status. Following are the severities in Workflow:
Info: Notifies a task has been executed successfully.

Error: Notifies a task has been failed.
Warning: Notifies that a task cannot be performed. Eg.: A delete file action cannot be performed when the directory does not
have the specified file. In such cases, the delete file actions is marked as warning
Page 289
Workflow Tasks
Tasks are nothing but checks and actions that help you automate IT actions that are repetitive.
Checks:
Checks are if-else condition based. If the condition is passed/satisfied, the workflow executes the set of actions associated on the
success part, executes the other set of actions associated on the failure part. Example: Consider that you have created a workflow
with Test a Service, Send Mail, and Start a Service tasks. Send Mail is associated on the success part of Test a Service, and Start a
Service is associated on the part. If the service is running, workflow executes Send Mail task to notify the admin that the service is
running, else executes Start a Service task to start the service.
Actions:
An action just performs the said activity. Tasks such as start a service, delete file, reboot system are action tasks. If an action task is
executed successfully, workflow executes the next successive task. If an action task fails, action task associated on the failure part is
executed. Example: Consider that you have created a workflow with 2 action tasks� - Start Process and List All Process. List All
Process is associated to the success part of the Start Process task. When the workflow is executed, in case if the Start Process task
fails, workflow looks for the task associated on the failure section. If no task is found, the workflow executes the task in the success
section i.e., List All Process.
Conditions and Actions available in Workflow
Device
Checks Description
DNS Lookup Executes a DNS lookup command on the end device.
Ping Device Sends ICMP packets to the end device.
Trace Route Executes a trace route command on the end device.
Actions �
Add a Time Delay Adds a delay to the execution of an action
Reboot System
Reboots the system
Shut Down System Shuts down the system
� �
Windows Service
Check �
Test a Service Tests whether a service is running or not.
Actions �
Get Active Services Provides a list of service that are currently running.
Pause a Service Pauses a service.
Restart Service Restarts a service.
Resume a Service Resumes a service.
Start a Service Starts a service.
Stop a Service Stops a service.
� �
Process
Page 290
Check �
Test a Process Test whether a process is running or not.
Actions �
List All Processes Lists all the processes that currently running.
Processes by Disk Read Lists processes by Disk Read.
Processes by Disk Lists processes by Disk Write.
Write
Processes by Memory Lists processes by Memory usage.
Usage
Processes by CPU Lists processes by CPU usage.
Usage
Start Process Starts a process.
Stop Process Stops a process.
� �
HTTP & FTP
Check �
Check URL Test the availability of a URL.
Actions �
FTP Delete File Deletes a file via FTP.

FTP Move File Moves a file within the same remote device via FTP.
FTP Rename File Renames a files via FTP.
FTP Upload File Writes the given content in a file (.txt) and uploads it to the remote device via FTP.
HTTP Post Data/Result Posts the output received upon querying an URL, in the workflow logs.
� �
File
Checks �
Check File Checks the availability of a file.
Get File Size Gets the size of a file.
Actions �
Compress Files Files are compressed with Windows Compression.
Compress Older Files Files which are not used for a long time are compressed with Windows Compression. You can configure
the age of the files.
Copy File Copies file to another directory within the same device.
Delete File Deletes a file.
Delete Older Files Deletes the files which are not used for a long time. Also deletes older files in sub folders. You can
configure the age of the files.
Move File Moves the files to another directory within the same device.
Move Older Files Moves the files which are not used for a long time to another directory within the same device. You can
configure the age of the files. Page 291
Rename File Renames a file.

Uncompress File Uncompresses a file.
� �
Folder
Checks �
Check Drive Free Space Checks for free space available in a drive.
Get Folder Size Gets the size of a folder.
Actions �
Compress Folder Compresses a folder.
Copy Folder Copies the folder to another local directory.
Create Folder Creates a folder.
Delete Folder Deletes a folder.
List Files List the files available in a folder.
Move Folder Moves a folder to another location.
Rename Folder Renames a folder.
Uncompress Folder Uncompresses a folder.
� �
VMware
Actions �
Power Off VM Turns off the power to a VM.
Power On VM Turns on the power to a VM.
Reboot Guest OS Restarts a VM.
Refresh Datastore Refreshes the datastore.
Reset VM Resets a VM abruptly.
Shut Down Guest OS Shuts down a VM.
Stand by Guest OS Puts a VM in the Stand By mode.
Suspend VM Suspends a VM.
Take snapshot Takes a snapshot of the current state of the VM server.
� �
OpManager
Check �
Check Device Status Checks the availability status of a device.
Actions �
Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledges an alarm.
Add Alarm Note Adds a note to an alarm.
Clear Alarm Clears an alarm.
Page 292
Delete Alarm Deletes an alarm.
Exit Maintenance Moves the device under maintenance mode to normal.
Generate Alarm Generates an alarm in OpManager.
Place on Maintenance Puts the device on maintenance mode.
Rediscover Device Rediscovers a device and automatically updates all device related details.
Unacknowledge Alarm Unacknowledges an alarm.
� �
External Actions
Actions �
Execute Another Executes another workflow as an action.
Workflow
Execute Linux Script Executes a script on the end Linux devices.
Execute Windows Executes a script from the installed server on OpManager.
Script
Log a Ticket (Remedy) Creates a ticket in BMC Remedy.
Log a Ticket Creates a ticket in ManageEngine ServiceDesk Plus/ ServiceNow respectively.
(SDP/ServiceNow)
Send Email Sends a notification via Email. Ensure that you have configured Mail server settings.
Send Popup Message Sends a notification via a pop-up on the end device. At present Workgroup devices alone are supported.
Send SMS Sends a notification via SMS. Ensure that you have configured SMS server settings.
Send Slack Message Sends a notification in Slack as per the given condition.
� �
NCM Actions
Actions �
Backup Takes backup of device configuration files
Execute Command Executes a command on the end device
Execute Template Executes a template created in NCM Plug-in on the end device
Get Last N Changes Fetches the last N configuration changes made
DNS Lookup:
DNS Lookup executes a DNS lookup command on the end device and provides its status.
Parameter Description
Name Display name for the task.
Destination Device Device on which the task has to be executed. Click on the select devices icon to select the
device. If no device is selected, it will be executed on the device selected in the Info tab.
Ping Device:
Sends ICMP packets to test whether the device is responding.
Page 293
Name Display name for the task
Destination Device Device on which the task has to be executed. Click on the select device icon to select the
device or use ${DeviceName} variable. ${DeviceName} will be replaced with the name of
the device that is selected in the Info-> Devices, during the workflow execution.
Number of requests Number of ping requests you want to send.
Packet Size Size of the ping packets.
Timeout Timeout interval for the ping requests.
Retries Number of retries for the ping operation.
Trace Route:
Executes a trace route command on the end device.
Name Display name for the task
device.
Add a Time Delay:

Adds a delay to the execution of the subsequent operation.
Duration Time delay to carry out the subsequent task. You can configure time delay in hours,
minutes, and seconds. Select the required one from the dropdown menu.
Reboot System:
Reboots a remote Windows machine.
device.
Shut Down System:
Logs off, shuts down, reboots or powers off a remote Windows device forcefully.
Page 294
device. You can also log off by selecting the Log Off action from the dropdown.
Options Select the action (Log off, Shut down, Reboot or Power off) that you want to carryout on the
remote device.
Test a Service
Tests whether a service is running or not.
device.�
Service Name Name of the service that you want to task whether it is running or not. Use the dropdown
menu to select the service. If the service is not listed, use the discover icon to discover the
services running the device.
Supported Variable:
${Alarm.ServiceName} - Select this option if you want to retrieve the service name from the
alarm entity. If the workflow is triggered from the service down alarm, then this variable is
replaced by the servicename from the alarm entity during runtime.
Note: If multiple services down alarm is triggered, this task will be executed for all those
services.
� Get Active Services
Provides the list of active services running in the device.
device.�
Pause/Restart/Resume/Start/Stop a Service
Pauses/Restarts/Resumes/Starts/Stops a service.
device.�
Service Name Name of the service that you want to pause/restart/resume/start/stop. Use the dropdown
Page 295
menu to select the service. If the service is not listed, use the discover icon to discover the
services running the device.
Supported Variable:
${Alarm.ServiceName} - Select this option if you want to retrieve the service name from the
alarm entity. If the workflow is triggered from the service down alarm, then this variable is
replaced by the servicename from the alarm entity during runtime.
Note: If multiple services down alarm is triggered, this task will be executed for all those
services.
Test a Process
Tests whether a process is running or not.
device.� �
Process Name Name of the process that you want to test. Either you can enter the process name right
away (Eg.:mysqld-nt.exe) or you can use the select icon to select the process from the
remote devices.
Path This field is optional. If you want to match the path also, then check the checkbox near path
field and specify the full executable path with process name. Otherwise leave this field
empty.
Eg.: C:Program FilesMySQLMySQL Server 5.0binmysqld-nt.exe
Arguments This field is also optional. If you want to match the arguments, then check the checkbox
near arguments field and specify the arguments. Otherwise leave this field empty.
Eg.: --defaults-file="my.ini"
� List All Processes/Processes by Disk Read/Processes by Disk Write/Processes by Memory Usage/Processes by CPU Usage
Provides the list of active services, processes by disk read/disk write/Memory usage/CPU usage.
device.
Start Process
Starts a process.
device. Page 296
Start Directory The directory from where you want to execute the process.
Process Command Command to start the process.
Stop Process
Stops a process running on a device.
device.
Process Name Name of the process that you want to test. Either you can enter the process name right
away (Eg.:mysqld-nt.exe) or you can use the select icon to select the process from the
remote devices.
Path This field is optional. If you want to match the path while terminating the process, then
check the checkbox near path field and specify the full executable path with process name.
Otherwise leave this field empty.
Ex: C:Program FilesMySQLMySQL Server 5.0binmysqld-nt.exe
Note:� If the checkbox is unchecked and multiple instance of process is running with the
same name, all the processes will be terminated.
Arguments This field is also optional. If you want to match the arguments when terminating the
process, select the checkbox near arguments field and specify the arguments. Otherwise
leave this field empty.
Ex: --defaults-file="my.ini"
Note:� If the checkbox is unchecked and multiple instance of process is running with the
same name, all the processes will be terminated.
Check URL
Check whether the URL for its availability.
URL Address Address of the HTTP URL that has to be queried.
Supported Variables :
${Alarm.URLAddress} -� will retrieve the URLAddress from the alarm entity, if� workflow
is triggered through alarm. Otherwise nothing will happen.
Form Method: Get or Post OpManager tests the URL via Get or Post method. Select the appropriate condition.
Search and Match Content The content specified here is verified for its presence in the web page.
Timeout Timeout interval for the URL. Default value is 25 seconds. Click on check now button to
verify the URL. Page 297
URL Authorization Details Provide the username and password for URLs that require authentication.
Check Now Checks whether the URL is accessible with the entered details.
FTP Delete File
Deletes a file via FTP.
FTP Server Name of the FTP Server. You can enter the ftp server name directly or use '${DeviceName}'
variable. '${DeviceName} will be replaced with the name device selected in the Info tab,
during the workflow execution.
FTP Username Username of the FTP server.
FTP Password Password to connect to the FTP server.
File Name Name of the file to be deleted. Enter the file name with the path.
FTP Move File
Move a file to another directory within the same system via FTP.
File Name Name of the file to be moved. Enter the file name with the path.
Destination Folder Destination folder where the file to has to be moved. Enter the path.
FTP Rename File
Renames a file via FTP.
Source File Name of the file to be renamed. Enter the file name with the path.
Eg.:/root/OpManager/backup/Backup_DB.zip Page 298
New Name New name for the file. Eg.: Backup_DB_Old.zip
FTP Upload File
Writes the given content in a file (.txt) and uploads it to the remote device via FTP.
Directory Directory where the file has to be uploaded.
Content Content/value that has to be uploaded
HTTP Post Data/Result
Posts the output received upon querying an URL, in the workflow logs.
URL Address Address of the HTTP URL that has to be queried.
${Alarm.URLAddress} -� will retrieve the URLAddress from the alarm entity, if� workflow
is triggered through alarm. Otherwise nothing will happen.
Form Method: Get or Post OpManager tests the URL via Get or Post method. Select the appropriate condition.
Search and Match Content The content specified here is verified for its presence in the web page.
Timeout Timeout interval for the URL. Default value is 25 seconds. Click on check now button to
verify the URL.
URL Authorization Details Provide the username and password for URLs that require authentication.
Check Now Checks whether the URL is accessible with the entered details.
Post Data The content specified here will be displayed in the execution logs.
${URLAddress} - will replace the address specified in the URL Address field.
${Result} - will replace the response obtained from the URL Address.
Check File�
Checks the existence of a file in the specified path.

Page 299
File Name Name of the file that has to be checked for its existence. Specify the file name with its path.
Get File Size

Checks the file for its size and execute tasks accordingly.
File Name Name of the file that has to checked for its size. Specify the file name with its path.
File Size The size of the file is compared with the value specified here. According to the condition
(greater or lesser than) selected the actions are executed.
Compress File/Delete File
Compresses a file with Windows Compression/Deletes a file.
File Name Name of the file that has to be compressed/deleted. Specify the file name with its path.
Compress Older Files/Delete Older Files
Compresses older files with Windows Compression/deletes older files.
Folder Name Folder that contains the old files. Specify the folder path. Note: Delete older files option,
deletes the older files in the sub folders also.
Files Older Than Files older than the specified number of months/days/hours are compressed/deleted.
�
Copy File/Move File
Page 300
Copies/moves a file from one folder to another within the same computer.
File Name Name of the file that has to be copied/moved to another folder. Specify the file name with
its path.You can use the wild card character * (eg.: stderr*.txt) to do the action on all the
files. You can also enter multiple files separated by a comma.
Destination Folder Name of the folder where the file has to be pasted/moved. Specify the folder path.
Move Older Files
Moves files that match the age specified to another folder.
Source Folder Folder that contains the old files. Specify the folder path.
Destination Folder Folder to which the old files have to be moved to.
Files Older Than Files older than the specified number of months/days/hours are moved.
Rename File
Renames a file.�
Source File Name Specify the source file name to be renamed
Eg.: C:Program FilesOpManagerbackupBackup_DB.zip
New Name New name for the file.
Eg.: Backup_DB_Old.zip
Uncompress File
Uncompresses a file that had been compressed with Windows Compression.

Page 301
File Name Name of the file that has to be uncompressed. Specify the file name with its path. You can
use the wild card character * (eg.: stderr*.txt) to do the action on all the files. You can also
enter multiple files separated by a comma.
Check Drive Free Space
Checks the free space available in a drive.
Drive Name Name of the drive that has to checked for free space.
Drive Size The size of the drive is compared with the value (GB/MB/KB) specified here. According to
the condition (greater or lesser than) selected the actions are executed.
Check Folder Exists�
Checks the existence of a folder in the specified path.
File Name Name of the folder that has to be checked for its existence. Specify the folder path.
Get Folder Size
Checks the free space available in a drive.
Folder Name Name of the folder that has to checked for its size.
Folder Size The size of the drive is compared with the value (GB/MB/KB) specified here. According to
the condition (greater or lesser than) selected the actions are executed. Page 302
Compress /Uncompress/Delete Folder
Compresses/uncompresses/deletes a folder.
Folder Name Folder that has to be compressed/uncompressed/deleted. Specify the folder path.
Create Folder
Creates a folder in the computer.
Folder Name Name of the folder that has to be created. Specify the folder name with its path.
Copy Folder/Move Folder
Copies/moves a folder to another folder within the same computer.�
Folder Name Name of the folder that has to be copied/moved to another folder. Specify the file name
with its path.
Destination Folder Name of the destination folder where the source folder has to be pasted/moved. Specify
the folder path.
List Files
List the files available in a folder.
Page 303
Folder Name Name of the folder whose files has to be listed. Specify the folder path.
Rename Folder
Renames a folder.
Source Folder Specify the source folder name to be renamed
Eg.: C:OpManagerlogs
New Name New name for the folder.
Eg.: logs_old
Add Alarm Note
Adds note to an alarm.
Note Note that has to be added to the alarm.
${Result} - will be replaced with the previously executed task's result.
Generate Alarm
Generates an alarm in OpManager.
Source Note that has to be added to the alarm.
${Result} - will be replaced with the previously executed task's result.
Severity Select the severity of the alarm.
Message Message that you want to display in the alarm.
Alarm Code Unique string used to trigger the event. Eg:-Threshold-DOWN
Entity Uniquely identifies the failure object within the source.Events will be correlated into alarms
Page
according to the entity field. Multiple events with the same entity will be grouped as a304
single alarm.
Event Type Description of the event type
Execute Linux Script
Execute script on remote Linux machines and retrieves the output. Depending on the input, this script will either execute from
OpManager server or from remote machine. Its success/failure is decided based on its exit code. If the script returns with the exit
code 0, then it is consider as success, any other value is consider as failure.
Eg.: For shell script,

exit(0) --� Success
exit(1)� -- Failure
exit(-2) -- Failure
Command Line Specify the command used to execute the script.
Eg.: sh ${FileName} ${DeviceName} arg1
Here, ${FileName} variable is a must to execute the script. OpManager will replace this
variable during runtime.
${DeviceName} - will replace the executing devicename during runtime.
${UserName} -� � will replace the device username if already given for this device.
${Password} - will replace the device password if already given for this device.
Script Body The actual script that has to be executed.
Advanced Click on Advanced button to configure the following fields.
Execute from Remote Machine If this option is checked, the script is pushed to remote machine and will be executed.
Otherwise it will be executed from OpManager server.
Working Directory Specify the directory from where you want to execute the script.
${UserHomeDir}� - will replace the user's home directory during runtime.
${TempDir} - will replace device temp directory during runtime. Eg: /tmp
Response Timeout Time to wait for the script to complete its execution. The default value given here is 60
seconds.
Execute Windows Script
Script execution is done by the OpManager server on the destination Windows machines and retrieves the output. Its success/failure
is decided based on its exit code.
If the script returns with� the exit code 0, it is consider as success, any other value is consider as a failure.
Page 305
Eg.: for VBscript:
WScript.Quit(0) -- Success
WScript.Quit(1) -- Failure
WScript.Quit(-2) -- Failure
Command Line Specify the command used to execute the script.
Eg. : cscript ${FileName}.vbs ${DeviceName} ${UserName} ${Password} arg1
Here, ${FileName} variable is must to execute the script.� OpManager will replace this
variable during runtime.
${DeviceName} - will replace the executing devicename druing runtime.
${UserName} -� � will replace the device username if already given for this device.
${Password} - will replace the device password if already given for this device.
Script Body The actual script that has to be executed.
Advanced Click on Advanced button to configure the following fields.
Working Directory Specify the directory from where you want to execute the script.
${UserHomeDir}� - will replace the user's home directory during runtime.
${TempDir} - will replace OpManager temporary directory during runtime. �
Response Timeout Timeout interval for the response from the device for the script execution status.
Log a Ticket (Remedy)
Logs a ticket in BMC Remedy.
Name Display name for the ticket.
From Email ID Email ID of the sender.
Service Desk Mail ID Email ID of BMC Remedy service desk.
Impact Select the impact level of the ticket.
Urgency Select the severity of the ticket.
Summary Add summary for quick understanding of the issue reported.
Description Describe the issue.
Log a Ticket (SDP)

Logs a ticket in ManageEngine ServiceDesk Plus. Ensure that ServiceDesk Plus is integrated with OpManager.
Page 306
Name Display name for the ticket.
Category Select the appropriate category for the ticket.
Sub Category Select the appropriate sub category.
Item Select the appropriate item.
Priority Select the priority level of the ticket.
Group Select the group.
Technician Select the technician to whom you want to assign the ticket.
Title Subject of the ticket. You can use variables.
Description Describe the issue. You can use variables.
Send Mail
Sends a mail to the email IDs specified. This is useful to notify the result/completion of a task in the workflow.
From Email ID Email ID of the sender.
To Mail ID Email ID of of the recipients.
Mail Format Email can be sent in plain text or html or in both the formats. Select the required format.
Subject Subject of the email. You can use variables.
Message Content of the email. You can use variables.
Send Popup Message
Opens a popup window with the given message on remote computers.
Message Message that has to be displayed in the popup.
Send SMS
Sends SMS notifications to the mobile number specified. This is useful to notify the result/completion of a task in the workflow.
device or use ${DeviceName} variable. ${DeviceName} will be replaced with thePage name 307
of
Message Message that has to be sent as an SMS. Message should not exceed 160 characters.
Send Slack Message
Destination The message can be sent to a single member or to a specific channel.
Channel Select the specific channel for which you want to share the message.
Message Title A suitable title for the message can be given.
Message Description Enter the entire message in the description box.
Variables:
Variables are used to append dynamic values in a field of a task. Following are the variables:
${DeviceName} - Name of the device to which workflow has to be associated. Can be used in all fields
${WorkflowName} - Name of the Workflow that is to triggered. Can be used in all fields.
${Result} - Result of previous task.
${Alarm.ServiceName} - Name of the service for which an alarm is raised.
${URLAddress} - URL address
${Alarm.URLAddress} - URL address for which an alarm is raised.
${UserName} - Username of the device.
${Password} - Password of the device.
${Device.DisplayName} - Display name of the device for which an alarm is raised.
${Alarm.ProcessName} - Name of the process for which an alarm is raised.
$message - Alarm message will be displayed
Using Variables
Variables can be better understood with an example. Following is the workflow that has to be triggered as an action whenever a
service down alarm is raised.
Page 308
Task 1: 'Test a service' task is created to test the service that is down. When the workflow is triggered, the variable
${Alarm.ServiceName`} is replaced with the name of the service that has gone down. ${DeviceName} is replaced with the name of
device
Task 2: The result of previous task (service up or down) is added as notes to the alarm using ${Result} variable.
Page 309
Page 310
Adding a Workflow
To add a workflow, follow the steps given below:
1. Click on Workflow� and select� New Workflow.

2. Drag and drop the required conditions and actions from the left panel to editor panel.
1. Enter a Name for the condition and actions.

2. To edit or delete a condition or action, click on it and select edit or delete icon.�
�
1. Click Trigger� at the top of the page.�
Page 311
2. Associate the workflow to the devices.
a. Click on the� Devices tab.
b. Select the devices in Available Devices column and move to Selected devices column. Use the search box to search the devices.
c. Click Next
3. Configure the alarm trigger to trigger a workflow when an alarm is raised or configure a schedule trigger� if you want to schedule
this workflow for periodical execution.
a. Click on the� Trigger tab.
b. Alarm Trigger: Click on the� Alarm Trigger� option.� Select the required criteria. Executes this workflow on the associated
devices, if any of the criteria is satisfied.
c. Schedule Trigger:� Click on the� Schedule Trigger option to schedule the workflow action.� Configure the date and time i.e.
you can choose to execute the workflow either once, daily, weekly, monthly or yearly at a specified day/time, based on your
preference.
d. Click Next
4. Configure the delayed and recurring triggerring of worflow
a. Enter a� Name,� Description, and� Tags� for the workflow.� �
b. Define Time: Select either� Apply this profile� all time or� Apply this profile during the below mentioned time window.
Selecting the latter keeps the Workflow active only during the specified days and hours.
c. Delayed Trigger: If you want the workflow to be triggered at a delay, enter the delay time (in minutes). If you don't want to
trigger the workflow if the alarm has been acknowledged in the mean time, you can select the 'Do not trigger if alarm is
acknowledged' check box.
d. Recurring Trigger: This option helps you trigger the workflow at regular intervals, till the alarm is cleared. Enter the trigger
interval and number of triggers. If you don't want to trigger the workflow repeatedly if the alarm has been acknowledged, you
can select the 'Do not trigger if alarm is acknowledged' check box.
e. Click Save�
The workflow has been successfully added. It will be executed on the associated devices at the scheduled time or when any of the
criteria selected is satisfied. You can check the output of the workflow in the Workflow Logs.
How to trigger workflow from device snapshot page?
Navigate to Inventory --> Devices.

Click on a particular device, to open its corresponding snapshot page.
On the top right tab having a list of icons click the workflow icon.
Click on New Workflow. (This will take you to the Workflow page in OpManager)
You can design your own workflow here.
�
Page 312
Sample Workflow
Following is a sample workflow which helps gets executed automatically when a device down alarm is raised. This workflow sends
ping request, if passed does DNS Lookup and adds the output as notes to the alarm.
Workflow Execution Logs for the sample workflow:

Click on Workflows from the left pane and select Workflow Logs
Page 313
Editing a Workflow:
To edit a workflows, follow the steps given below:
1. Click on Workflows� from the left pane� and click on the respective workflow name to edit.� �
2. The workflow� panel opens. Click Trigger button on top to� perform the changes you want to do and click Next.
3. Modify the name, description, tags, associated devices, schedule, and alarm trigger options if required.
4. Click Save
How can I trigger an action in case of any issues in the network?
To trigger an action in case of any/ selective network issues, all you have to do is to create a workflow action with alarm triggers. You
can refer the steps above to add a new workflow and select all/ specific triggers as per your requirements.
Page 314
Executing Workflows
Before executing a workflow, ensure that you have associated the workflow to the devices. To execute a worklow
1. Click on Workflows from the left pane. All the created workflows are listed.
2. Click against the Execute icon on the respective workflow.
3. There is also an option to execute the workflow from the device page. Go to Device page > Workflow > click against the execute
icon on the respective workflow.
How can I run a powershell script using Execute Windows Script task in Workflow?
1. Go to Workflow > New Workflow > External Actions > Execute Windows Script.
2. Drag and drop the Execute Windows Script action into the workspace. In the pop-up, configure the Name, Destination Device and
Command Line.
3. In Script Body, enter the powershell script shown below:
Set objShell = CreateObject("Wscript.Shell")

objShell.Run("powershell.exe -noexit c:\scripts\test.ps1")
4. Click OK.
Page 315
Triggers in Workflow
A Trigger initiates an action in a workflow based on the pre-configured criteria. There are two types of triggers
1. Alarm Trigger
2. Scheduled Trigger
Alarm Trigger
An alarm trigger performs a workflow action when an alarm is generated based on the specified criteria. This alarm will trigger a
workflow action. Eg. Let us assume that a General Trigger has been configured to perform a workflow action when a device misses 3
polls. A workflow action will be triggered, when an alarm is generated because the selected remote device missed 3 polls.
Scheduled Trigger
A scheduled trigger will perform a workflow action at the specified time irrespective of any other criteria.
Define Time & Delay/Recurring Trigger in Workflow
Define Time: Select one of the following options
Apply this profile all the time- This activates a workflow action for the selected trigger at any time.
Apply the profile for the selected time window- You can specify a time-window during which period, the workflow will be
executed based on the configured trigger. For instance, if you set the values as From 09:30 To 18:30, and select the days
from Monday through Friday, the workflow will only be activated during the specified interval i.e. Within the mentioned
timeframe.
Delayed Trigger: If you want to perform a delayed workflow action, after an alarm is triggered, enter the delay time in Trigger after
(in minutes). If you don't want to trigger a workflow action if the alarm has been acknowledged in the meantime, you can select
the 'Do not trigger if alarm is acknowledged' checkbox.
Page 316
Recurring Trigger: This option helps you re-trigger the workflow action at regular intervals, till the alarm is cleared. Enter the Trigger
interval and Restrict the number of triggers, if you want to restrict the number of times the trigger recurs.
For instance, if you set the trigger interval as 10 mins and restrict the number of triggers to 5 times, the workflow action will be
triggered every 10 mins, for 5 times or till the alarm is cleared (whichever is the earliest).
If the number of times to trigger the workflow action is not specified, then the workflow action will be re-triggered indefinitely, till the
alarm is cleared. If you do not want to trigger a workflow action in case an alarm has been acknowledged, you can select the 'Do not
trigger if alarm is acknowledged' checkbox.
Page 317
Alert Actions
You can perform the following alert actions:
Acknowledge: This option is useful for the operators to pick up the problem and work on it. When you select an alarm and click on
Acknowledge button on top the alarms list, the administrator/operator's name is populated in the technician's field.
Note: Alarms that are acknowledged can be excluded from being escalated by configuring accordingly the alarm escalation rule.
Unacknowledge: The assigned technician is removed and the alarm is back in the unassigned list.
Clear: You can click this to clear an alarm manually.
Delete: You can delete an alarm.
View History: Click on the alarm message to view the alarm details and event history.
Add Notes:You can add notes to the alarms to explain the steps you have followed to correct the fault or to give tips to the
operator who is working on the fault. In the Alarm history page, click the Add Notes option.
Execute Workflow: You can execute a workflow to troubleshoot an alarm. Click on Execute Workflow in the Alarm Details page,
and select the workflow. The workflow will be executed and the output will be added in the notes.
Test Actions: You can notify this alarm via any of the notification profiles created by you. Click on Test Actions in the Alarm
Details page, and select the desired notification profile.
View Availability: You can view the availability history of the faulty device. Click on More link in Alarm Details page and select
Availability.
Ping: You can ping the faulty device by clicking on the Ping icon from the top of the Alarm Details page.
Trace Route: You can trace route the faulty device by clicking on the Trace Route icon from the top of the Alarm Details page.
Unmanage: Alarms created for devices that are under maintenance can be can be avoided by moving the device to unmanaged
state.
Click Actions> Select Unmanage from Alarm Details page.
Configure Notifications: You can configure a notification profile to the faulty devices. Click Actions> Configure Notifications
from Alarm Details page.
Edit thresholds: You can configure the threshold values for the criticality levels. If a device fails to meet the threshold conditions
then an alarm will be raised.
Test monitor: You can use the test monitor to check whether the monitor is fetching data.
Page 318
Page 319
Notification Profile
When a fault is detected in your network, an event occurs and multiple events correlate to trigger an alarm. You can configure
OpManager to notify the network administrator or perform automatic actions based on the alarm raised for a device using the
notification profiles.
Profile Types
The different types of notification profiles available are:
Email
Email based SMS
SMS
Run a System Command
Run a Program
Log a Ticket
Web Alarm
SysLog Profile
Trap Profile
These notification profiles can be associated to different devices for different fault criteria.
Other Configurations of Notification Profiles
Time Window: Select one of the following options:
Apply this profile all the time- This notifies alerts occurring for the selected criteria at any time.
Apply the profile for the selected time window- You can specify the required time- window here. For instance, if you set the
values as From 09:30 To 18:30, and select the days from Monday through Friday, alerts triggered during the specified interval
and selected days only will be notified.
Delayed Trigger: If you want the notification profile to be triggered by a delay, enter the delay time in Trigger after (in minutes). If you
don't want to trigger the notification profile if the alarm has been acknowledged in the meantime, you can select the 'Do not trigger if
alarm is acknowledged' checkbox.
Recurring Trigger: This option helps you re-trigger the notification profile at regular intervals, till the alarm is cleared. Enter the
Trigger interval and Restrict the number of triggers to. For instance, if you set trigger interval as 10 mins and restrict the number of
triggers as 5 times, an alert will be notified every 10 mins, for 5 times or till alarm is cleared(Whichever is earliest). If the number of
triggers is set as empty, then alert will be notified for given interval, till the alarm is cleared. If you don't want to trigger the
notification profile repeatedly if the alarm has been acknowledged, you can select the 'Do not trigger if alarm is acknowledged'
checkbox.
Enable/ Disable a Notification Profile
In case you want to temporarily disable a notification profile, you can follow the simple steps listed below.
1. Go to Settings -> Notifications -> Notification Profiles. Here, you will find a list of all the notification profiles available.
2. Find the profile that you wish to disable and click on under 'Status'. This will prompt a confirmation message.
3. If you still wish to proceed, click 'OK'.
Now, you have successfully disabled a notification profile. If you wish to re-enable a notification profile, you simply enable it by
clicking on the slider again.
Page 320
Page 321
Escalating Alarms
The alarms of critical devices should not be left unnoticed for a long time. For instance, the mail-servers, web-servers, backup-
servers, switches, and routers are so critical that if their faults are not solved within a specified time, the networking functionality will
be brought down. You can configure OpManager to escalate such unnoticed alarms by sending an e-mail to the person concerned.
However, you have an option to exclude the alarms that are acknowledged from being escalated.
To configure a new alarm escalation rule, follow the steps given below:
1. Click Settings ? Configuration ? Alarm Escalation Rules.

2. Click Add Rule to create a rule.
3. Assign a name to the rule in the Rule Name field.
4. Select the Severity and Category of the alarm.
5. Select the Business View in order to associate the rule only to the alarms of the devices of the selected business view. If not select
None to associate the rule to the alarms of all the devices.
6. Then configure the the interval (Not Cleared Within) in either hours or minutes to wait for the alarm to get cleared.
7. In the Run this check every box, set the interval in minutes to execute this rule.
8. You can exclude the acknowledged alarms from being escalated by selecting Exclude Acknowledged Alarms option.
9. Type the values for the fields under Notifications > Email to send an e-mail if the alarm is not cleared within the specified
interval.
10. Configure the To Email Address, From Email Address, the Subject and the Message of the escalation mail.
11. Type the values for the fields under Notifications > SMS to send a SMS if the alarm is not cleared within the specified interval.
12. Configure the Mobile Number and Message of the escalation SMS.
13. Click Save.
If you configure a new alarm escalation rule, by default it will be enabled. To disable an alarm escalation rule click on Edit icon,
deselect the Enable this rule option and click on Ok.
Alarm escalation rule can be deleted by clicking the Delete icon in the Actions column of the particular rule.
Page 322
Managing Faults in Network
�
There can various types of faults in a network. With the network health depending on various resources like the system resources,
services, network connectivity etc, getting to the root of the problem is simplified when the monitoring solution raises meaningful
alarms. OpManager helps you identify the fault quickly with its detailed alarms indicating the resource that is poorly performing in
the device . The different types of OpManager alarms include:
Status-poll Alarms (device, service, interface, port down alarms).

Threshold-based alarms for host resources, response times etc proactive monitoring.
Alarms from SNMP Traps.
Windows event logs based alarms.
Syslog based alarms
OpManager monitors the resources for availability and performance and triggers alarms for all the criteria mentioned above. These
alarms can also be sent as email or sms alerts from OpManager.
�
Page 323
Processing SNMP Traps into Alarms
What is SNMP Trap?
Processing Traps into Alarms
Tools
Adding/Modifying Trap Processor
Loading Trap Parsers from a MIB
Processing Unsolicited Traps
Configuring SNMP Traps in Agent
Combining multiple traps
Processing traps for unavailable devices
Ignoring traps in OpManager
What is SNMP Trap?
Traps are cryptic messages of a fault that occurs in an SNMP device. SNMP traps are alerts generated by agents on a managed
device. These traps generate 5 types of data:
Coldstart or Warmstart: The agent reinitialized its configuration tables.

Linkup or Linkdown: A network interface card (NIC) on the agent either fails or reinitializes.
Authentication fails: This happens when an SNMP agent gets a request from an unrecognized community name.
egpNeighborloss: Agent cannot communicate with its EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol) peer.
Enterprise specific: Vendor specific error conditions and error codes.
Processing SNMP Traps into Alarms

OpManager enables you to process the traps from the managed devices.
When a trap is received from a managed device, the match criteria in the parser determines whether a specific trap matches the
conditions specified in the Trap Processor. Once a matching trap is found, an alert is generated.
Trap Processor converts the cryptic message to human-readable alarm.
Configure OpManager to process the traps that are not processed out-of-the-box and convert them into alarms.
The traps that are not processed are listed under 'Unsolicited Traps'.
Page 324
Tools
The following actions can be done by clicking the relevant icon:
Edit: Edit the Trap
Enable or disable trap processing: Click to enable/disable trap processing
Delete processor: Delete the Trap Processor
Adding/Modifying Trap Processor
Go to Settings → Monitoring → SNMP Trap Processors.

Click ‘Add New’ to add a new trap.
Click the TrapParser name/ Edit icon to modify an existing one.
Configure/Modify the following properties:
Name: Configure a name for the new trap processor.

Description: Describe the trap.
SNMP Trap Version:Select the version (SNMP V1/V3).
SNMP V1 Properties:
Generic Type: Cold Start, Link Up, Enterprise, etc. Select the appropriate type for the OID
Specific Type: When Generic Type is set to Enterprise a specific trap ID s identified
Trap OID:� For devices with SNMP v2c version, select the trap oid from the MIB using the Select button.
Severity:� Select the Alarm severity.
Failure Component:� This option is useful when you deal with a single trap OID that has multiple failure
components. The Varbinds containing more details on the trap will have information on the failed components
(entities like CPU, Temperature etc). You can match the entity too by appending the VarBind number in this field to
generate separate alarms for the failed components. For instance, $Source_trapName_trap_$v5.
Source:� Append the Varbinds to be matched if required. This option is useful if the trap is forwarded from
another source.
Message:� Select the required message variables
Page 325
Match Criteria:� Select the appropriate radio button to either match any one or all the conditions that you specify.
Select the variable bindings, the condition, and the string to be matched.
Rearm Criteria:� Similarly, select the appropriate radio button to match the rearm conditions. Select the variable
bindings, the condition, and the string to be matched.
SNMP V3 Properties:
Trap OID: For devices with SNMP v3� version, select the trap oid from the MIB using the Select button.
Severity: Select the Alarm severity.
Failure Component:� This option is useful when you deal with a single trap OID that has multiple failure
components. The Varbinds containing more details on the trap will have information on the failed components
(entities like CPU, Temperature etc). You can match the entity too by appending the VarBind number in this field to
generate separate alarms for the failed components. For instance, $Source_trapName_trap_$v5.
Source: Append the Varbinds to be matched if required. This option is useful if the trap is forwarded from another
source.
Message:� Select the required message variables.
Match Criteria: Select the appropriate radio button to either match any one or all the conditions that you specify.
Select the variable bindings, the condition, and the string to be matched.
Rearm Criteria: Similarly, select the appropriate radio button to match the rearm conditions. Select the variable
bindings, the condition, and the string to be matched.
Click Save for the configuration to take effect.�
Loading Trap Parsers from a MIB
Following are the steps to load the traps from various MIBs:
Go to Settings → Monitoring → SNMP Trap Processors.� All the configured processors are listed here.
Click on Load Traps From Mibs at the top of the page.
From the list of MIBs, select the MIB from which you would like to load the trap variable. The traps in that MIB are listed.
Select the required trap variable, and click Add.
A Processor for the selected trap is added, and is listed under the Traps tab.�
How to process the Unsolicited Traps?
Go to Alarms ( ALT+A ) >� Click on Unsolicited Traps.

Click on Create Trap Processor corresponding to the trap message.
Type a name for TrapName.
Make sure that the status is enabled.
Select the Severity.
Click on Add.�
How to configure SNMP Traps in Agent?
Despite configuring the SNMP Trap Processor in opmanager, you might still not see the alarms based on traps. You might need to
check the SNMP agent configuration on the monitored devices.
Can I process traps from a device which is not available in OpManager?�
Page 326
No, the device must be available in OpManager for you to be able to process those traps.
How to combine multiple traps and generate them as a single� alarm?�
If the value for the Failure Component� field is the same for two or more trap processors, it'll be processed as a single entity. For
instance, let us assume CISCO_SHUTDOWN and CISCO_FANSTATUS as two different trapprocessors. Now, if the Failure Component
field for both these trap processors contain the value CISCO, then these trap processors will be processed as a single entity.�
To configure,
Go to Settings → Monitoring → SNMP Trap Processors

Select Add/Edit a trap procesor
Add/Edit the Failure Component field to contain the same value.
Now, OpManager will process these traps as a single entity.�
How can I ignore a trap from being processed?
Go to Settings → Monitoring → SNMP Trap Processors�

Under Status, disable the trap processor that you do not wish to be processed.�
Page 327
Receiving SNMP Traps in OpManager
OpManager listens for SNMP traps from devices on the default port 162. So, it automatically acts as a trap receiver and based on the
trap processors defined in OpManager, the traps are processed and shown as OpManager alarms. When the default port 162 is
blocked, the trap port can be switched to a different port.
Page 328
Alarm Suppression
OpManager provides you the option to suppress the alarms of the devices for a pre-defined time interval. This option will be very
useful in cases, where the devices are under maintenance or some known issues exist with them.
Configuring Alarm Suppression for a Single Device

2. Click on Actions� and select Suppress Alarms.
3. Select the period for which you want to suppress the alarm.
Alarms of this device will be suppressed for the selected period. You can also suppress alarms for devices in a bulk.
To configure the Alarm Suppression in a bulk

Page 329
1. Go to the Inventory.
2. Select the devices for which you want to suppress the alarms.
3. Click options on the top right corner and choose� Suppress Alarms.
4. Select the period for which you want to suppress the alarm.
You can also configure alarm suppression in bulk by visiting� Settings -> Configuration -> Quick Configuration Wizard -> Alarm
Suppression.
Here you can select devices based on -� Category/ Businsess View/ Groups. Select the devices from the available devicies and
click� Save.
Page 330
Viewing Alerts
The Alarms tab in OpManager shows all the latest alerts.
From the list box on the top right corner, you can access the following:
All Alarms: A complete list of alarms is displayed here.

Active Alarms: This view lists only the active alarms that are not yet cleared.
Unsolicited Traps: You can view the list of unsolicited traps by navigating to Alarms-> Unsolicited Traps. These are the traps that
are not configured to be processed in OpManager. If you find any of these traps to be critical, you can configure OpManager to
process the traps using the information received from the agent.
EventLog Alarms: This view lists only the alarms that are triggered from Windows event logs as the source.
Syslog Alarms: This view lists only the alarms logged via syslog.
Trap Alarms: This view lists only the alarms logged via traps.
Web Alarms: This view lists web alarms that are triggered via Notification Profiles.
Events: This view lists all logged events from all types of alarms.
Page 331
Configuring Mail Server Settings
OpManager allows you to configure e-mail alerts to get notified on any fault in your network. The send email feature uses the mail
server settings configured here as the default setting for email alerts across OpManager. However, specific requirements can be
configured while setting up a profile for each feature, i.e. Notification Profile, Schedule Reports, etc.
To configure the SMTP server settings globally and to provide the secondary mail server settings, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Settings > Basic Settings, click Mail Server Settings.

2. Enter the SMTP Server name and Port number.
3. Configure the From and To Email ID fields.
4. Enter a Time Out interval.
5. Configure the User name and Password details, if the server requires authentication to send e-mail.
6. For SSL authentication, select the SSL Enabled check-box, browse and select the SSL certificate and key-in the password.
7. Click Save
Verifying Configuration
To test the settings, enter the Email ID and click Send Test Mail. This e-mail ID will be considered as the default To Email ID
while creating Email and Email based SMS notification profiles.
If you have a secondary mail server in your network, select Add a secondary mail server and provide the details. In case of a
failure in the primary mail server, OpManager uses the secondary mail server to send E-mails.
Find more information on configuring Gmail and Office 365.
If you are getting delayed email notifications, click here to troubleshoot.

Page 332
Configuring Proxy Server Settings
Any business enterprise will have a proxy server to optimize its connectivity to the Internet and to filter access to restricted Web
sites. Proxy server acts as an intermediary between the client and the server, thus providing indirect network services to the client
and facilitates security/user privacy while accessing the other servers through URL calls. In OpManager, to monitor URLs over
internet, you need to provide the proxy server details of your enterprise.
To enter the details, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Settings > Basic Settings, click Proxy Server Settings.

2. Select the Enable Proxy check-box.
3. Enter the Proxy server name, port number in which the Web service is running on the proxy server, and the user name and
password to connect to the proxy server.
4. For the devices that do no require to go through a proxy, specify the name or the IP Address of the devices as a comma separated
list in the No Proxy field.
5. Click Save to save the details.
Page 333
SMS server settings
OpManager sends SMS notifications via
SMS Gateway
SMPP
SMS Gateway:
Users can now select from the below list of SMS providers and set them as your default SMS getaway.
Clickatell
SMSEagle
Twilio
Custom
SMPP:
OpManager also supports SMS notification via SMPP. SMPP stands for Short Message Peer to Peer Protocol. Short Message Peer-to-
Peer (SMPP) in the telecommunications industry is an open, industry standard protocol designed to provide a flexible data
communication interface for the transfer of short message data between External Short Messaging Entities (ESMEs), Routing Entities
(REs) and Message Centres.
Using the SMPP protocol, an SMS application system called the �External Short Message Entity� (ESME) may initiate an application
layer connection with an SMSC over a TCP/IP connection and may then send short messages and receive short messages to and from
the SMSC respectively. It allows fast delivery of SMS messages.
1) SMPP Server Name: IP Address or Hostname of the SMPP Server
2) SMPP Server Port: Port number of the SMPP Server
3) User Name: Specify the username of the SMPP Server
4) Password: Specify the password of the SMPP Server
Optional Advanced settings:
5) Source Address: Address of Short Message Entity which originated this message.
6) Source Address's TON: Denotes Type of Number for the source address.
7) Source Address's NPI: Denotes Numbering Plan Indicator for the source address.
8) Destination Address's TON: Denotes Type of Number for the destination address.
9) Destination Address's NPI: Denotes Numbering Plan Indicator for Numbering Plan Indicator for the source address.
POSTMAN - Third party API tool - An App in chrome Page 334
This tool will help you to check whether the API is successful or not. Provide the details which should be used in the SMS server
settings and you can cross verify once here before configuring in OpManager.
You can download this from here and either sign in or click "Take me straight to the app".
1.Please provide the base URL of the SMS gateway provider and select the API method as POST or GET.
2.Please provide the body with the required "HTTP parameters" you provide in OpManager.
Page 335
3.Provide the headers under Headers tab which you will use it as "Request Headers" in OpManager.
4.Click "Send" and check the status.

Page 336
Forwarding Syslog
You can forward the syslog received in OpManager to any NMS.
Prev Next
Steps to forward syslog:
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? Syslog rules and click on 'Forward Syslog'.

2. Click on Add Destination button.
3. Provide the Name/IP address of the NMS Host to which SysLog has to be forwarded.
4. Provide the SysLog listening port number of the NMS to which SysLog has to be forwarded.
5. Click on Start Forwarder to initiate sending of SysLog to the destination NMS. You can also Stop forwarder at any desired time.
Page 337
Forwarding Traps
Configure OpManager to notify users over a Trap when there is a specific fault.
Steps to forward Traps:
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? SNMP Trap Processors ? Forward Trap.

2. Provide the Name/IP address of the host to which notifications has to be sent.
3. Provide the trap listening port number of the host to which notifications has to be sent.
4. Click Save.
Page 338
Email Notification Profile
You can configure OpManager to send e-mail to network administrators when a fault is detected in the device. You can create
separate profiles for each administrator and assign them to devices so that whenever the device has a fault, an e-mail is sent to the
technician concerned.
Configuring an Email Alert

To create an email alert profile, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Settings > Notification Profile.

2. Click Add.
3. Select the Notification type as Send Email.
4. Provide the From, To, and CC Email Address in addition to Subject and Message (select the required alarm variables which is to
be displayed on the email subject and message). Click Next.
5. Select the fault criteria for which you need to be notified. For instance, if you want to be notified of threshold violation, select
'Threshold rule is violated'. Additionally notify only when any or all the severity: Critical, Trouble, Attention, Service Down. Click
Next
6. Select the devices either By Category or By Business View or By Devices and click Next.
7. Select the required Time Window, Delayed Trigger and Recurring Trigger and click Next.
8. Give a profile name and Click Test Action to test the email profile or Save to save the profile.
The profile is associated to the selected devices. A notification is sent every time a threshold is violated for a server.
Note: Primary and secondary SMTP server settings can be provided in the Mail Server Settings page in OpManager. Whenever a new
email profile is created, the values of the primary SMTP server and the authentication details are retrieved from the Mail Server
settings. Refer to Configuring Mail Server Settings for steps to enter the details. If the SMTP server is not available while sending e-
mail, secondary mail server is used to send the mail automatically.
If your email notifications are delayed, click here to troubleshoot.
OpManager also supports Email based SMS alerts, click here to learn more.
Page 339
SMS Notification Profile
Configuring SMS Alerts
You can configure OpManager to send SMS to administrators when a fault is detected in the device. You can create separate profiles
for each administrator and assign them to devices so that whenever the device has a fault, an SMS will be sent to the technician
concerned.
To create an SMS alert profile, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Settings > Notification profiles.

2. Click Add.
3. Select the Notification type as SMS.
4. Choose the gateway and provide the mobile number(s).
5. Provide the Subject and Message (select the required alarm variables which is to be displayed on the email subject and message).
Click Next.
'Threshold rule is violated'. Additionally notify only when any or all the severity: Critical, Trouble, Attention, Service
Down. Click Next.
9. Give a profile name and Click Test Action to test the SMS profile or Save to save the profile.
The profile is associated to the selected devices. A notification is sent every time a threshold is violated for a server. To configure
SMS server settings, click here.
OpManager also sends Email based SMS alerts, click here to know more.
Page 340
Web Alarm Notification Profile
Configuring Sound Alerts using Web Alarm profile
Web alarm lets you get updates on the alerts raised, as a Push Notification to the bell icon with a short notification sound in the
OpManager window.
This can prove essential in your real time network monitoring environment, where you can configure sound alerts only for critical
alarms (Device Down/ URL Down). This will allow you respond immediately to troubleshoot business critical issues.
The criteria and schedule based on which you want to be notified, can be configured in the profile.
Configure Web Alarm profile
Go to Notification Profile,� Settings� >� Notification Profile > Add.
Select� Web Alarm, to configure the Web Alarm profile.
Web Alarm Properties:�
1. Associate Users: In this section, you will find a list of all users mapped to OpManager classified as 'Administrators' and
'Operators'. You can either select all users or only specific users, to receive this sound alert.�
2. Associate Sound: Select a sound file to be played when the Web Alarm profile is triggered. You can also upload and select a
personalized soundtrack for the alert.
Criteria:� Select the criteria based on which the alert will be generated. You can also select the "Notify me when the alarm is
cleared" option to be notified once an alarm is cleared. To know more about the different criteria in OpManager, click here.
Device Selection:� Select the devices for which you want the web alarm to be generated. They can be selected based on Category,
Business View or Devices.�
Schedule:� This section allows you to configure the Time Window, Delayed Trigger and Recurring Trigger.�
Preview:� Provides a summary of the Web Alarm profile that you will be creating. You can name the profile and also test the action
by clicking the Test Action button.�
Page 341
Once the Web Alarm profile has been configured according to your preference, click� Save� to save the profile. Now, the profile will
automatically be applied to the selected devices and any alerts will be intimated with the help of a notification sound.�
Use-Case:�
Eg: Tim is a Network Manager who is also responsible for the health of an enterprise's network infrastructure. He spends his day
continuously monitoring the network using OpManager and receives multiple alerts per day. But, he wishes to only get notified of
critical events while focusing on his other demanding tasks. Therefore, he configures a Web Alarm profile in OpManager. He no
longer needs to keep a constant watch on the webclient. He can simply allow the webclient to run in the background while carrying
on with his day-to-day tasks and OpManager will automatically notify him with a sound alert in the case of a critical alarm as per the
configured criteria. He can now learn more about the alert from the push notification at the Bell icon and request his peers to
handle the issue.�
�
Page 342
Run Program Notification Profile
You can configure OpManager to automatically run a program whenever a fault is detected in the device. For instance, you can
configure OpManager to execute a program that corrects the fault or simply produces a sound or that whenever a specific type of an
alarm is raised for a device.
Configure a Run Program Profile

To create a profile that executes the specified program, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Settings > Notification Profiles.

2. Click Add.
3. Select the Notification type as Run Program.
4. In the Command Name field, specify the name of the program to be executed with the absolute path. Example
C:profilestestprogram.bat.
Note: These commands will be executed in the OpManager installed server. Please verify the source of the commands before
using it here, to prevent any unexpected behaviour or vulnerabilities.
5. If the program requires some arguments, specify the Program Arguments, Message Variables and click Next.
Down. Click Next
9. Give a profile name and Click Test Action to test the program or Save to save the profile.
The profile is associated to the selected devices. The program is executed with the specified arguments whenever a fault matching
the selected criteria occurs.
Page 343
Run System Command Notification Profile
You can configure OpManager to automatically run a system command whenever a fault is detected in the device. For instance, you
can configure OpManager to execute a netsend command to send popup messages to users machines whenever a specific type of
an alarm is raised for a device.
Configuring a Run System Command Notification Profile

To create a profile that executes the specified program, follow the steps given below :

2. Click Add.
3. Select the Notification type as Run System Command.
4. In the Command String field, specify the command name with additional arguments if any.
Note: These commands will be executed in the OpManager installed server. Please verify the source of the commands before
using it here, to prevent any unexpected behaviour or vulnerabilities.
5. Select the Error and Output check-boxes to append the output and the error message on executing the command.
Down. Click Next
9. Give a profile name and Click Test Action to test the system command(s) or Save to save the profile.
The system command is executed with the specified arguments whenever a fault matching the selected criteria occurs.
Page 344
Trap Notification Profile
Configure OpManager to notify users over a Trap when there is a specific fault.
Configure a Trap Profile

2. Click Add.
3. Select the Notification type as Trap Profile.
4. Provide the Host Name, Host Port, Version (SNMP version), Community (SNMP read community string) and Varbinds if any.
Click Next
Down. Click Next
You have successfully configured the notification profile.

Page 345
SysLog Notification Profile
When any fault occurs you can notify users via SysLog.
Configure a SysLog profile

2. Click Add.
3. Select the Notification type as Send SysLog.
4. Destination Host: Provide the Name/IP address of the host to which notifications has to be sent.
5. Destination Port: Provide the SysLog listening port number of the host to which notifications has to be sent.
6. Severity: You can choose any of SysLog severity events to be processed.
7. Select the Facility and required Message Variables. Click Next
Down. Click Next
You have successfully configured the notification profile.

Page 346
Scheduling Downtime
Maintenance of network devices forms an integral part of network administration. You may want to perform a maintenance of
specific device types at specific intervals. If such devices are removed from the network, or rebooted, then you will see alarms
indicating that the device, or the applications in the device are unavailable. Since the devices are not available when polled for
status during the maintenance period, unnecessary alarms are fired. To prevent the devices from being monitored for status during
maintenance, you can schedule a maintenance task for such devices.
How to schedule downtime?
Following are the steps:
1. Go to Settings -> Configuration -> Device Downtime Schedules.

2. Click on Add Schedule.
3. In the Add Schedule form, provide the following details:
Schedule Name
Schedule Description
Select the Status as Enabled, if you want the Scheduled task to take effect immediately. Else select Disabled, so that you can
enable it when required.
Select the frequency at which the Task has to be scheduled/executed. It can be Once, Every Day, Every Week, and Every
Month.
Specify the start and end time/day of the task in the corresponding fields.
If it is a schedule to be executed every day, then specify the date from which the task must be scheduled.
If it is a monthly schedule, select either the date or the day with the time window for the schedule.
You can assign the task to only one of the following options:
Category (switch, router, server, etc.)

Business view
Device
URL Monitors
4. Click Save
The schedule will be executed as configured.
To disable a Device Downtime Schedule

If you wish to disable the device downtime schedule, Go to Settings > Configuration > Device Downtime Schedules and set the
status as Disable for the corresponding device downtime schedule.
To stop the currently running Device Downtime Schedule

Go to Settings > Configuration > Device Downtime Schedules and select the one to be stopped. Page 347
In the Edit Schedule page, scroll to the bottom and click on Save.
A message stating 'This schedule is active. Click here to stop the schedule, or update the schedule details after the process is
completed' will be displayed. You can stop the schedule or update it by doing so.
To delete a Device Downtime Schedule, click on the delete icon under Actions header of the respective schedule.
Points to remember:
If a device is added under multiple device downtime schedules, chances are that one of the device downtime schedules
under which the device is specified may still be in running state. Hence, the specific device will continue to remain in
downtime.
When the parent device is on maintenance, the child devices will not be monitored and their status will be shown as
dependent unavailable
On Maintenance devices are also considered in the OpManager license count.
Page 348
Modifying and Deleting Notification Profiles
You can modify or remove an existing notification profile. Here are the steps:

2. All the configured profiles are listed here.
3. Click the Delete icon against the profile's name to delete the profiles.
4. Click on the profile's name or the edit option to modify the profile properties.
The changes made here are applied for all the devices to which the profile is associated.
Note: You can also delete the notification profiles in bulk by selecting the profiles and clicking Delete.
Page 349
Adding a new VoIP monitor
Prerequisites
The source and the destination devices should always be a IP SLA responder enabled Cisco device.
Steps to set up a new VoIP monitor
OpManager performs the UDP jitter operation to proactively monitor the VoIP quality between Cisco devices. The UDP jitter operation
simulates continuous VoIP traffic to consistently monitor the voice quality scores between the source and the destination devices.
Using OpManager, you can now monitor the voice and video quality of a 'call path'. Call path is the WAN link between the router in
your main office and the one in the branch office that you want to monitor.
Step 1: Enable Add (/discover) the router in your LAN to OpManager. And make sure the SNMP read and write community are
configured properly, for that router.
Step 2: Enable SLA responder on the destination device you wish to monitor. The steps are detailed below.
1. Open a CLI session on the destination router and enable the EXEC mode as follows:
Router>enable
2. Start the global configuration mode:
Router#configure terminal
3. Enable the IP SLA responder:
Router(config)#ip sla responder

[or]
Router(config)#ip sla monitor responder
(Note: Enter any one of the command to enable IP SLA responder as it varies according to the IOS versions.)
4. Repeat the above steps for all the destination routers on which you want to monitor VoIP performance.
Step 3: Creating the VoIP monitor:
1. Go to Network ? IPSLA ? VoIP monitor ? Click on Add VoIP monitor at the top right corner
2. Enter a name for the monitor.
3. Select the source router from the list of routers discovered in OpManager, and select the relevant interface.
4. Specify the destination router either by using the 'Search' option to pick from the discovered routers, or use the 'Add' option to
specify the IP address of the destination router and submit the details.
5. You will see the summary of the monitor you are about to configure. Now click 'Save' to submit the details to the device. This will
take few seconds to configure.
Page 350
Learn more about VoIP monitoring in OpManager

Page 351
Configuring call settings and threshold template
Defining Call Settings:
Define a template with the required VoIP settings to be used for monitoring performance. The VoIP template comes with pre-
populated default values. Incase you would like to effect some changes to the values before initiating monitoring, make the changes
as follows:
1. Click on Settings. Under the Monitoring section, click on IPSLA. Click on the VoIP Call Settings tab.
2. Configure the following parameters:
Source Port - Specify the VoIP UDP port to which VoIP Monitor sends simulated traffic to generate performance metrics. The default
port number is set as 16384. You can specify a port in the range of 16384 - 32766.
Simulated VoIP Codec - The VoIP jitter codec decides the type of traffic that VoIP Monitor simulates over your network.
Operation Frequency - The operation frequency is the frequency with which QoS metrics are collected by the IP SLA agent on your
network to determine performance.
Operation Timeout - The operation timeout is time to wait for the response from the responder / destination device in msecs.
Type of service - The Type of Service octet allows you to set precedence levels for VoIP traffic of the IP SLA operations.
MOS Advantage Factor - The advantage factor is a measure, on a scale of 0 to 20, of the willingness of your VoIP network users to
trade call quality for convenience
Defining Thresholds for the monitored parameters:
You can define a threshold template so that the VoIP performance parameters can be better suit your company SLA's (Service Level
Agreements). Alerts are triggered based on the thresholds configured so that you can take corrective actions in time. Here are the
steps to define a threshold template:
1. Go to Settings ? Monitoring ? IPSLA ? VoIP Threshold Template.

2. Configure the following parameters:
MOS Threshold : Configure the MOS threshold by specifying the upper and lower MOS range values in the range of 1 to 5.
Jitter Threshold : Configure the jitter threshold in msecs with upper and lower threshold limits. The range is from 0 to 6000 msecs.
Latency Threshold : Specify the delay allowed in msecs again in the range of 0 to 6000.
Packet Loss : Specify the number of packets that can be lost in transit.
Notification Profile : Select the required notification profile(s) in order to notify when the any threshold rule is violated.
Page 352
Viewing Top 10 Call Paths
With VoIP Monitor you can view the top 10 call paths by MOS, Packet Loss, Jitter and Latency. This provides you to have a quick view
and react proactively. To view the top 10 call paths, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Inventory ? Select IPSLA from three line menu ? Select VoIP and click on VoIP Monitors.
2. Click on Top 10. The top 10 call paths by MOS, Packet Loss, Jitter and Latency are listed.
3. Click on the required call path view its snapshot page.
Page 353
Configuring WAN Monitor
Prerequisites
OpManager primarily relies on Cisco's IP-SLA for monitoring the WAN and the prerequisite therefore is that the device should be a
Cisco router and must have IPSLA agent enabled on it. Almost all the routers from Cisco are enabled with IP SLA agent and
OpManager supports IOS version 12.3 and above. OpManager uses SNMP to query the Cisco routers for the links' performance data.
IPSLA familiarity is not a prerequisite. You just need to tell OpManager which links you want to monitor. OpManager provides an
intuitive configuration wizard to help you configure all the IPSLA parameters for monitoring the WAN health.
Steps to set up the WAN Monitor
Using OpManager, you can now monitor the availability and latency of a WAN link / path. A WAN link mentioned here is the path
between the router in your main office and the one in the branch office that you wish to monitor.
Step 1 : Add (discover) the router in your LAN to OpManager. And make sure the snmp read and write community are configured
properly, for that router.
Step 2: Configuring the Router to send traps
Configure the cisco router to send traps to OpManager. Alerts are shown based on the traps received in OpManager. To configure
OpManager server as the SNMP Server receiving traps for the routers, telnet the router and type the following command:
snmp-server host <opmanager server IP> traps <host community string> rtr
For instance, if the OpManager host IP Address is 192.168.18.128, and the community string is private, the command would be:
snmp-server host 192.168.18.128 traps private rtr
Step 3: Creating the WAN Monitor
a. Go to Network ? IPSLA ? VoIP Monitor and click on the Add new Device option on the top right corner.
b. Enter a name for the monitor.
c. Select the source router from the list of routers discovered in OpManager and then select the relevant interface of the source
router.
d. Specify the destination IP Address either by using the 'Search' option to pick from the discovered routers, or directly enter the IP
Address and click 'Add' and submit the details.
e. You will see the summary of the monitor you are about to configure. Now click 'Apply to device' to submit the details to the device.
This will take few seconds to configure.
Refresh the page after few seconds to see the new monitor. The data is collected every hour, from the time you have configured.
Page 354
To edit any of the configuration details, go to the respective template, make the changes and save the details. When you create a new
monitor, the updated values take effect. When the configuration is complete, the router starts collecting the data at the specified
frequency i.e. 60 seconds (default value). OpManager updates this statistics (collected data) every hour and the reports are
generated after one hour of configuration.
Page 355
Configuring Test Parameters and Threshold Template for WAN Monitor
Define a template with the required WAN monitoring settings to be used for monitoring performance. The RTT template comes with
pre-populated default values. OpManager uses the configured values to simulate traffic. Incase you would like to effect some
changes to the values before initiating monitoring, make the changes as follows
Configuring Test Parameters
OpManager uses the default settings specified here,
Payload: The default value is 24 kb. Specify an echo payload value in the range of 0 to 16384.
Type of Service: Specify the Echo TOS in the range of 0 to 255, the default being 30.
Operation Frequency: Specify the interval in the range of 0 to 604800 msecs. The default interval is 60. The operation frequency
is the frequency with which QoS metrics are collected by the IP SLA agent on your network to determine performance.
Operation Timeout: Specify the timeout in the range of 0 to 604800000, the default being 60 msecs. Make sure that the timeout
interval is lesser than the configured operation frequency so that if the operation is not successful, that is, if there is no
response from the device, or in the event of a delay, the request is timed out and the subsequent operation is launched at the
configured frequency correctly.
Defining Threshold for Round Trip Time
You can define a threshold template so that you are alerted with the WAN monitor violates a specified value. Here are the steps to
define a threshold template:
1. Click on Settings. Click on to IPSLA under Monitoring section. Click on WAN Threshold Template tab.
2. Configure the upper and lower threshold limits for Round Trip time in msecs, the range being 0 to 60000 msecs. You can also
choose various notification profiles configured in OpManager to alert you.
Page 356
Viewing WAN Monitor Alerts
Go to Inventory ? Select IPSLA from three line menu ? Select VoIP (Select any monitor) ? Alarms (present at the end of the page) to view
the alerts raised by WAN Monitor.
All the alarms are listed with the Source name, Alarm Message, Status of the Device, Technician, Device category, date and time. Click
the alarm message to view the alarm history.
Page 357
About Reports
Intuitive dashboards and detailed reports helps you determine the performance of your network in very less time. OpManager
allows you to export the default reports to other file formats such as exporting to PDF or XLS. You can also schedule the reports to be
emailed or published. The default reports available in OpManager include:
System: Provides a complete report on all the system related activities of all the devices. This category of reports include All
Events, All Down Events, SNMP Trap Log, Windows Event Log, Performance Monitor Log, Notification Profiles Triggered, Downtime
Scheduler Log, Schedule Reports Log, All Alerts and All Down Alerts.
Health and Performance: Gives you a detailed report on the health and performance of all/top N devices.
Availability and Response: Gives you a detailed report on the availability and the response time of all/top N devices
Inventory: Inventory reports are available for servers, desktops, all devices, SNMP-enabled devices and non-SNMP devices.
WAN RTT Monitors: Gives you a detailed report on RTT & threshold of icmp packets and availability statistics of paths.
VoIP Monitors: Gives you a detailed report on various factors related to VoIP packets & traffic.
Virtual Servers report : Gives you detailed reports on your VM's which includes stats like list of all idle VM's, VM's with over-
allocated CPU etc.
Storage Reports: Gives you detailed reports on the performance of your storage devices.
Forecast reports: Get forecasts on usage of CPU, memory and disk of all devices in your network, calculated based on history of
utilization.
Nutanix reports: Get Inventory and performance reports for Nutanix devices in your network, such as Cluster/Host summary,
usage stats about your storage container and disks, and Cluster/Disk Inventory reports.
My Favorites: OpManager provides the option to categorize all your important and frequently viewed reports under My
Favorites.
Schedule Reports: OpManager allows you to schedule a new report and also to schedule a generated report.
Page 358
Viewing Interface Reports
Interface reports help you to determine the health of the interface by generating detailed reports on In and Out Traffic, In and Out
Errors and Discards, Bandwidth & Outage Report, At-a-Glance Report etc. The reports can be exported to PDF format, taken printouts
or emailed by clicking the respective icons. To generate the interface reports, follow the steps given below:
1. Go to the snapshot page of the interface whose health report you want to generate.
2. Go to� Reports� >� available on the right pane� of the page. All the default reports that can be generated are listed.
3. Click on the preferred time window for which you want to view the report. The default Time Window available in OpManager are
follows:
Last 12 hours
Last 24 hours
Today
Yesterday
This week�
Last 30 days
Custom
Note:� The reports can be exported in XLS or PDF format. It can also be scheduled for report generation.
Page 359
Business View-based Reports
OpManager provides an intuitive Availability Dashboard for your business view. You can track the fault to the root in no time.
To access the business view dashboard, follow the steps below:
1. Go to the required business view.

2. Click on the Dashboard tab. The business view dashboard shows the availability distribution and also the least available devices
in that view.
3. Click on the bar indicating a problem to drill down to the actual fault.
4. You can also view the dashboard for various periods like the last 24 hours, or last few days to analyze the trend.
Page 360
Creating New Reports
Apart from the 100+ available default reports you could also create a new report based on the data that you want. To create a new
report follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Reports, click on any tab in the page and click 'Create New Report'.
2. Enter a unique Name and brief Description.
3. Report Category- You can choose from one of the following categories of reports :
Performance: A report on the performance of your devices

Availability: A report on the availability of the devices over a period of time
Response Time & Packet Loss: A report on the time taken for the device to respond as well as the packet loss for a particular
time period..
Inventory: A report on the available devices in OpManager.
3. Monitor category: Select the category of monitors for which you want the report to be generated.
4. Select the specific monitor under the category of monitors for which the report is to be generated.
5. Report filter: You can filter the data that needs to appear in the report based on the following categories:
Category: The category of devices for which the report is to be generated. You can find more information about Categories in
OpManager here.
Business View: You can choose to display the data for devices under a specific Business View. To learn more about Business
Views, click here.
Period: The day(s) / the hours for which you wish to generate the report data
Time Window: Apart from choosing Time Period i.e, the days of the week, you can also select the hours for which the report
has to be generated. This includes: Page 361
24-hour report
8:00AM - 8:00PM report
Custom hours report - which can be configured with Business Hour Rules
Show: You can select the top N devices for which the data must be displayed in the report.
6. Click Save to create the new report.
7. After that, a success message will be displayed with an option to Preview the report. It will be displayed as a banner message on
the top of the OpManager UI.
The created report gets saved under the appropriate report category. Go to that category and click on the report to generate the
report.
Page 362
Editing Reports
OpManager allows you to edit a generated report in order to refine for some specific parameters, devices or time periods. To edit a
generated report follow the steps given below:
1. Go to Reports > OpManager > Select the category > Click against the report name that you wish to edit.�
2. Click Filter� button available on the top right of the report page.
4. Change the required fields. The various fields that can be altered are Category, Business Views, Period, Time Window, Business
Hour, Exclude Days, View Records.� �
5. After modifying the required fields, click on Apply to generate the report effecting the changes made.
Page 363
Copying Reports
OpManager allows you to copy a generated report in order to retain the already configured parameters as template and do some
minor changes on them and save as a new report. To copy and save a report follow the steps given below:�
1. Navigate to Reports -> OpManager.

2. Choose the report that you want to copy.
3. After choosing the report, click on More Actions� on the top right corner.�
4. Click Copy As icon available on the top� of the report that is generated. A small window opens.
2. Enter a unique Name and a brief Description.

3. Change the required fields. The various fields that can be altered are Category, Period, Business Views, Time Window and Show all
or Top N or Bottom N devices.
4. After modifying the required fields, click Save button to save the new report.
5. Once the report is generated, it will be notified as a banner message on the top in the OpManager UI (user interface).
Page 364
Page 365
Scheduling Reports
OpManager allows you schedule a new report,� schedule a generated report� and also to view a scheduled report.
Schedule a new report
1. Go to Reports → Schedule Reports.

2. In the Scheduler Reports Page, click the Add Schedule button on the top right.
3. Configure the following details:
Schedule Name: Configure a name for the schedule.

Choose Report Type: All the available reports types can be scheduled (select either one and follow the instructions given
below followed by� Configuring the Time Settings)
Scheduling Device Availability reports:
If you have chosen to schedule reports for Device availability reports and� configure the following,� Select either a
category of devices, or the required business view, or select specific devices manually for generating the availability
reports.
Select the Period and Time Window for which you want to generate the reports.
Select the days for which you want to exclude data in report using Exclude Days option.
Scheduling Top N Reports / All Devices reports:
If you have selected to schedule the Top N Reports, configure the following details:
Top N Reports: Select from Top 10/25/50/100/1000 reports.
Period and Time Window: Choose the Period and Time Window for which you want the report scheduled. In time period,
select the days for which you want to exclude data in the report using Exclude Days option.
Select Report(s): Select the required resource reports to be scheduled.
Generate Availability Report to all devices in this Business View: Select the relevant check-box and the business view to
generate reports specific to the devices in that business view.
4. Click Next
5. Configuring the Schedule for generating reports:
Daily: Select the time at which the reports must be generated every day
Weekly: Select the time and also the days on which the reports must be generated
Monthly: Select the time, day, and the months for which the reports must be generated
Report Format Type: Select either PDF or XLS to receive the report in the respective formats
Report Delivery: Select any one of the following options
Send report as attachment to: Configure the email ids to which the reports are to be sent as attachments [or]
Publish the report and send URL alone to:� Configure the url where the reports can be published
Add Mail Subject and Mail Message
6. Verify the details of the configured schedule and hit Add Schedule for the schedule to take effect
Page 366
Scheduling a generated report
1. In the report page that is generated, click Schedule Thisicon to schedule the report.
2. Enter the Schedule Name

3. Enter the� Email ID� to which the report has to be delivered
4. Select the Category followed by� Business View
5. Select the Period and Time Window. In time period, you can select the days for which you want to exclude data in the report using
Exclude Days option
6. Select the Report Format� (PDF or XLS)
7. Select the Report Delivery Type� (Attachment or URL)
8. Configure the Generate Report at Daily, Weekly or Monthly
9. Add the required Mail Subject and Mail Message
Page 367
10. Click Save to create a schedule for the generated report.
Viewing the Scheduled Report
1. Go to Reports → Schedule reports

2. Click against the View icon on the required report that you wish to see.
3. The list of generated reports for the selected report will appear.
Configure Business Hour Rules

You can configure the Business Hour Rule in OpManager to filter out and view only the reports generated within the business hours
of your organization.
Navigate to Reports-> Report Settings-> Business Hour Rules.

Click on Add Rule.
Provide a Name and Description.
Select the time duration from the drop down for each day.
Click on Save.
Page 368
How to disable or enable scheduled reports in bulk
Navigate to Reports --> OpManager --> Scheduled Reports.

Select the reports that you want to enable/disable by checking the box left adjacent to the Name of the report.
Click on� Enable/Disable� available on the top to update the list.
Once updated, a banner message will appear on top as 'Values updated successfully'.
How to email default reports in OpManager
Navigate to Reports --> OpManager.

Select the particular report from a report category. (For Eg: Availability and Response --> Web Servers Availability)
Click on More Actions on the top right corner.
And click on Email this Report.
Then enter the From and To mail IDs along with the Subject and Message.
Finally click Send.
Page 369
Page 370
Configuring Favorite Reports
With OpManager you can mark the reports that are frequently viewed as Favorite reports. The reports that are marked as favorite
reports are listed under My Favorites report category. To mark a report as your favorite one, follow the steps given below:
1. Generate the report that you want to mark as your favorite.

2. Click the Star icon (Mark a report as Favorite) at the top of the page to mark a report as Favorite.
A message is displayed saying that "This report has been added to your favorite list".
Page 371
Report Settings
Under Report Settings in OpManager, users can configure the Business Hour Rule. Each organization will have different working
hours/ business hours and by defining this rule, users can filter out reports only for the specified business hours.
Also, users can specify a different time window each day as per their needs.
How to configure Business Hour Rule?
Navigate to Reports -> Report Settings -> Business Hour Rules.

Click on Add Rule.
Provide a Name and Description.
Select the time duration from the drop down for each day or the particular days which are required.
Click on Save.
Page 372
Business Views:
Business views in OpManager provide a graphical representation of devices according to the business service they cater to. This
ensures the availability of business critical applications at all times and helps in quicker troubleshooting.The Business View Tab can
be accessed both from the Maps and Inventory section of OpManager.
Creating a Business View:
1. Go to Maps > Business Views > Create New. Or go to Inventory > Business Views > Add Business View.
2. Rename the Business view from 'New Business View' on the upper left corner to the desired one.
3. From the list of available devices, you can add devices onto the white board individually, using Drag and Drop or add devices in
bulk with Multi select option.
4. You can customize the view by changing font type, size and color.
5. Choose the required Background(Map) from the preloaded images or upload a new background image and select Apply.
6. Drag and drop devices on the Map based on your requirement.
7. Save the created view.
8. Select Exit to close the view. The created view would be displayed under the Business Views Tab.
Creating Links between devices:

Adding links between devices in business views, helps to represent network diagram on the map. These links can be configured
based on user requirements.
To add a link between two devices in a business view,
1. Select the Add link button next to the Background tab. Drag a link from the source to the destination device and click that device.
A link properties dialog pops up.
2. Alternatively you can also drag the link button at the top right corner of the source device icon to create a link to the destination
device.
3. Configure a display name for the link.
4. In the Get Status from field, select any interface from either the source device or the destination device. The link will inherit the
status of the interface that you choose here. For instance, if the source device goes down, and if you have selected an interface
from that device, the link also inherits the status of that device.
Note: You can also select to Get Status from either OpManager or NetFlow. If OpManager is selected, status is got through
Page 373
SNMP. If NetFlow is selected, detailed data like Top Source, Destination, QoS etc., can be obtained.
5. Select the line type and size.

6. Deselect the Show Arrow check box if you don't want to show the traffic arrows.
7. Click Apply.
8. Click Save on the left to save the changes.
Modifying Business Views:
1. To make changes to the existing business views, Access the business view from the Maps tab.
2. Click the Edit icon to modify the view properties.
3. After modifying the properties like adding/removing links, adding more devices to the view, adding shortcuts on the view, changing
background etc, click the Save button on the left to save the changes.
Adding Shortcuts:
You can add shortcut icons to business views that helps to easily navigate to a view from another view when objects are grouped
based on their geographical location.
1. Go to the business view and click the Edit option on right-top corner of the view.
2. Click the Add Shortcut button on the left. A shortcut properties dialog pops up.
3. Configure a name for the shortcut in the Shortcut Name field.
4. From the Open Submap list-box, select the map which should be opened when you click the shortcut.
5. Select the icon to be used for the shortcut from the Default Icons or select from the Custom Icon combo-box.
6. Click Apply for the shortcut to be added.
Page 374
Note: You must have created at least two business views to be able to add a shortcut from one view to another.
Traffic Load Legend:

Traffic load legend is a color coded representation of the status of the Link and Traffic load data of the devices in a Business view.
The Traffic load legend colors can be edited. To do this, go to Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Map Settings. Hover
your cursor on the color that you wish to change and click the edit icon that appears. Choose a color of your preference and click
Save.
Note: For the Traffic load legend to be displayed, make sure the devices in the Business view are not in unmanaged state. In
addition to this, the devices in the Business view should have atleast one active link connection with the availability of traffic.
Google Maps: Page 375
OpManager allows you to integrate Google Maps and place the devices on the maps according to the geographic distribution. Please
refer to the google licensing terms and pricing plans before you proceed further.
To configure Google maps
1. Download this map file to your desktop.

2. Map filed named GMaps_12300.zip is downloaded.
3. Upload the downloaded map file in OpManager and enter the API key. (In case you do not have the API key, click on the link given
above the API box in the client)
4. Accept the terms of service and click on 'Submit'.
Adding Devices on the Google Map
1. You can zoom in/out the map and double-click on the location where you want to place a discovered device.
2. A device list box pops up allowing you to select a device to be placed in that location.
3. Select the device and click on Add.
4. You can also add the devices to the map from the device snapshot page.
5. Go to the device snapshot page and select a device. Click on the green colored menu button.
6. Choose Add to Maps option to add the device to the map.
7. Once done, you can switch between the different views such as Road map, Terrain, Satellite, Hybrid (Satellite view with label) and
save it accordingly in Maps and its corresponding widgets.
Viewing Device Details from Google Map
1. Click on the device marker on the Google Map to see the device information popup.
2. Click the device name/IP address on this popup to get into the device snapshot page.
3. The popup also shows the device status.
Import/Export devices
1. Import: You can import device to Google maps directly from a CSV file. OpManager will position them on the map as per the
latitude and longitude details in the CSV file. However, only the devices that are already discovered in OpManager can be
imported.
2. Export: You can download the information of the devices that are placed on the Map including their geographic location (latitude
and longitude) in XLS format using this option.
Deleting Devices from Google Map
1. Click on the device marker on the Google Map to see a popup.

2. Click the Delete link on this popup to delete the device from the map.
Page 376
Page 377
Zoho Maps
OpManager uses Zoho Maps as the default map provider for the Maps feature. You can use it to visualize your network by placing
the devices on the maps according to their geographic distribution. You can also display the equivalent ground distance in
kilometres or miles using Zoho Maps.
Adding Devices on the Zoho Map�
1. Now, zoom in/out the map and double-click on the location where you want to place a discovered device.
2. A device list box pops up allowing you to select a device to be placed in that location.
3. Select the device and click on Add.
4. Add the required devices on to the map by double-clicking the location.
5. You can also add the devices to the map from the device snapshot page.
7. Click on Add to Map link in the page to add the device to the map.
Viewing Device Details from Zoho Map
1. Click on the device marker on the Zoho Map to see a popup.

2. Click the device name/IP� address on this popup to get into the device snapshot page.
3. The popup also shows the device status.
Deleting Devices from Zoho Map�
1. Click on the device marker on the Zoho Map to see a popup.

2. Click the Delete link on this popup to delete the device from the map.
�
Datacenter Visualization Page 378
OpManager helps in creating a virtual replication of Datacenter floors and racks to enable 24x7 monitoring. Datacenter visualization
is one among the many features of OpManager's data center networking tool.
3D Rack View:
Virtual Racks can be created with OpManager. These racks display the status of the devices present in them.
To create a Rack View,
1. Under Maps, select the Create New option under Rack Views Tab.
2. Drag and Drop the devices onto the Rack.
3. Click Save on the top right corner.
4. The status and availability of the devices can be seen in the rack created.
5. To observe the rear view of your rack in addition to the front view, click Edit and select Rear view.
3D Floor View:
Floor views can be created in OpManager. The racks are then loaded onto the floor views to create a virtual replica of the Data
center.
To create a Floor View,
1. Under Maps, select the Create New option under Floor Views Tab.
2. Select your floor size .
3. Drag and drop paths, aisles and walls as per your Data center.
4. Populate an existing rack view onto the floor map to create your Data center replica.
Page 379
Layer 2 Map Page 380
Create a Layer2 map:

OpManager renders the logical network topology diagram once you discover the networks and network devices. For a better
visualization of the physical network connectivity in real networks and the consequences of a failure of a device, network topology
map comes handy.
To create a Layer2 Map, go to Map > Layer 2 Maps > Create New. For detailed instructions click here.
Layer2 Map views:

After discovering your network topology, you can choose to view it in three different views, Radial Tree (default view), Node Link and
Balloon Tree. You can switch between the views by clicking on their respective icon present in the top right corner.
Layer2 Map Settings:

Click on the settings icon to explore additional functions.
Import Devices:
The devices that are discovered in Layer2 maps will not be added to OpManager for monitoring purposes unless they have been
imported.
Click on Settings and choose Import Devices. A screen containing all the devices that have been identified by the Layer2 Map
will be displayed. This list also includes the ones that have already been imported to OpManager.
From the list, select the devices that are yet to be imported to OpManager and click on Discover. Discovery process will
commence and a list of all the newly imported devices will be displayed in the device snapshot page.
ReDiscover Map:
This option is used when you want to rerun Layer2 discovery with-in the same device IP range specified in the discovery window.
You can also perform ReDiscovery by clicking on the refresh icon in the Layer2 section at the Map page
Save as Business View:

The devices that are identified in the Layer2 Map can be saved as a Business view. To do this, click on Save as Business View,
give the layout a name and press Save. The result can be viewed in the Business View section.
Export to Visio:
Visio is a Microsoft oowned graphic tool exclusively used for drawing network diagrams. The network map discovered in Layer2
Maps can be exported to Visio in an xml file. To know more, click here.
Printer Friendly View:

You can print a physical copy of your network layout using this option. Click on this button and you will be taken to the Print
page. Choose your print preferences and click print. You can also save this layout to your PC as a PDF.
Locating Layer 2 Maps:

OpManager automatically maps L2 devices when Layer 2 discovery is done. The resultant map can be viewed under the Layer 2 tab
of the Maps Section.
Page 381
Modifying Layer 2 Maps:
OpManager allows you to perform edits on Layer2 Maps that have already been discovered. Click on Maps from the horizontal tab
and scroll down to the Layer2 Maps section. In the Actions column, there is a provision to perform the following:
Re-Discovery:
Click on the refresh icon to rediscover all the devices within the IP range specified during Layer2 device discovery. This is
especially useful when:
You have added new devices to your topology.

You have updated the device template or interfaces that were connected to existing devices.
Made hardware changes to one or many devices.
Edit:
You can edit the discovery parameters (such as modifying the IP range, editing the seed router, changing the discovery
mechanism, set device dependency, change schedule discovery time) of the existing Layer2 Map and rerun the discovery
process.

Opmanager Userguide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Opmanager Userguide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Opmanager Userguide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OpManager Help Index 1

Hardware and Software requirements 2

No. of Devices Processor Memory Hard Disk

1 to 250 Intel Xeon 2.0 Ghz 4 cores/ 4 threads 4 GB 20 GB minimum

251 to 500 Intel Xeon 2.5 Ghz 4 cores/ 8 threads 8 GB 20 GB minimum

OpManager Plus (or) OpManager Standard/ Professional Edition with Add-ons

OpManager Enterprise Edition

OpManager Enterprise Edition with add-ons

Software Evaluation Production

Windows 10/8/7 (or) Windows Server 2019/ 2016/ 2012

Ubuntu / Suse / Red Hat Enterprise Linux (upto version 8)

Chrome/ Firefox/ Edge/ IE11

User Privilege: Local administrator privileges required for OpManager installation.

Ports used by the application

Ports used for monitoring

Ports used by add-ons

Comes bundled with the product.

1. For production use 64 bit versions of SQL

English with collation setting (SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS)

Japanese with collation setting (Japanese_CI_AS)

Mixed mode (MSSQL and Windows Authentication).

For data collection and monitoring of devices

Ports used by Applications Manager plugin

Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Windows

Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Windows

OpManager Central Server

Run the exe as 'administrator'

Step 2: Click 'Next' to proceed with installation.

Step 3: Click 'Yes' to the OpManager License agreement

Step 12: Click 'Finish' to complete OpManager Central Server installation.

OpManager Probe Server

Run the exe as 'administrator'

Step 2: Click 'Next' to proceed with installation

Step 3: Click 'Yes' to the OpManager License agreement

Click 'Register' to proceed.

Installing OpManager Enterprise Edition on Linux

Step 2: Login as root user.

Step 7: Verify the installation details and click 'Next'.

Step 8: Click 'Finish' to complete the installation process.

Step 2: Login as root user.

Step 8: Verify the installation details and click 'Next'.

Step 3: Select the location.

Step 4: Choose the installation directory

Step 5: Configure the Webserver Port

Step 3: Select the location.

Step 5: Verify the installation details and the installation status.

Starting OpManager Enterprise Edition on Linux

Steps to configure MSSQL

Trap processing limit

Recommendations for Availability and Performance monitors

Protocol/Monitor type Max Number of Monitors Per Installation

Overall, the maximum number of monitors per installation is 20000.

Migrating Central and Probe

To move only the installation without moving the database.

Data Backup and Restoration

When should you migrate?

When hardware, server OS, or SQL requirements have been changed.

Migrating Central and Probe from one server to another server

Case 2: To move both the database and the installed machine.